Volume 3 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications

8/11/2019 Volume 3 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volume-3-electrical-and-mechanical-specifications 1/312

AEB-695-07 REV.00

OFFICE BUILDING (3B + G + M + 9)

FOR

MR. ALI MOHD. JAIDAHAT

B-RING ROAD, DOHA JADEED, STATE OF QATAR

OFFICE BUILDING (3B+G+M+9)FOR MR. ALI MOHD. JAIDAH

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONSVOLUME 3 – ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL



SECTION – 11

INTERGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM



MIXED USE BUILDING -IBMS 695-07

Technical Specifications Arab Engineering Bureau

AEB 695-071

Section 11.0-BMS System

Rev 0

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

PART-1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

RELATED WORK

QUALITY ASSURANCE

SUBMITTALS

WARRANTY

TECHNICAL SUBMITTAL

PART-2 PRODUCTS

NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS

DDC SUPERVISORY CONTROLLER

DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESIDENTSOFTWARE FEATURES

LOCAL USER DISPLAY

PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE

WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE

FIELD DEVICES

MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

INTERGRATION FOR FIRE ALARM / LIFE SAFETY

INTERGRATION OF OTHER SYSTEMS / EQUIPMENTS

PART-3 EXECUTION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

POINT SCHEDULE MATRIX-1 / 0 SCHEDULE

START-UP AND COMMISSIONING





AEB 695-072


Rev 0

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS

CONTROL AIR AND SENSING LINES

PERFORMANCE

COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

TRAINING

GENERAL NOTES

PART- 4 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

PART- 5 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS





AEB 695-073


Rev 0

INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART- 1 GENERAL

The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install afully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control(DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, andsubsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified.

Provide open communications system. The system shall be an open architecturewith the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish thiseffectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows aswell as be able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols.System shall be capable of BACnet communication according to ASHRAEstandard SPC-135A/95. System shall be capable of OPC server communicationsaccording to OPC Data Access 2.0 and Alarms and Events 1.0. System shall becapable of LonWorks communication using the LonTalk protocol. The systemshall not be limited to only use open communication protocols, but also be able tointegrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications via existing vendorprotocols and through the latest software standards.

The intent is to either use the Operator Workstation provided under this contract tocommunicate with control systems provided by other vendors or to allowinformation about the system provided in this contract to be sent to anotherworkstation. This allows the user to have a single seat from which to perform dailyoperation.

The installation of the control system shall be performed under the directsupervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flowdiagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number andsequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installingmanufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have beenprepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturerhas supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shallcertify, in writing, that the shop drawings were prepared by their company andthat all temperature control equipment was installed under their directsupervision.

C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly

manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed speciallyfor this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly testedand proven in actual use for at least two years.

D. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Controlwiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done inaccordance with all local and national codes.

This contractor shall furnish and install an interface to provide integration of f irealarm and life safety system information into the BAS for centralized alarming,monitoring, maintenance reporting, graphical display, and historical datacollecting.





AEB 695-074


Rev 0

F. The chiller equipment supplier shall provide proof of experience with integrationof the type outlined in this specification. The supplier shall provide individualsexperienced with the installation and start-up of equipment relating tointegration.

1. 1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Mechanical works including the installation of all wells, valves, taps, dampers,flow stations, etc. furnished by BAS manufacturer.

B. Electrical works including :1. 220/240 VAC power to all BAS an/or Temperature control panels2. Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motor.3. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor

speed control devices not furnished by BAS manufacturer4. Wiring of any electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BAS

manufacturer.

C. IBMS shall coverC.1- the following itemsControl ValvesFlow SwitchesFlow MetersPressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets Automatic DampersTerminal Unit Controls :Pressure TransmittersTemperature TransmittersPower TransmittersThermostatsSensorsControllersSmoke Detectors

C.2 - the following equipmentsChillersChilled water re-circulation pumpsChilled water pressurization packageImpulse car park ventilation system

Stairwell/liftwell pressurization systemEscape route pressurization systemTreated fresh air handling unitsToilet / pantry extract fansSplit a/c unitsSmoke clearance ventsDomestic water booster setsHot watercirculation pumpsSump pumpsFire pumps (electric, diesel, jockey)Water tanksFan coil units





AEB 695-075


Rev 0

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. General and Special ConditionsB. Mechanical works specificationsC. Electrical works specifications

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and servicedby manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall havean in-place support facility in QATAR with technical staff, spare parts inventoryand necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installingcontractors are not acceptable.

The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site, experienced project manager forthis work, responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and

commissioning of the B.M.S.

The BAS specialist shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing,installation and maintenance of BMS systems and shall have a minimum often (10) years of demonstrated technical expertise and experience in themanufacture, installation and maintenance of B.M.S. systems similar in sizeand complexity to this project. A maintained service organization consistingof at least ten (10) competent servicemen for a period of not less than tenyears and provide a list of 10 projects, similar in size and scope to thisproject, completed within the last five years.

B. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturersregularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperaturecontrol systems and shall be manufacturer's latest standard design thatcomplies with the specification requirements.

All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local userdisplays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916 / 873.

G. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall providedocumentation supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (Theapplication of well-accepted business management principles to the

environment). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that theproducts from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System andFramework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for thisproject.

This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for aminimum of 15 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than10 years.

J. This contractor shall provide proof of experience with integration to firealarm/life safety systems. Provide individuals experienced with the installationand startup of equipment related to this type of integration.





AEB 695-076


Rev 0

1. 4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit (3) complete sets of documentation in the following phased deliveryschedule:

1. Valve and damper schedules2. Equipment data cut sheets3. System schematics, including:

Sequence of operationsPoint namesPoint addressesInterface wiring diagramsPanel layouts.System riser diagrams

4. Auto-CAD compatible as-built drawings

B. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals,consisting of the following:

Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical orderManufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of the system, Auto-CAD disk of system schematics, including wiring diagramsDescription of sequence of operations As-Built interconnection wiring diagramsOperator's ManualTrunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations, and all trunkdataList of connected data points, including panels to which they are connected andinput device (ionization detector, sensors, etc.)Conduit routing diagrams

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successfuloperation of the entire BAS system for a period of one year from the date ofhanding over of the system.

B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes allcomputer equipment, transmission equipment and all sensors and control

devices.

C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial outover telephone lines to monitor and control the facility's building automationsystem. This remote connection to the facility shall be within 2 hours of thetime that the problem is reported. This coverage shall be extended to includenormal business hours, after business hours, weekends and holidays.

If the problem cannot be resolved on-line by the local office, the national officeof the building automation system manufacturer shall have the samecapabilities for remote connection to the facility. If the problem cannot beresolved with on-line support services, the BAS manufacturer shall dispatch the

appropriate personnel to the job site to resolve the problem within 3 hours ofthe time that the problem is reported.





AEB 695-077


Rev 0

1.6 TECHNICAL SUBMITTAL

A. Technical submittals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications.Four (3) copies of the proposal shall be submitted for approval. The technical

submittal shall include the following data/information as a minimum. The order oflisting here is not intended to indicate, nor should it be construed to indicate, therelative importance of the data/information:

1. Information on organizational capability to handle this project (management,personnel, manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.)

2. Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.

3. System Configuration as Proposed:

a. Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location and

type (model number) of all control panels.

b. Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.

c. Modularity.

d. Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.

e. Provide hardware and software data sheets on interfaces third party systems(e.g. chiller).

4. Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration.

5. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energymanagement software provided for this project.

6. A signed certificate stating the Contractor "has read the performance andfunctional requirements, understands them and his technical proposal willcomply with all parts of the specification."

7. Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are locatedthroughout this specification.

8. Line by line specification concordance statement.

PART- 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS

2.1.1 The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDCControllers. The network architecture shall consist of multiple levels forcommunication efficiency, a campus-wide (Management Level Network) Ethernetnetwork based on TCP/IP protocol, high performance peer-to-peer building levelnetwork(s) and DDC Controller floor level local area networks with access beingtotally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing controlprograms.





AEB 695-078


Rev 0

System shall have the capability to communicate with a BACnet network over Ethernet orBACnet/IP (according to Annex J). The intent is to use the system provided underthis contract to communicate with control systems provided by other vendors. APICS must be provided describing the BACnet, ANSI/ASHRAE 135-95,implementation. Minimum system functionality must include monitoring,

commanding, and alarming for daily operator functions from a commonworkstation.

System shall have the capability to be an OPC Client and Server for dynamiccommunication with OPC Clients or Servers over an Ethernet network. At aminimum, the following must be supported:

Data Access 1.0 (96), 1.0A (97) and 2.0 (11/98)

Alarms & Events 1.0 (1/99)

2.1.3.3 Peer-to-Peer Building Level Network:

1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modemsshall have the ability to access all point status and application report data orexecute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peernetwork. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number ofdevices with global access to the network data at any time.

2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers andPC workstations

3. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer to peer networkshardwired or dial up.

The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm, security,lighting, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol processor. Thisprocessor shall exchange data between the two systems for inter processcontrol. All exchange points shall have full system functionality as specifiedherein for hardwired points.

Field panels must be capable of integration with open standards includingModbus, BACnet, and Lon works as well as with third party devices via existingvendor protocols.

6. Telecommunication Capability:

a. Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow SupervisoryEthernet DDC Controllers to communicate with remote operator stations and/orremote terminals via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence ofoperations.

b. Auto-dial Supervisory Ethernet DDC Controllers shall automatically place callsto workstations to report alarms or other significant events. The auto-dialprogram shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no answers" and

incomplete data transfers.





AEB 695-079


Rev 0

c. Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions,all report functions and all database generation and modification functions asdescribed for workstations connected via the network. Routines toautomatically answer calls from remote Supervisory Ethernet DDC or HVACMechanical Equipment Controllers shall be inherent in the Supervisory Ethernet

Controller. The use of additional firmware or software is not acceptable. Thefact that communications are taking place with remote Supervisory EthernetDDC or HVAC & Mechanical Equipment Controllers over telephone lines shallbe completely transparent to an operator.

Multiple modems shall be supported by Supervisory Ethernet DDC or HVAC &Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the Peer-to-Peer Network to ensurecontinuous communication to workstation.

7. Intranet/Internet access

Web Based Operator Interface

The BAS shall be an inherent web based graphical interface that allows users toaccess the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface shalluse HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS to a webbrowser.

A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use Microsoft’s IISserver 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with Windows 2000, and supportbrowser access via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or NavigatorNetscape 6.0 (or higher).

All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and securevia SSL (provided by Owner).

Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights andprivileges to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the BASworkstation. An option will exist to only allow users “read” access via the webbrowser, while maintaining “command” privileges via the BAS workstation.

Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or creation ofHTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the BAS graphical workstationshall be available to users via a web browser.

The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users, basedon their access and privilege rights:

Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, password and Domainname for logging into the web server.

Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the user has access willbe displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge and erase active alarms, andlink to additional alarm information including alarm messages, andinformational and memo text. Any alarm acknowledgements initiated throughthe web interface will be written to the BAS central workstation activity log.

Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including animated motion,available in the BAS workstation will be available for viewing over the webbrowser. Software that requires creation of dedicated “web” graphics in order

to display them via the browser interface will not be acceptable. A graphicselector list will allow users to select any graphics to which they have access.





AEB 695-0710


Rev 0

Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest change of values.Users will have the ability to command and override points from the graphicdisplay as determined by their user accounts rights.

Point details – users will have access to point detail information including

operational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits, forpoint objects to which they have access rights.

Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points they haveaccess to via the web browser interface. Any commands or overrides initiatedvia the web browser interface will be written to the BAS central workstationactivity log.

g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by (5), browserconnections.

h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or proxy

servers shall be provided by the Owner as required to support the web accessfeature.

2.2 DDC SUPERVISORY CONTROLLER

This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllersand shall communicate with the peer-to-peer network through DDCControllers for transmission of global data.

The controller shall be Web-enabled, Ethernet-based controller that monitors andsupervises networks of field-level building automation controllers that typicallycontrol HVAC equipment, lighting, security and building access.

The controller shall provide features including alarm and event management,trending, archiving, energy management, data exchange, scheduling, dialfeatures, and password protection through its embedded Web-based UserInterface.

Should support Bacnet and Lon communication protocols.This network may utilize BACnet or the EIA standard 709.1, LonTalk protocol for

peer-to-peer communication and integration of 3rd party LonMark devices.

2.3 DDC & HVAC MECHANlCAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS

The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Building

Level Network, and shall be Lonmark or BACnet compliant.

DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same programminglanguage and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers whichrequire different programming language or tools on a network are notacceptable.

DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which do not meet the functionsspecified in Section 2.4.1 and Section 2.5 for DDC Controllers or Section2.4.2 and Section 2.5 for HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers are notacceptable.

2.3.1 DDC CONTROLLER





AEB 695-0711


Rev 0

A. DDC Controllers shall be a 16-bit stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user,real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware withplug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies andinput/output point modules. Controller shall be Lonamrk or BACnetcompliant. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of

this specification and the attached point I/O schedule. Each controller shallsupport a minimum of three (3) Floor Level Application Specific ControllerDevice Networks.

B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its ownoperating system and databases, including:

1. Control processes2. Energy management applications3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each

level alarm for each point in the system.4. Historical/trend data for points specified

5. Maintenance support applications6. Custom processes7. Operator I/O8. Dial-up communications9. Manual override monitoring

C. Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need toreplace hardware.

D. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so thatappropriate point input/output termination module and wiring.

E. DDC Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data communication ports foroperation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operatorterminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllersshall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normaloperation of permanently connected modems, printers or terminals.

F. As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability tomanually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDCController via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override

switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog controltype points.

1. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key-accessedenclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to preventunauthorized overrides.

2. DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform theoperator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall alsocollect override activity information for reports.

G. DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input

and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without





AEB 695-0712


Rev 0

the need for an operator I/O device. Status indication shall be visible withoutopening the panel door.

H. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC

Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detectedcomponent failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establishcommunication.

I. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well asall field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistentwith:

RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V

Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2) at 8kV air discharge, 4 kV contact

Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V signal,1 kV power

Output Circuit Transients

Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals tosuppress induced voltage transients consistent with:

IEEE Standard 587-1980

Supply Line TransientsVoltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)

J. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown ofall DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating systemsoftware. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controllerconfiguration data and battery backup shall be provided to support thereal-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 60 days.

1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automaticallyresume full operation without manual intervention.

2. Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have thecapability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, viatelephone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.

Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC system asindicated. It is intended that each unique system be provided with its ownpoint resident DDC Controller.

2.3.2 HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS

A. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be a 12-bit stand-alone,

multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of





AEB 695-0713


Rev 0

modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors. Controllers shall beLonmark or BACnet compliant.

B. Each HVAC Mechanical Controller shall have sufficient memory to support itsown operating system and databases, including:

1. Control processes2. Energy management applications3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each

level alarm for each point in the system.4. Historical/trend data for points specified5. Maintenance support applications6. Custom processes7. Operator I/O8. Remote communications

C. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data

communication port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industrystandard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator'sterminals.

D. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide local LED statusindication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verificationof all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.

E. Each HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall continuously performself-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components.The HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide both local andremote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditionsor repeated failure to establish communication.

F. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well asall field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistentwith:

RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 VElectro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2) at 8

kV air discharge, 4 kV contact

Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V signal,

1 kV powerOutput Circuit Transients Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC

input terminals to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:IEEE Standard 587-1980Supply Line TransientsVoltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)

G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown ofall HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers to prevent the loss of database oroperating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for allcritical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided tosupport the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.





AEB 695-0714


Rev 0

1. Upon restoration of normal power, the HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllershall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.

Should HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller memory be lost for any reason,the user shall have the capability of reloading the HVAC Mechanical Equipment

Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or from anetwork workstation PC.

2.4 DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESIDENT

SOFTWARE FEATURES

A. General:

1. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as anintegral part of DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers and shallnot be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

2. All points shall be identified by up to 30 character point name and 16character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PCworkstation.

3. All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication(descriptors with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e.summer/winter)).

B. Control Software Description:

1. The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the abilityto perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:

a. Two-position control

b. Proportional control

c. Proportional plus integral control

d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control

e. Automatic tuning of control loops

C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the followingenergy management routines for the purpose of optimizing energyconsumption while maintaining occupant comfort.

Start-Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated withevent scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at thelatest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zonecondition by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut downHVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of theoccupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions.

The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons.

It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to individual fan systems.





AEB 695-0715


Rev 0

The SSTO program shall operate on both outside weather conditions as well asinside zone conditions and empirical factors.

b) The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimumoutside air while the building is occupied.

Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program toautomatically start and stop designated points or groups of points according toa stored time.

It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of points.

For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to assignvariable time delays between each successive start or stop within that group.

The operator shall be able to define the following information:

Time, dayCommands such as on, off, auto, and so forth.Time delays between successive commands.There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule by an

appropriate operator.

It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance.

Scheduling shall be calendar based.Holidays shall allow for different schedules.

3. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) .The Energy Management Control Software(EMCS) will control the position of the air handler relief, return, and outside airdampers. If the outside air dry bulb temperature falls below changeover setpoint the EMCS will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outside air.The user will be able to quickly changeover to an economizer system basedon dry bulb temperature and will be able to override the economizer cycle andreturn to minimum outside air operation at any time.

4. Temperature-compensated duty cycling.

a) The DCCP (Duty Cycle Control Program) shall periodically stop and startloads according to various patterns.

The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the electricaldemands and the energy consumed.

5. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provideautomatic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.

6. Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to automaticallyadjust setpoints for night control.

The Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) program shall limit the consumption of electricityto prevent electrical peak demand charges.





AEB 695-0716


Rev 0

PDL shall continuously track the amount of electricity being consumed, bymonitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand meters. Thesemeters may measure the electrical consumption (kWh), electrical demand(kW), or both.

PDL shall sample the meter data to continuously forecast the demand likely to beused during successive time intervals.

If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is likely to exceed auser preset maximum allowable level, then PDL shall automatically shedelectrical loads.

Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed shall be restoredand returned to normal control.

D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to executecustom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform

calculations and special control routines.

1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated datafrom any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers onthe network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands topoints in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllerson the network. Database shall support 30 character, English language pointnames, structured for searching and logs.

2. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories tooperator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to aspecified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remotedevice such as a printer or pager.

3. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELPfunction key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task-orientated information from the user manual.

4. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capable ofcomment lines for sequence of operation explanation.

E. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm informationto operator devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllershall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimizeoperator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic andprevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC and HVACMechanical Equipment Controllers ability to report alarms be affected byeither operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device orcommunications with other panels on the network.

1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English languagedescription and the time and date of occurrence.

2. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed





AEB 695-0717


Rev 0

operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall beprovided for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with userdefinable destination categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to providefull flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVACMechanical Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of

selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have theability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.

3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operatordevices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority.

4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall beable to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fullydescribe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

5. In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to aremote operator device.

F. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually orautomatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified inthe I/O summary.

1. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point,regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored ineach DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Twomethods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval orupon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 daysshall be provided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllershall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capableof storing a minimum of data samples. All trend data shall be available fortransfer to a Workstation without manual intervention.

2. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide highresolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance.Operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall beprovided for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/Osummary.

a. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC and

HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network workstation orremotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall belimited to authorized personnel through password protection.

G. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be capable ofautomatically accumulating and storing run-time hours for digital input andoutput points and automatically sample, calculate and store consumptiontotals for analog and digital pulse input type points, as specified in the pointI/O schedule.

The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical EquipmentControllers to access any data from or send control commands and alarm

reports directly to any other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controlleror combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a





AEB 695-0718


Rev 0

central or intermediate processing device. DDC and HVAC MechanicalEquipment Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple workstation withoutdependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer topeer network shall also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical EquipmentController to access, edit, modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system

point database and all programs.

The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical EquipmentControllers to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control prioritiesto each point individually. The logon password (at any PC workstation orportable operator terminal) shall enable the operator to monitor, adjust andcontrol the points that the operator is authorized for. All other points shall notbe displayed on the PC workstation or portable terminal (e.g. all base buildingand all tenant points shall be accessible to any base building operators, butonly tenant points shall be accessible to tenant building operators).Passwords and priorities for every point shall be fully programmable andadjustable.

J. When part of a LonWorks network, the DDC or HVAC Mechanical EquipmentController shall have a common database server for all LonWorks networkinformation embedded. This embedded LonWorks network database servermaintains a dynamic, real time representation of the LonWorks networkincluding connections/bindings, node status, and configuration properties. APC must NOT be required for this database.

K. LonMark Terminal Equipment Controllers

Provide LonMark certified ASC for control of each piece of equipment,

Controllers shall provide a selection of control applications performable throughconfiguration (not programming) of the device without violating the LonMarkcertification.

Controllers shall operate in stand-alone mode as needed for specific controlapplications if network communication fails

Controller must include a FTT-10A transceiver for communication on theLonWorks network at 78.8K bps.

Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform thespecified control sequences. Inputs shall be universal for support of 0-10V,100k therm, 4-20mA or dry contact.

Controllers shall include spare inputs/outputs not used in the application to wire

accessories.Packaging shall be such that field wiring can be performed prior to the installation

of the controller. Board terminations shall be detachable from controller tofacilitate troubleshooting, repair, and replacement.

Utilize standard configuration parameter types (SCPT’s) for all productconfiguration parameters. Do not use network variable for this purpose.

A common Network Management Tool must be used for all LTECs and 3rd partyLonmark devices connected to the LonWorks FLN. This tool will perform allnode addressing, network setup and maintenance for the network regardlessof device manufacturer.

Shall include the following minimum services: device installation, device

configuration, device diagnostics, field programming, device maintenance,





AEB 695-0719


Rev 0

network variable binding, network variable browsing, network variablemonitoring.

Shall include all software modules necessary for complete network management,installation, and maintenance.

Shall support multiple service tools in a client/server network fashion.

If a manufacturer specific management tool is necessary, it shall be used only forapplication programming. It should be used for configuring and installing thedevice ONLY and not for any network function.

All LonMark ASC sensors, LonMark ASCs, and DDC Controllers with a LonWorksFLN must provide the Network Management Tool access to the entireLonWorks FLN via a RJ-11 port.

L. Digital Energy Monitors:

1 Provide three phase digital watt-meters with pre-wired CTs. All watt-meterelectronics shall be housed within the CTs. CTs shall include sizes capable ofmounting directly on a power bus. Diagnostics visible to the installingelectrician (without a operator tool) shall indicate: proper operation, mis-wiring or low power-factor, device malfunction, and over-load condition. Themeters shall include the following:

a. The device shall be UL Listed, and shall comply with ANSI C12.1 accuracyspecification. The minimum CT/meter combined accuracy shall be no greaterthan 1% of reading over the range of 5% to 100% of rated load. The metershall not require calibration

The wattmeter shall directly connect to power from 208 through 480 with nopotential transformer. In-line fuses for each voltage tap phase shall beincluded.

The wattmeter CTs shall be split-core and at minimum be sized to accommodateloads ranging from 100 to 2400 Amps. The CTs shall be volt-signal type, andshall not require shorting blocks.

The wattmeter shall reside directly on the Floor Level Network along with otherFLN devices. Data transferred shall include

kW & kWHConsumptionDemandPower Factor

CurrentVoltage Apparent PowerReactive Power

2.5 LOCAL USER DISPLAY

Where specified in the sequence of operation or points list, the controllers on thepeer to peer building level network shall have a display and keypad for localinterface. A keypad shall be provided for interrogating and commanding points inthe controller.

A. The display shall use the same security password and access rights for pointsin the display as is used in the associated controller.





AEB 695-0720


Rev 0

B. The LCD display shall be a minimum of a 2 line 40 character display.The LCD display shall include the full point name, value (numeric, digital or state

text),point priority and alarm status on one screen.

The LCD shall dynamically update the value, priority, and alarm status for thepoint being displayed.

The display shall be mounted either on the door of the enclosure or remote fromthe controller

2.6 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE

A. Personal computer operator workstations shall be provided for command entry,information management, system monitor, alarm management and databasemanagement functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in theDDC Controllers to facilitate greater distribution, fault tolerance and reliability of

the building automation control.

1. Provide workstation(s) of equal capability located at .

2. Workstation shall consist of a personal computer with minimum 256MB RAM,hard drive with 3.0 GB available space, video card capable of supporting 1024× 768 resolution with a minimum of 65536 colors (Windows NT) or 16 Bit color(Windows 2000), CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, or DVD-ROM Drive, mouse and101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal computer shall be a Windows XP, 2000or NT4 Compatible PC and shall include a minimum 933MHz Pentium-IIIprocessor.

3. The PC monitor shall support a minimum display resolution of no less than1024 X 768 pixels. Separate controls shall be provided for color, contrasts andbrightness. The screen shall be non-reflective.

B. Provide an Epson FX-870 or equivalent printer at each workstation location oron the network (Ethernet) for recording alarms, operator transactions andsystems reports.

Provide a color printer for printing of dynamic trend graph report, Excel reports,graphics and any other screen displays. Printer shall include as a minimumOkidata Microline 590 or equivalent.

Alarm Display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top of the display.The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of the associatedpoint graphic and message. The alarm display shall provide a mechanism forthe operator to sort alarms.

Intranet/Internet access

1. Web Based Operator Interface

The BAS shall be an inherent web based graphical interface that allows users toaccess the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface shall

use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS to a webbrowser.





AEB 695-0721


Rev 0

A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use Microsoft’s IISserver 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with Windows 2000, and supportbrowser access via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or NavigatorNetscape 6.0 (or higher).

All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and secure

via SSL (provided by Owner).

Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights andprivileges to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the BASworkstation. An option will exist to only allow users “read” access via the webbrowser, while maintaining “command” privileges via the BAS workstation.

Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or creation ofHTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the BAS graphical workstationshall be available to users via a web browser.

The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users, basedon their access and privilege rights:

Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, password and Domainname for logging into the web server.

Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the user has access willbe displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge and erase active alarms, andlink to additional alarm information including alarm messages, andinformational and memo text. Any alarm acknowledgements initiated throughthe web interface will be written to the BAS central workstation activity log.

Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including animated motion,available in the BAS workstation will be available for viewing over the webbrowser. Software that requires creation of dedicated “web” graphics in orderto display them via the browser interface will not be acceptable. A graphicselector list will allow users to select any graphics to which they have access.Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest change of values.Users will have the ability to command and override points from the graphicdisplay as determined by their user accounts rights.

Point details – users will have access to point detail information includingoperational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits, forpoint objects to which they have access rights.

Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points they haveaccess to via the web browser interface. Any commands or overrides initiatedvia the web browser interface will be written to the BAS central workstationactivity log.

g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by (5), (10), (25),(50), (100) browser connections.

h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or proxyservers shall be provided by the Owner as required to support the web accessfeature.





AEB 695-0722


Rev 0

2.7 WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Basic Interface Description

1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator trainingthrough the use of user-friendly and interactive graphical applications, 30-character English language point identification, on-line help, and industrystandard Windows application software. Interface software shallsimultaneously communicate with and share data between any combination ofdedicated, modem autodial, and Ethernet-connected building level networks.

The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality:

a. Real-time graphical viewing and control of the BAS environmentb. Reportingc. Scheduling and override of building operationsd. Collection and analysis of historical dataPoint database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases.Utility for combining points into logical Point Groups. The Point Groups shall then

be manipulated in Graphics, trend graphs and reports in order to streamlinethe navigation and usability of the system.

f. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgmentg. “Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram application:

Showing the real-time status and definition details of all workstations anddevices on a management level network

Showing the real-time status and definition details of all DDC and HVACMechanical Controllers at the building level

Showing the status and definition details of all field-level applicationcontrollers

h. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.

i. Online, context-sensitive help, including an index, glossary of terms, and thecapability to search help via keyword or phrase.

j. On-screen access to User Documentation, via online help or PDF-format

electronic file.k. Automatic database backup at the workstation for database changes initiated

at DDC Controller operator interface terminals.l. Display dynamic trend data graphical plot.

Each plot must be capable of supporting 10 pts/plot minimumMust be able to command points directly off dynamic trend plot application.Must be able to plot both real-time and historical trend data

n. Transfer trend data to 3rd party spreadsheet software

2. Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of keyboardthrough the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, with a "point and click"approach to menu selection and a “drag and drop” approach to inter -

application navigation. Selection of applications within the workstationsoftware shall be via a graphical toolbar menu – the application toolbar menu





AEB 695-0723


Rev 0

shall have the option to be located in a docked position on any of the foursides of the visible desktop space on the workstation display monitor, and theoption to automatically hide itself from the visible monitor workspace when notbeing actively manipulated by the user.

3. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows theuser to run several applications simultaneously. BAS software shall run on aWindows XP, 2000 or NT 32 bit operating system. Standard Windowsapplications shall run simultaneously with the BAS software. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multipleapplications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, andother Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line BAS alarms and monitoring information.

a. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed

simultaneously on-line, and in any combination, via adjustable user-sizedwindows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop information between thefollowing applications, reducing the number of steps to perform a desiredfunction (e.g., Click on a point on the alarm screen and drag it to the dynamictrend graph application to initiate a dynamic trend on the desired point):

1. Dynamic color graphics application2. Alarm management application3. Scheduling application4. Dynamic trend graph data plotter application5. Dynamic system architecture diagram application6. Control Program and Point database editing applications7. Reporting applications

b. Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via Windows Print Manager,allowing use of network printers.

4. Operator-specific password access protection shall be provided to allow theadministrator/manager to limit users’ workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, basedupon an assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator toany workstation logged onto (up to 999 user accounts shall be supported).The administrator/manager shall be able to grant discrete levels of access

and privileges, per user, for each point, graphic, report, schedule, and BASworkstation application. And each BAS workstation user account shall use aWindows 2000/NT user account as a foundation.

5. Dynamic Color Graphics application shall include the following:

Must include graphic editing and modifying capabilities A library of standard control application graphics and symbols must be

includedMust be able to command points directly off graphics applicationGraphic display shall include the ability to depict real-time point values

dynamically with animation, picture/frame control, symbol association, or

dynamic informational text-blocks





AEB 695-0724


Rev 0

Navigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achievedthrough a hierarchical “tree” structure

Graphics viewing shall include zoom capabilitiesGraphics shall automatically display the HAND status of points that have been

overridden by a field HAND switch, for points that have been designed to

provide a field HAND override capability.

Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability tonavigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet webaddresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications,directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on acustomizable link symbol.

6. Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined schedule, anddirected to CRT displays, printers or file. As a minimum, the system shallallow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:

a. A general listing of all or selected points in the networkb. List of all points currently in alarmc. List of all points currently in override statusd. List of all disabled pointse. List of all points currently locked outf. List of user accounts and access levelsg. List all weekly schedules and eventsh. List of holiday programmingi. List of control limits and deadbands

j. Custom reports from 3rd party software

k. System diagnostic reports including, list of DDC panels on line andcommunicating, status of all DDC terminal unit device points

List of programsList of point definitionsList of logical point groupsList of alarm strategy definitionsList of DDC Control panelsPoint totalization reportPoint Trend data listingsInitial Values reportUser activity report

7. Scheduling and override

Provide a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling andoverrides of building operations. Schedule definitions reside in the PCworkstation, DDC Controller, and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller toensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line -- PC is not required toexecute time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection,graphical mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as aminimum:a. Weekly schedulesb. Zone schedulesc. Event schedules – an event consists of logical combinations of equipment

and/or zonesd. Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to 365 days in advance





AEB 695-0725


Rev 0

Additionally, the scheduling application shall:a. Provide filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, frequency,

and schedule type (event, zone, report)b. Provide sorting capabilities of schedules, based on name, time and type of

schedule (zone, event, report)

c. Provide searching capabilities of schedules based on name – with wildcardingoptions

8. Collection and Analysis of Historical Data

a. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserverecords of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system pointmay be trended automatically at time-based intervals (up to four time-baseddefinitions per point) or change of value, both of which shall be user-definable.

Trend data shall be collected stored on hard disk for future diagnostics andreporting. Automatic Trend collection may be scheduled at regular intervalsthrough the same scheduling interface as used for scheduling of zones, events,and reports. Additionally, trend data may be archived to network drives orremovable disk media for future retrieval.

b. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended pointdata. Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefinedgroups of selected points. Provide additional functionality to allow predefinedgroups of up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on-line to MicrosoftExcel. DDC contractor shall provide custom designed spreadsheet reports foruse by the owner to track energy usage and cost, equipment run times,equipment efficiency, and/or building environmental conditions. DDCcontractor shall provide setup of custom reports including creation of dataformat templates for monthly or weekly reports.

B. Dynamic Colour Graphic Displays

1. Create colour graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each pieceof mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systemsand hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal units, shall be providedby the BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O schedule of this specificationto optimize system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition.

2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various systemschematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection,point alarm association, or text-based commands. Graphics software shallpermit the importing of AutoCAD or scanned pictures for use in the system.

3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indicationshall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematicsor graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to representcurrent conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screenrefresh rates.

Provide the user the ability to display real-time point values by animated motionor custom picture control visual representation. Animation shall depict





AEB 695-0726


Rev 0

movement of mechanical equipment, or air or fluid flow. Picture Controlshall depict various positions in relation to assigned point values or ranges. A library (set) of animation and picture control symbols shall be includedwithin the workstation software’s graphics application. Animation shallreflect, ON or OFF conditions, and shall also be optionally configurable for

up to five rates of animation speed.

Sizable analog bars shall be available for monitor and control of analog values;high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale. Theuser shall be able to "click and drag" the pointer to change the setpoint.

Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by defined pointgroups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.

Equipment state or values can be changed by clicking on the associated pointblock or graphic symbol and selecting the new state (on/off) or setpoint.

State text for digital points can be user-defined up to eight characters.

4. Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of theequipment changes. The state colors shall be user definable.

5. Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability tonavigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet webaddresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications,directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on acustomizable link symbol.

6. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow theuser to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze totalbuilding operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarmto be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

7. Off the shelf graphic software, Microgafx Designer or Corel Draw software,shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify or delete system graphicbackground displays.

A clipart library of HVAC application and automation symbols shall be providedincluding fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard ductwork

diagrams and laboratory symbols. The user shall have the ability to addcustom symbols to the clipart library. The clipart library shall include aminimum of 400 application symbols. In addition, a library consisting of aminimum of 700 graphic background templates shall be provided.

The Graphics application shall include a set of standard Terminal Equipmentcontroller application-specific background graphic templates. Templates shallprovide the automatic display of a selected Terminal Equipment controller’scontrol values and parameters, without the need to create separate andindividual graphic files for each controller.

C. System Configuration & Definition





AEB 695-0727


Rev 0

1. A“ Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram/display applicationof the site-specific BAS architecture showing status of controllers, PCworkstations and networks shall be provided. This application shall includethe ability to add and configure workstations, DDC Controllers or HVACMechanical Equipment controllers, as well as 3rd-party integratedcomponents. Symbols/Icons representing the system architecturecomponents shall be user-configurable and customizable, and a library ofcustomized icons representing 3rd-party integration solutions shall beincluded. This application shall also include the functionality for real-timedisplay, configuration and diagnostics of dial-up modems to DDC Controllers.

2. Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDCController or HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller, but shall be able toinclude data from any and all other network panels to allow the developmentof Global control strategies.

3. Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller and HVACMechanical Equipment controller databases on the workstation hard disk. Inaddition, all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall beautomatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller orHVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller. Changes made at the user-interfaceof DDC Controllers or HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall beautomatically uploaded to the workstation, ensuring system continuity.

4. System configuration, programming, editing, graphics generation shall beperformed on-line. If programming and system back-up must be done with thePC workstation off-line, the BAS contractor shall provide at least 2 operatorworkstations.

5. Point database configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicatedpoint database editor application included in the workstation software. Theeditor shall allow the user to create, view existing, modify, copy, and deletepoints from the database. The point editor shall also allow the user to

configure the alarm management strategy for each point. The editor shallprovide the option for editing the point database in an online or offline modewith the DDC Controllers.

a. The workstation software shall also provide the capability to perform bulkmodification of point definition attributes to a single or multiple user-selectedpoints. This function shall allow the user to choose the properties to copyfrom a selected point to another point or set of points. The selectableattributes shall include, but are not limited to, Alarm management definitionsand Trend definitions.

D. Alarm Management





AEB 695-0728


Rev 0

Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers orworkstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.

Alarm Notification shall be presented to each workstation in a tabular formatapplication, and shall include the following information for each alarm point:name, value, alarm time & date, alarm status, priority, acknowledgementinformation, and alarm count. Each alarm point or priority shall have theability to sound a discrete audible notification.

Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the alarms based on alarm status,point name, ascending or descending alarm time.

Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge,silence the alarm sound, print, or erase each alarm. The interface shall also

have the option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged alarms, until theyhave returned to normal status. The user shall also have the ability tocommand, launch an associated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run areport on a selected alarm point directly on the Alarm Display.

Each alarm point shall have a direct link from the Alarm Display to further user-defined point informational data. The user shall have the ability to alsoassociate real-time electronic annotations or notes to each alarm.

Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point, or each alarm priority level,to display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in theevent of an alarm. Alarm messages shall also have the optional ability toindividually enunciate on the workstation display via a separate pop-upwindow, automatically being generated as the associated alarm conditionoccurs.

Alarm Display application shall allow workstation operators to send and receivereal-time messages to each other, for purposes of coordinating Alarm andBAS system management.

Remote notification of messagesWorkstation shall be configured to send out messages to numeric pagers,

alphanumeric pagers, phones (via text to speech technology), SMS (Simple

Messaging Service, text messaging) Devices, and email accounts based on apoint’s alarm condition.

There shall be no limit to the number of points that can be configured for remotenotification of alarm conditions and no limit on the number of remote deviceswhich can receive messages from the system.

On a per point basis, system shall be configurable to send messages to anindividual or group and shall be configurable to send different messages todifferent remote devices based on alarm message priority level.

Remote devices may be scheduled as to when they receive messages from thesystem to account for operators’ work schedules.

System must be configurable to send messages to an escalation list so that if thefirst device does not respond, the message is sent on to the next device after

a configurable time has elapsed.Message detail shall be configurable on a per user basis.





AEB 695-0729


Rev 0

During a ”flood” of alarms, remote notification messages shall have the ability tooptimize several alarms into an individual remote notification message.

Workstation shall have the ability to send manual messages allowing an operatorto type in a message to be sent immediately.

Workstation shall have a feature to send a heartbeat message to periodicallynotify users that they have communication with the system.

Always visible non-obtrusive alarm display

An alarm display must be active and visible to the operator at all times, regardlessof what other workstation applications the operator is involved in.

This display shall provide an overview of the system status including fire, security,and building automation events.

This display shall display a textual description of the highest priority event on thesystem as well the point status and indication of when the point last changedstate.

This display shall indicate whether the highest priority event has beenacknowledged.

When a new alarm is received at a workstation, the operator shall be informed ofthe new event through an audible and visual notification without applicationfocus being drawn away from the application that the operator is currentlyworking with.

Acknowledgement

Operators shall be allowed to acknowledge events in any order, regardless of theirpriority, or which system (fire, security, automation) they reside on.

The interface shall clearly display whether a point has been acknowledged andwho it was acknowledged by.

When a point has gone in and out of trouble repeatedly, an operator shall bepermitted to acknowledge every change of state in a single operation ratherthan having to explicitly acknowledge every change of state.

E. Workstation Communications

1. Provide automatic dial-up communications for buildings as specified.

Automatic dial-up communications shall include the following features as aminimum:

a. Dial-Out

1) Manual dial-out from the workstation to remote networks shall beaccomplishable using only a mouse to select and request the desired remoteconnection.

b. Dial-In

1) Alarms shall automatically dial into the workstation for display at the

workstation monitor and for hard copy printout at the associated event printer.





AEB 695-0730


Rev 0

2) Alarms shall, at the operator's option, dial into a stand-alone modem-printer toprovide for real-time alarm printouts even when the workstation is off-line(such as when it is being used to run operator-selected 3rd party software).

3) Trend data from remote networks shall be scheduled for automatic updatingto the workstation at operator-selected times. The operator shall also havethe option of manually collecting trend data at any time.

2.8 FIELD DEVICES

A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimizationfunctions. All devices and equipment shall be approved for installation in theCity of Doha

B. Room Temperature SensorsDigital room sensors shall have LCD display, day / night override button, and

setpoint slide adjustment override options. The setpoint slide adjustment canbe software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of roomadjustment.

Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F -13° to 49°C)Output signal Changing resistance

Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/- 0.3°C)Set Point and Display Range 55° to 95° F (13° to 35°C)

2) Liquid immersion temperature:Temperature monitoring range +30/250°F (-1°/121°C)Output signal Changing resistance Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)

3) Duct (single point) temperature:Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F (-7°/49°C)Output signal Changing resistance Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)

4) Duct Average temperature:Temperature monitoring range +20° +120°F(-7°/+49°C)Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+03°C)

Sensor Probe Length 25’ L (7.3m)

Outside air temperature:Temperature monitoring range -58°+122° F(-50ºC to +50ºC)Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)

C. Liquid Differential Pressure TransmitterRanges 0-5/30 inches H20

0-25/150 inches H200-125/750 inches H20

Output 4 – 20 mA DCCalibration Adjustments Zero and span





AEB 695-0731


Rev 0

Accuracy +-0.2% of spanLinearity +-0.1% of spanHysteresis +-0.05% of span

Differential pressure:Unit for fluid flow proof shall be Penn P74.

Range 8 to 70 psiDifferential 3 psiMaximum differential pressure 200 psiMaximum pressure 325 psi

2. Unit for air flow shall beSet point ranges: 0.5” WG to 1.0” WG (124.4 to 248.8 Pa)

1.0” WG to 12.0” WG (248.8 to 497.6 Pa)

Static pressure sensor:Range 0 to .5” WG (0 to 124.4 Pa)

0 to 1” WG (0 to 248.8 Pa) 0 to 2” WG (0 to 497.7 Pa) 0 to 5” WG (0 to 1.2 kPa 0 to 10” WG (0 to 2.5 kPa)

Output Signal 4 – 20 mA VDCCombined static error 0.5% full rangeOperating Temperature -40º to 175º F (-40C to 79.5ºC)

F. Air Pressure Sensor:Range: 0 to 0.1 in. water (0 to 24.9 Pa)

0 to 0.25 in. water (0 to 63.2 Pa)0 to 0.5 in. water (0 to 124.5 Pa)0 to 1.0 in. water (o to 249 Pa)0 to 2.0 in water 90 to 498 Pa)0 to 5.0 in. water (0 to 1.25 kPa)0 to 10.0 in.water (0 to 2.49 kPa)

Output signal 4 to 20 mA Accuracy +1.0% of full scale

G. Humidity Sensors:

Range 0 to 100% RHSensing Element Bulk PolymerOutput Signal 4 – 20 mA DC Accuracy At 77°F(25ºC) + 2% RH

Pressure to Current TransducerRange 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or

3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa)

Output signal 4 – 20 mA Accuracy + 1% of full scale (+ 0.3 psig)

Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators).





AEB 695-0732


Rev 0

Electric ControlRangeability 40:1Flow Characteristics Modified. Equal percentageControl Action Normal open or closed as selectedMedium Steam, water, glycolBody Type Screwed ends 2” and smaller, flanged

Valves 2½” and larger Body Material BronzeBody Trim BronzeStem Stainless Steel Actuator 0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position

24 VAC/120VAC

All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided withCharacterized throttling plugs and shall be sized for minimum 25% of thesystem pressure drop or 5 psi, whichever is less.

Positive positioning relays shall be provided on pneumatic control when requiredto provide sufficient power for sequencing.

Two position valves shall be line size.

J. Damper Actuators

1. Electric control shall be direct coupled actuators.

2. Damper actuators shall be Brushless DC Motor Technology with stallprotection, bi-directional, fail safe spring return, all metal housing, manualoverride, independently adjustable dual auxiliary switch.

a) The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and propermounting and connection to a standard ½” diameter shaft or damper blade.

3. Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft withoutthe need for connecting linkages.

4. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-centering damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of theactuator’s output coupling with the damper shaft. The self -centering clampshall have a pair of opposed “v” shaped toothed cradles; each having tworows of teeth to maximize holding strength. A single clamping bolt shallsimultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the damper shaft.

5. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a 1”diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.

6. All actuators shall be designed and manufactured using ISO900registered

procedures, and shall be Listed under Standards UL873 and CSA22.2 No.24-93 l.





AEB 695-0733


Rev 0

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

Thermostats

Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a

temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats withlimit stops to limit adjustments as required.)

Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions

without overlap.Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws.

Firestats:

Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal

actuated switch.

Switch shall have adequate rating for required load.

Current Sensing Relay:

Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay whichchanges switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value ofcurrent in the monitored A/C circuit.

Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation underload as an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded runningmotor as an “off” state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloadedmotor.

Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.

2.10 INTEGRATION FOR FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY

General:

Provide a software driver that will provide a supervised link from the fire alarmsystem. Integration between the fire alarm system and the BAS is intended toallow single seat operation for basic monitoring functions.

Interface shall be UUKL Listed for smoke control

Interface shall be UL Listed under UL 864 categories UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL, UDTZ,and QVAX, UL 1076 category APOU, and UL 916 category PAZX.

Testing and software configuration shall be provided as required during startupand commissioning.

Any break in communications between the fire and BAS systems shall beannunciated at each system. Upon restoration of communications, theinterface shall automatically refresh fire alarm point status.





AEB 695-0734


Rev 0

Provide any miscellaneous equipment required by the building automationsystem, such as trunk interfaces, modems, etc. to support the connectionbetween the fire alarm systems and BAS.

The interface shall include a driver that provides communications from the firealarm/life safety system to the building automation system. Each point will bemapped into the BAS so that they can be monitored and alarmed as thoughthey were native to the BAS. See the point schedule in Part 3 for a list ofpoints that are to be integrated into the BAS.

Hardware

All components required to provide integration shall be common to the BAS or firealarm system. No third party hardware shall be allowed. No special hardwareused only for integration purposes, or hardware not integral to the either theBAS or fire alarm system shall be allowed.

All hardware used for interfacing the automation system to the fire alarm systemmust be UL Listed for smoke control under UL 864 category UUKL.

Software

The interface shall provide a supervised link from the fire alarm system to theBAS. System administrators shall be able to configure the system to preventoperators from changing, reconfiguring, acknowledging or resetting the firealarm system such that the fire alarm system remains the primary firecommand station if desired.

The fire alarm system labels for each point shall be displayed as the alarmmessage text for each point in alarm. The interface shall report the followingdata from the fire alarm system for basic monitoring:

Normal point status Alert for dirty for each pointStatus activity Activated under testTrouble (open/short)Supervisory Alarm

Points that are mapped through the interface shall be able to be accessed bystandard applications in the BAS such as programming, alarm routing,graphics, and scheduling.

The following reports shall be provided at the BAS workstation:

Maintenance reportHistory report of point and operator activityTest report, storing test results and status for each test detector

Operators shall be allowed to schedule reports to run unattended with theiroutputs directed to the operator screen, to a printer, and/or to a file.





AEB 695-0735


Rev 0

Operator messages shall distinguish between the active state and troubleconditions on any point (alarm, supervisory, security, etc.).

Remote Access

The interface shall support either the ability of an operator to connect to thesystem via dial-up telephone connections or via the internet in order toperform diagnostics. The interface shall prevent an operator from affectingthe operation of the fire alarm system, or interfering with fire alarm systemprogramming remotely.

2.11 INTEGRATION OF OTHER SYSTEMS/EQUIPMENT

The following sub-systems shall be integrated to the IBMS:

Security system (BACnet, ODBC link)

UPS (Modbus, Lon, SNMP)Lifts (hardwired points)Generators (Modbus, hardwired)MV Panel (Modbus, hardwired)Dry transformer-temperature onlyMotor control centers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following:

Construct and maintain project scheduleOn-site coordination with all applicable trades, subcontractors, and otherintegration vendors Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from owner/architect Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflicts and delaysMake necessary field decisions relating to this scope of workCoordination/Single point of contact

3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Job specific - per job requirements to be submitted for approval of Engineer bythe Contractor.

3.3 POINT SCHEDULE MATRIX - I/0 SCHEDULE

The contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer/ end user representative todetermine the preference for naming conventions, etc. before entering the data into the system.

3.4 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING





AEB 695-0736


Rev 0

A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verifytransmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing,calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by themanufacturer. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the

specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power.

Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to owner. Do notmake any system modification, including operating parameters and controlsettings, without prior approval of owner.

After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Jointcommissioning of integrated system segments shall be completed.

3.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS

A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work

includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiringaccessories. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.

B. Provide wiring between thermostats, aquastats and unit heater motors, allcontrol and alarm wiring for all control and alarm devices for all Sections ofSpecifications as applicable

C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz emergency power to every B.M.S.DDC Controller panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console,power supply, transformer, annunciator, modems, printers and to other devicesas required. It is the intent that the entire building management system exceptterminal equipment shall be operative under emergency power conditions in thebuilding. The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire fromemergency circuit breakers.

D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under thisSection.

E. Provide conduit and wiring between the B.M.S. panels and the temperature,humidity, or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring inconduit.

F. Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.

G. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor controlcenters and high and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in

B.M.S. panels located in the vicinity of motor control centers.

H. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels,metering instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points,remotely operated contractors, and B.M.S. panels, as shown on the drawingsor as specified.

I. All wiring to be compliant to local building code and the NEC.

J. Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.

3.6 CONTROL AIR AND SENSING LINES





AEB 695-0737


Rev 0

1. Air lines cannot be hidden within duct insulation. All piping and tubing shallbe properly supported using straps, cleats, or hangers as approved. Use ofwire will not be permitted. Where this specification permits the use of plastictubing for some parts of the piping system, and where the control

manufacturer has obtained such approval, multiple virgin polyethylene tube,with a molecular weight of not less than 25,000 and a melt index of not morethan .3 dg./min., positioned adjacent and parallel to each other and containedin an overall jacket of flame retardant polyethylene compound sheathcomplying with UL94 vertical burning test may be supplied. The sheath maybe excluded in panel piping. Pressure rating: 160 psi/72 degrees F. Ambienttemperature rating: 100 to 175 degrees F. In bundled tubing, individual linesshall be identified by numbers at 2" intervals or by color. Tubing shall besupported with pipe rests or other supporting methods as to prevent the linesfrom stress conditions.

2. Tubing passing through or buried in concrete shall be hard drawn copper in

rigid steel conduit.

3. Air tubing run exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be hard drawncopper.

4. Air tubing in finished areas shall be run concealed.

5. Air tubing for high pressure mains (over 20 psig) shall be copper.

6. Single Tube Polyethylene plastic tubing will be permitted in lieu of copper,except for high pressure mains or smoke control, in the following locations:

a. Within thin wall electric conduit (EMT).

b. Within control panels.

7. Air piping associated with smoke control functions shall be hard drawn copperonly.

3.7 PERFORMANCE

A. Unless stated otherwise, control temperatures within plus or minus 2oFhumidity within plus or minus 3% of the set point and static pressure within

10% of set point.

3.8 COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/Ocalibration and commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system

program commissioning. Document all commissioning information oncommissioning data sheets which shall be submitted prior to acceptance





AEB 695-0738


Rev 0

testing. Commissioning work which requires shutdown of system or deviationfrom normal function shall be performed when the operation of the system isnot required. The commissioning must be coordinated with the owner andconstruction manager to ensure systems are available when needed. Notifythe operating personal in writing of the testing schedule so that authorized

personnel from the owner and construction manager are present throughoutthe commissioning procedure.

1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel hasbeen installed according to plans, specifications and approved shop drawings.Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor and device.Commissioning to include, but not be limited to:

a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range.

b. Sensor range.

c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.

d. Point value reporting.

e. Binary alarm and switch settings.

f. Actuator ranges.

g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, and networkcommunications.

B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested andsigned off), each BMS program shall be put on line and commissioned. Thecontractor shall, in the presence of the owner and construction manager,demonstrate each programmed sequence of operation and compare theresults in writing. In addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify properresponse and stable control, within specified accuracy's. System program testresults shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted forrecord. Any discrepancies between the specification and the actualperformance will be immediately rectified and retested.

C. After all BMS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verifythe overall system performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not belimited to:

1. Data communication, both normal and failure modes.2. Fully loaded system response time.





AEB 695-0739


Rev 0

3. Impact of component failures on system performance and systemoperation.

4. Time/Date changes.

5. End of month/ end of year operation.

6. Season changeover.

7. Global application programs and point sharing.

8. System backup and reloading.

9. System status displays.

10. Diagnostic functions.

11. Power failure routines.

12. Battery backup.

13. Smoke Control, in concert with Fire Alarm System testing.

14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work.

D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed todemonstrate compliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance testprocedure will take place after the commissioning procedure but before finalacceptance, to verify that sensors and control devices maintain specifiedaccuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over time.

E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrateeach point. The contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. Thecontractor shall demonstrate all points and system functions until all devicesand functions meet specification.

F. The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing and turn over same tothe owner after acceptance testing.

1. All test instruments shall be submitted for approval.

Test Instrument Accuracy:

Temperature: 1/4F or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.

Pressure: High Pressure (psi): ½ psi or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.

Low Pressure: 1/2% of full scale





AEB 695-0740


Rev 0

(in w.c.)

Humidity: 2% RH

Electrical: 1/4% full scale

G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to befunctioning as specified, a thirty-day performance test period shall begin. If thesystem performs as specified throughout the test period, requiring only routinemaintenance, the system shall be accepted. If the system fails during the test,and cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may request thatperformance tests be repeated.

3.09 TRAINING

A. The manufacturer shall provide factory-trained instructor to give full instructionto designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors

shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are toteach. The manufacturer shall provide all students with a student bindercontaining product specific training modules for the system installed. Alltraining shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PMweekdays.

B. Provide 20 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel.Training shall include:

Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manualsWalk-through of the job to locate control componentsOperator workstation and peripheralsDDC controller and ASC operation/functionOperator control functions including graphic generation and field panelProgrammingOperation of portable operator's terminalExplanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement proceduresStudent binder with training modules

Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensiveunderstanding of the hardware and software, additional training must beavailable from the Manufacturer. If such training is required by the Owner, itwill be contracted at a later date.

3.10 GENERAL NOTES

1. The electronic controls packaged with the chiller equipment shall directlycommunicate with the direct digital control (DDC) system. The Building controlsystem shall communicate with the chiller equipment to read the informationand change the control set points as shown in the points list, sequences ofoperation and control schematics.

2. The chiller equipment supplier shall provide all hardware and softwarenecessary to integrate the chiller controls with the Building control network.

The following lists the major integration components that must be supplied bythe successful chiller equipment supplier:





AEB 695-0741


Rev 0

3. The chiller equipment supplier shall provide proof of experience withintegration of the type outlined in this specification. The supplier shall provideindividuals experienced with the installation and startup of equipment relatingto integration.

PART 4 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

BMS-01 : BMS Schematics

BMS-02 : BMS Schematics

BMS-03 : BMS System Architecture

PART 5 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of themanufacturers listed below or alternatively from any equal and approved

manufacturer. Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer and hisdecision shall be binding for make of each item before ordering the same.

SIEMENS- BUILDING TECHNOLOGIES, INC (DESIGO BANCET BMS)

HONEYWELL- CONTROLS (EBI, EXCEL 5000 BMS)

JOHNSON CONTROL (METASYS EXTENDED ARCHITURE BMS)



SECTION – 19

PLUMBING INSTALLATION



PROPOSED MIXED USED BUILDING 695-07Technical Specifications Arab Engineering Bureau

AEB 695-07/2008 1 Section 19.0-Plumbing InstallationRev 0


19.1.00 Plumbing General

19.1.01 Site

19.1.02 Site Conditions

19.1.03 Definitions

19.1.04 Scope of Works

19.1.05 Compliance with Specifications & Regulation

19.1.06 Plumbing System

19.1.07 Program

19.1.08 Contract Drawings

19.1.09 Working Drawings

19.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings

19.1.11 Material Submittals

19.1.12 Material Inspection

19.1.13 Alternative Materials

19.1.14 Setting out of Works

19.1.15 Safety

19.1.16 Contractor‟s License

19.1.17 Service Connection & Permits

19.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials

19.1.19 Protective Finishes

19.1.20 Works Test and Inspection

19.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

19.1.22 As Built Drawings

19.1.23 Period of Maintenance





19.2.00 PLUMBING MATERIALS

19.2.01 General

19.2.02 Installation, Storage & Protection

19.2.03 Pipe Supports

19.2.04 Pipe Sleeves

19.2.05 Valves and Stop Cocks

19.2.06 Strainers and Drain Cocks

19.2.07 Float Ball Valves

19.2.08 Trench Excavation

19.2.09 Under Ground Cold Water Services

19.2.10 Pipework Insulation

19.2.11 Cold Water Storage Tanks

19.2.12 Hot Water Service Heaters

19.2.13 Hot Water Circulating Pump

19.2.14 Water Filters

19.2.15 Domestic Hot & Cold Water Pump Sets

19.2.16 Pressure Reducing Valve

19.2.17 Sterilization of Water Services

19.2.18 Portable Fire Extinguishers

19.2.19 Swimming Pool

19.2.20 Testing and Commissioning

19.2.21 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers

19.2.22 Schedule of Drawings





19.1.01 SITE

B-RING ROAD, DOHA, STATE OF QATAR

19.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials & Equipments shall be capable ofwithstanding the following site conditions:

Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Summer& 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Winter

Altitude : Sea Level

Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour

Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

19.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall mean :

Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

Contractor : The Main Contractor

KAHRAMAA : Qatar General Electric and Water Corporation

QCS : Qatar Construction Specification

BS : British Standard Specifications

CP. : British Standard Code of Practice

Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the schedulestherein.

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose ofexecution of work at site.

As Built Drawings : Which is the true record of the actual work carried outat site.

Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and works to be





Carried out by the contractor as per these specificationsand for the satisfactory completion of the installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Engineer in writing.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Engineer in writing.

Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Engineer in writing.

Provide : Shall mean, supply, Install, Test & Commission.

Install : Shall mean Install, Test & Commission.

Furnish : Shall mean supply only

Concealed : Shall mean Hidden from normal sight in the shafts, ceiling

spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.

Exposed : Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which maybe reached without the use ladders or any other temporarymeans of access.

19.1.04 SCOPE OF WORK

This write-up covers in brief the scope of works under the “ Utilities & Services DesignWorks” conceived under this contract and narrates various scope of works to beconsidered for the design, procurement, installation and all the equipment materials

based on the approved working drawing, Testing and Commissioning for plumbing,drainage and fire fighting to the new building and shall cover the following facilities.

Water supply, storage and distribution system

External Services works.

EXTERNAL SERVICES WORKS

Cold water system network from the cold water storage tanks and cold waterpressure pumps shall be handled to different consumption points at toilets and

kitchen areas within the buildings.

19.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION & REGULATIONS

The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition. Thecontractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and unskilled labours under thesupervision of competent Engineers to complete the works in accordance with theprogramme .





The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with thisspecification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities, KAHRAMAA (WaterDivision) and fire department and to the relevant B.S specification.

i. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes ofpractice (current editions including all amendments).

ii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipments other thanthe specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approvalfrom the Engineer shall be obtained. However the Engineer reserves the right forsuch approval/s.

iii. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawingsbut mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories orwork necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and readyfor operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or

carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.

iv. Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases atthe tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards duringthe construction, the consultant‟s decision shall be final and binding on allsuch matters.

v. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the project specification, thegovernment published specifications (QCS) shall be adapted.

vi. It is the responsibility of contractor to study the specification in detail and clear alldoubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job. The tenderdrawings are guide lines and the contractor must prepare the detailed shopdrawings and get approval from consultant prior to the execution of job at the site,No delay or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is accepted onany account.

Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings butmentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or worknecessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation,even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried out by thecontractor without any additional costs.Clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer in writing for any such cases at the

tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the construction, theEngineer ‟s decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

19.1.06 PLUMBING SYSTEM

WATER SUPPLY

a. Hot &Cold Water System

The Cold water system shall consist of concrete water tank located at the basement ofthe bldg, which act as the main storage tank coming from Municipality for the entire





building. A dedicated lift pump set (duty-standby) will fill the roof water tanks (day tanks)for the entire compound. A complete pipe works shall feed the internal cold water supplydistribution network in the in the building.

The booster pump at the roof shall pump water supply for 9th

– to 8th

floor, while anotherparallel supply water line will be via gravity flow for 7

th floor and below. Individual water

heaters are utilized of capacity also as stated in the tender drawings.

b. Providing of Fire Extinguishers

All the portable fire extinguishers shall be installed as shown in the tender drawings andas explained and specified elsewhere. All the materials used shall have approval fromthe local Civil Defence and Fire Departments.

19.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method orBar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to completethe project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the Program:

1 Mobilization2 Drawings and Material Submittals3 Approvals4 Equipment Deliveries5 First Fix6 Main & Sub-Main Piping Works

7 Second Fix8 Fixing of accessories9 Testing10 Commissioning & Handing Over

19.1.08 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule ofDrawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared toshow the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for theproject.

Drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor‟s responsibility tocheck the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checkedwith the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to theattention of the Engineer in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and otheraccessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances. TheContractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the local





regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with thesedrawings.

19.1.09 WORKING DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 fordetails and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Engineer ‟s approval. Thecontractor shall project the following in the above drawings :

i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends andother accessories and fittings.

ii Typical connection details of the various Plumbing requirements of appliances,like Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,

iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to the

other services Installations like, Electricals, Air-conditioning & Ventilation andDrainage.

iv Levels, Center Lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.

19.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS

The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for theservices showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical andDrainage systems.

The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly coordinatedbefore submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be installed in sucha manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearances requiredbetween each of them as per the prevailing regulations.

19.1.11 MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the specificationsand tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the

equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the Engineer for the necessary reviewand approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in theabsence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly supported bytelex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples must besubmitted for approval along with the materials submittals.





Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical literatureclearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. TheEngineer shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or Not Approved, tothe contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the Materialssubmittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following proforma to theEngineer :

i. Submittal Numberii. Type of Materialiii. Manufacturer / Local Agentiv. Date of Approvalv. Date of Order / Order Numbervi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )vii. ETA on Site

viii. Status as on date of Report

a Equipment Supply

All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed localagent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare partsetc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same clearly onthe submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons, then thecontractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from the Engineer

specifically.

b Equipment size and Delivery

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations inposition designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction programand the method of access.

c Design references

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requiresamendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the change in

the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., The contractor shall discussthe matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Engineer. Accordingly, thecontractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Engineer ‟s advise and obtainapproval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed tohave studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained clarificationsduring the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the execution.





19.1.12 MATERIALS INSPECTION

The contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the materialsat the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at site which is

not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or thesample submitted, will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall makea fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Engineer. Any time delaycaused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟s account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace withapproved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do so, theclient will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit theensuing amount to the Contractor.

Materials Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials atsite and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, allitems are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged.

19.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule ofManufacturer‟s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the equipmentor material for the Engineer ‟s consideration. Only in case if the specified item/s are not

available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives will be considered bythe Engineer, before the tender is accepted and the Engineer ‟s decision will be finalregarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed inwriting by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the specification, must bereplaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then suchreplacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor‟sexpenses etc.,

19.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as indicatedon the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the siterequirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed workingdrawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-ordinated withfurnishing and other services.





19.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect man-power andmachinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the Safety

standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at any point oftime.

19.1.16 CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE

The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Plumbing worksshall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of theMechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on theproject and obtain approval from the Engineer. Once the approval is obtained, thecontractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-

approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for aminimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, theproposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. Anyapplication with less than 5 years of experience will be rejected by the Engineer.

19.1.17 SERVICE CONNECTION & PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work andobtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications forpermits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior to the

execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the necessarypermits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected works toothers.

All statutory permits from Fire, Water and Sewerage Department are secured by theEngineer. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works andliaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees, etc., whenconnecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is required toproduce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the relevantauthorities when requested by the Engineer

The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to the

city mains with relevant local authorities of works.

19.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used inthe works.

Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materialsin the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, whoin turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions will be issued.





Only after obtaining a written permission from the Engineer, shall any remedial work becarried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following such a

procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of theEngineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.

19.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in thiscontract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climaticconditions.

All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before shipment toensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.

19.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Engineer or Engineer ‟s representativeto witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work executed by thecontractor.

The Engineer will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the contract thelist of works that are to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Engineer therequired notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant or work willbe ready for testing.

The Engineer will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's testsheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates inoriginal to the Engineer / Client at the time of handing over the project.

19.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The contractor shall provide Three copies in the form of bound documents the operatinginstructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following :

a. Step by step operating procedures.b. Preventive maintenance schedule.

c. Technical literature.d. Spare parts liste. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact

person.- Local as well as overseas.f. Work test certificates, if any.g. Routine Test results carried out at site.





19.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall becarried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be supported by

sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings which are to be submitted to theEngineer within one month of completion of the project.

Two sets of process negatives along with three sets of drawings shall be submitted afterapproval of the Engineer for onward submission to the client.

19.1.23 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE

The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days (FourHundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted by the

Engineer. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, forany equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states thatall parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the period ofmaintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of notification atno additional cost to the contract.

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within thespecified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault butnevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.

19.2.00 MATERIALS

DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

19.2.01 GENERAL

Hot and Cold water services within the building shall comply with British Standard codeof practice BS 6700: 1987 CP 342 : Part 2 : 1974.

All hot water pipes shall be insulated with manufacturer sleeves and sizes to be same as

the pipe size of PP-R pipes.

All pipe work fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation shallbe erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair andreplacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall beprovided as appropriate for the diameter pipe work in order to allow valves andequipment removal.





All pipe work shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily. Alllow points in the system shall have drain cocks fitted and high points shall have airbottles or automatic air vents.

All cold and hot water pipes exposed to the sun at roof or inside shafts shall be insulatedwith fibreglass 48 KM/kg and with weather proof / sun proof insulation protectivematerial. Contractor to carry out thermal expansion for PP-R pipes subject totemperature difference.

a) Copper Pipes

All exposed pipe work on roof and inside shafts shall be copper tube to British StandardBS 2871 Part 1 : 1971 Table "X" and all fittings shall be copper or copper alloy to BS864 : Part 2 : 197 1and All tube and fittings shall be stamped with the British Standardkite mark and copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR mark. The jointing of copper pipe

work shall be by means of dezincification resistant integral solder ring fittings.

All pipes inside the toilets shall be PP-R polypropylene type with authority‟s approval andto be as per standards.

b) Polypropylene PP-R Fittings

Fittings shall be both welding fittings and metal fittings. All metal inserts shall be indezincification resistant brass. Joining between pipes and fittings shall be made bymelting the parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R fittingswith metal insert shall be used.

Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their productrange. All the components inside the valve in contract with water shall be dezincificationresistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not available in the PP-Rpipe manufacturer range, shall be made dezincification resistant brass as described inclause „b‟ below.

All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for a working pressure of6 bars at 70º C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene piping installationincluding supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with manufacturer‟srecommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for expansion in the pipework.The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years.

19.2.02 INSTALLATION, STORAGE & PROTECTION

All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement..

All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only, whoshall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Engineer prior toordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be incorporatedinto the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in properlyventilated well supported racked storage sheds.





All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to or atright-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum headroom and notobstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers, projections and intorecesses forming part of the structural works whether so indicated on the drawings or

not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a minimum of 50 mm clear below tothe finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to the finished wall face.

All pipework which is to be insulated shall allow space for each pipe to be insulatedaround its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided betweeninsulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearancesbetween insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.

No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No pipeworkshall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation period openends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or blank counterflanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at all times.

All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation shall beerected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and replacement.Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be provided asappropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and equipment removal.

All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily. Alllow points in the system shall have draincocks fitted and high points shall have air bottlesor automatic air vents.

19.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS

All pipework shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free movementdue to expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system. Supports shallbe arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction. Spacing of supportsshall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS 5572 : 1978. Vertical risingpipes particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported at the base to withstand thetotal weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipesbe the means of support for the vertical pipework.

Pipework up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be supported clear of the structurewith cast brass brackets. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass hospital bracketsshall be used with brawl plugs and brass screws.

All multi runs of pipework within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported onpurpose designed proprietary brackets suitable for carrying more than one pipe run, andshall be secured using expanding plugs or other purpose designed fixing devices.Softwood plugs shall not be allowed. All purpose designed proprietary brackets shall besubmitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.

All Steel hangers and supporting brackets shall be painted with one coat of red oxide andone coat of Galvanizing paint. The spacing of supports where not specified must notexceed the spacing given in the following schedules. Where one support carries morethan one pipe diameter the spacing shall be that specified for the smallest diameter.





Maximum spacing of supports

Nominal size Support spacing

of pipesVertical pipes Horizontal pipes

54 mm 3.0 m 2.7 m

42 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m

35 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m

28 mm 2.4 m 1.8 m

26 mm 2.4 m 1.6 m

15 mm 1.8 m 1.2 m

19.2.04 PIPE SLEEVES

Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings andwaterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the timerequired by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be less than15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. Where pipes passthrough buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger than the outside diameter

of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe sleeve shall be neatly packedusing asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage of noise, vermin or smoke .Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface. Where pipework is exposed toview and passes through wall or floor, chromium plated copper pipe flanges of the correctpipe diameter shall be fitted.

19.2.05 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS

All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of Electricityand Water, Water Department and shall be dezincification resistant. Valves shall beprovided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar and approved. Allvalves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and approval obtained in writing

prior to ordering.

All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even thicknessthroughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be packed withmaterial specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for the particularservice in which each valve is used.

Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BS 4504 : Part 2 in accordance withthe valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall be suitable for bothvertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily accessible positions.





19.2.06 STRAINERS AND DRAIN COCKS

All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall beallowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be

manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.

All drain cocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS 2879.Generally drain cocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and other pointswhere necessary and as directed by the Engineer.

19.2.07 FLOAT BALL VALVES

Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar medium/highpressure to BS 1212 Part 1. Float ball valves shall be of delayed action type if specifiedor shown on drawings. The fixing components and members for delayed action ballvalves shall be stainless steel.

19.2.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION

Excavation work shall be executed in whatever ground conditions that may beencountered to the line and levels as detailed on the drawings.

The contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and any claimarising from accident or damage to the public, adjoining property or labour on site. Thecontractor shall provide all necessary steel sheeting, timber supports, strutting andshoring to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Any slip or fall shall be immediately

made good by the contractor at his own expense and the contractor shall take soleresponsibility for any claim for damages arising out of inadequate support of excavations.

All excavation shall be maintained dry and free from water. To achieve this thecontractor shall, without additional charge, provide all necessary pumping equipment,sumps, drains and soakaways. The contractor shall also be responsible for operating,running and maintaining all equipment at all times to ensure excavations are free fromwater.

All obstructions shall be broken out and voids and soft spots filled with concrete grade 15or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

Granular Bedding

Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of thepipe as follows :

1. Pipe lines 600 mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above thepipeline.

2. Pipe lines 1000 mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipe line.





The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to pass 12mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course sand, in theratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand. Bedding materialshall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained from locations where

0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.

Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted prior towork commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and testing, a further300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above the uppermost crown ofthe pipe line along its entire length. The bedding material shall span the entire width ofthe trench and shall be laid in not more than 150 mm deep layers, each layer beingcompacted by hand.

Laying of Pipelines and Fittings

All underground pipelines shall be laid to true levels in straight lines to even gradients

shown on the drawings. Pipeline laying shall not commence until the Engineer hasinspected and approved the granular bed and trench.

Care shall be taken when laying pipes that no bedding material or building debris ispushed into the barrel of the pipe of fitting.

Backfilling Excavations

After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled usingselected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders debris ofgreater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified

operations proceeding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm, eachfully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall beused compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 meters.

19.2.09 GROUND COLD WATER SERVICES

Underground cold water services shall comply with British Standard Code of Practice CP310 : 1965, CP 2010 : Part 1 : 1966 and CP 2010 : Part 3 : 1972.

All pipework up to and including 67 mm diameter shall be copper tube to BS 2871 : PART1 : 1971 TABLE "Y" . The tubes entire length shall be coated with a continuous,seamless, polyethylene sheathing which shall be green in colour to British Standard BS

1710 : 1975. All fittings shall be to British Standard BS 864 : Part 2 : 1971 Type 'B'.

19.2.10 PIPEWORK INSULATIONS

All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970 : 1981 and BS 5442 :1977.

All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated.





Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly inaccordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipeworkprior to pressure testing and inspection by the Engineer giving clear instructions forfurther insulation applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of insulation

to be applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the contractor shall allow for thecost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and equipment for inspectionby the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of the thickness specified, then the cutsection shall be made good and the whole installation completed. Should any cut sectionshow a deficiency of thickness, further sections shall be cut at the direction of theEngineer for inspection.

If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the contractor shall removethe whole of the insulation installed or as the Engineer directs and then shall supply,deliver and apply new insulation complying with the specification and restore it to thesatisfaction of the Engineer. This work shall be carried out at the contractor's ownexpense.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves, draincocks,automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of these components inthe pipework system up to and including 65 mm diameter pipework shall be carried outusing sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same size as the line pipework.

No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and horizontal buildersworks shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

Thermal insulation shall be 25 mm thick with a density of 64 kg/m2 rigid fiberglasssections as set down in British Standard Specification BS 5422 : 1977. The sectionsshall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted down using approvedadhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres.

All piping, branching off to fixtures chased in the floors or wells shall be insulated with 10mm thick flexible fiberglass insulation covered with plastic tape applied spirally.

Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be painted with two coats primer and onefinishing coat rubberized paint to an approved colour prior to the fixing of aluminiumbands at 1.2 m centres. The finishing colour shall be to British Standard BS 1710 : 1975,identification of pipelines complete with direction arrows.

19.2.11 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS

Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and complystrictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. Thefollowing tank may be used:

a. - Underground Reinforced Concrete Storage TanksThe following design criteria shall be observed during construction:a- there shall be one manhole to be positioned as follows:

i- one will be located in such a position to have easy access to the float valveb- stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.c- vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.





d- water level controls(low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumpsshall be provided.

e- In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switchor by other approved means.

f- manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete anddouble sealed to prevent leakage.

g- isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery linesh- Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth

shall be used on all internal surfaces.i- Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external

Surfaces.

The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on thedrawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the tank. Thedetails of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any installation workbegins.

b. Roof Tanks

Polyethylene tanks complete with bolted inspection cover and with gunmetal pipeconnections pre-molded in position. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet lightand comply with the National Water Council of the United Kingdom and/or theWater Department of the State of Qatar.

19.2.12 HOT WATER SERVICE HEATERS

Individual Water Heater

Water heater shall be thermal - electric, individual constructed from heavy gauge highcarbon steel tank with allaying at 2cm CFC free compact foam insulation and to beglass-lined. Insulation between inner and outer container shall be of CFC – free, flameRetardant pure-foam of minimum 30 mm thickness, according ti ISO – standard 3582.Internal surface to be glass lined.

The water heater shall be of pressurized type, horizontal or vertical type above falseceiling, suitable for a working pressure of 8 bar and tested for 16 bar.

The heating element constructed to BS 3456 shall be from zinc-plated, coppersheathed resistance wire, embedded conifer rod type immersion type protected

against stress cracking and pitting corrosion complete with thermostat of 20 Amps.minimum rating and an additional safety temperature limiter for protecting the waterheater against over heating. The heating element shall be brazed on to a screw - onimmersion type apparatus plate.

The loading of water heaters shall be 1.5 kw each for capacities of 50 litres and 2 kwfor capacities for 80 ltrs, 240v, 50 Hz. single-phase supply. The Water heater shall becomplete with pressure relief valve (preset according to allowed working pressure),non-return valve and temperature gauge.

- Glass lined heaters of approval make can be accepted as alternative.





The centrifugal circulating pump shall be driven by an electric motor preferably of220 volts, single phase, 50 Hz electric supply. Motors shall not exceed 2900 rpm.

19.2.13 WATER FILTERS

Water Filters

Filters shall be provided below kitchen/pantry sink for taste/odor & sedimentremoval. Sizes to suit the water demand and installed at the location(s) even notmarked in the drawings.

19.2.14 COLD WATER PUMP SETS

a) COLD WATER LIFTING PUMP SET

The cold-water lifting pump set shall be self priming pump set and shall be of thecentrifugal type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and shall compriseduplicate pumps, one running and one standby.

Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall beprovided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on eachsuction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number membranetank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber bag completewith lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure switch and 2 nos.pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.

Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of high/low level float switcheslocated in the high-level storage tanks and pressure switches. The pressure switchesshall be arranged to start the pressure set to refill the high-level cold-water storagetank.

A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the ground level cold-water storagetank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of nowater. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector switch.This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be changedover.

Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 withstainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade stainless steel impellers to BS 1400.Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage, conformingto British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in temperatures of50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm and shall be suitable for running inambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.

The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,





door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to providesequence control.

Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper tube

fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be permitted.

b) COLD WATER BOOSTER PUMP SET

The cold-water pressure (booster) pump sets shall be a packaged set and shall be ofthe multi stage horizontal type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and shallcomprise duplicate pumps, one run and one standby.

Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall beprovided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on eachsuction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number membranetank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber bag complete

with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure switch and 2 nos.pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.

Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of pressure switches. Thepressure switches shall be arranged to the primary water at the desired pressure.

A low level f loat switch shall be incorporated in the lower level cold water storage tankand in the roof water tanks and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operatingin the event of no water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a dutypump selector switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pumpNO. 2 to be changed over.

Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 withstainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade gunmetal impellers to BS 1400. Pumpmotors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage, conforming toBritish Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in temperatures of 50deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm and shall be suitable for running inambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.

The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to providesequence control.

19.2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractor‟sresponsibility to provide the system - a pressure reducing valve(s) if thedistribution system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressurerequirement being offered.

This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arisedue to over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in differentlevels throughout the building.





19.2.16 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractor‟s

responsibility to provide the system - a pressure reducing valve(s) if thedistribution system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressurerequirement being offered.

This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arisedue to over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in differentlevels throughout the building.

19.2.17 STERILIZATION OF WATER SERVICES

All pipework, fittings and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the external watersupplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system.

No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out and approvalreceived in writing from the Engineer to commence sterilization.

The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water distribution systems:

a. Flush out all tanks, pipe works, etc.

b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical to aconcentration of 1-2 parts per million. The concentration shall be confirmed byusing a measuring instrument approved by the water department.

c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold water storage tank, each draw-offpoint shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off.

d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold waterstorage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to givethe correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shallthen remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.

e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine befound, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, andrun the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorineis present.

g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his approval.

19.2.18 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

The contractor shall supply and install portable fire extinguishers, fire blanket in thekitchen, pantries, electrical room, plant room even not shown on the drawings.





The fire extinguishers shall be of dry chemical ABC type of 4.5 Kg. capacity, with arugged brass operating valve, large size operating lever, full vision pressure gauge,discharge hose and heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard, scratch resistant finish.

Where fire extinguishers are located in electrical rooms, plant rooms they shall becomplete with wall mounting brackets.

19.2.19 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General Setting Out of Work and Commissioning

The contractor, having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies areavailable, shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction of theConsultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.

After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractorshall demonstrate its operation, at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of theConsultant. Test shall be in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice BS 6700 :1997.

The test shall demonstrate: -

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is ofadequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate sufficiently quietly to meet the

specified requirements.

c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly calibratedand accurate.

d. That all water systems are properly balanced, vented, and operates satisfactorilyunder test pressure.

The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with theConsultant. The Client's representative and the consultant shall be at liberty to be presentat test and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of hisresponsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof,shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record both in triplicate.

The contractor shall also provide all test instruments, together with skilled supervisionand adequate labor for carrying out the tests.





Pipe work Pressure Testing

All pipework services shall be subjected to a test of 500 kN/m2 or one and half timesworking pressure whichever is the greater, for not less than 24 hours.

Where pipework is tested in sections, all valves shall be blanked off temporarily usingplugs or blank flanges. The valve wedge shall not be used to retain the water. Thepipework services shall be charged with water allowing all air to escape and avoidingshock or water hammer. The test pressure gauge shall be mounted within the pipeworksystem with a loop and cock and shall be calibrated such that the test pressure fallsabove its mid-range.

The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior torequesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be maintained fora minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further pumping.Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be measured

by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall not exceed fivelitres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 meter length of pipe for 33 meters headpressure in a period of 24 hours.

The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the Consultanta minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also provide test sheetsset out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be tested.

19.2.20 SCHEDULE OF PREFERRED MANUFACTURES & SUPPLIERS

1) Copper Pipes YORKSHIRE,UKWEDNESBURY, UKMUELLER, UK.

2) Copper FittingsCapillary with IntegralSolder

YORKSHIRE,UKMUELLER, UK.CONEX

3) Valves CONEXPEGLER, UKNEWMAN HATTERSELY, UK

4) Sectional Water Tanks BALMORAL AQUASTOW

NIKKOLG YSI HITANKBFG

5) Water Heater ATLANTIC (FRANCE) AO SMITH,USAINVENTUMZENITH





6) Water Pumps EBARAWILOSPPPULLEN (UK)

7)PolypropylenePipes and fittings

BANNINGER KUNSTSTOFFCOPREX ARIETEUPONOR

8) Water Filter NORTHSTARCARESSMETITO (USA)

11) Fiber Glass Insulation KIMMCO AFICO ARABIAN FIBER GLASS

12) Control Valves GRINNELL (USA)TYCO FLOW CONTROL (USA)POTTOR ELECTRICS (USA)

14) Pipe Fittings INTERFIT (FRANCE) ANVIL (USA)VICTAULIC (USA)

15) Pressure ReducingValves

CRANE, GRINNELLNIBCO

19.2.21 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

1PL-01 SITE PLAN-PLUMBING LAY-OUT

2 PL-023

r BASEMENT FLOOR -PLUMBING LAY-OUT

3 PL-03 2nd

BASEMENT FLOOR -PLUMBING LAYOUT

4 PL-04 1ST

BASEMENT FLOOR - PLUMBING LAYOUT

5 PL-05 GROUND FLOOR – PLUMBING LAYOUT

6 PL-06 MEZZANINE FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT

7 PL-07 1ST FLOOR FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT

8 PL-08 2ND

TO 5TH FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT

9PL-09 6

TH TO 7

TH FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT





10 PL-10 8TH FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT

11 PL-11 9TH

FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT

12 PL-12 MAIN ROOF FLOOR PLAN & APEX ROOF-PLUMBINGLAYOUT

13 PL-13 TOILET DETAILS-PLUMBING LAYOUT

14 PL-14 STANDARD DETAIL - PLUMBING LAYOUT



SECTION – 20

DRAINAGE INSTALLATION



PROPOSED MIXED USED BUILDING 695-07


AEB 695-07/2008 1 Section 20.0-Drainage InstallationRev 0

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATION

20.1.00 DRAINAGE GENERAL

20.1.01 Site


20.1.03 Definitions


20.1.05 Compliance with Specifications & Regulations

20.1.06 Drainage System

20.1.07 Program








20.1.15 Safety

20.1.16 Contractor’s License

20.1.17 Permits



20.1.20 Works Test and Certificate



20.1.23 Period Of Maintenance






20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

20.2.01 Pipes and Fittings

20.2.02 Above Ground Pipes

20.2.03 Below Ground & External Drainage Pipes

20.2.04 Rain Water System Pipes

20.2.05 Pipes & Fittings Installation and Inspection

20.2.06 Manholes

20.2.07 Manhole Covers and Gully Gratings

20.2.08 Soakaways

20.2.09 Septic Tank

20.2.10 Protection of Drainage Pipes









20.1.01 SITE

B RING ROAD , DOHA, STATE OF QATAR


Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipments shall be capable ofwithstanding the following site conditions :

1 Maximum Ambient : 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in SummerTemperature & 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Winter

2 Altitude : Sea Level

3 Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

4 Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour

5 Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

6 Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

7 Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

20.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shallmean:

Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

QCS : Qatar Construction Specifications



Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and theschedules

therein.

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose ofexecution of work at site.

As Built Drawings : Which is the true record of the actual work carried out at site.






Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and works to becarried out by the contractor as per these specifications and forthe satisfactory completion of the installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Engineer in writing.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Engineer in writing.

Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Engineer in writing.




Concealed : Shall mean Hidden from normal sight in the shafts, ceilingspaces, walls, slabs or partitions.

20.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing thecomplete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associatedmanholes, septic tanks, and soakaways as indicated on the contract drawings, and inaccordance with this specification and the requirements of section 20 of the QCS andshall be installed to BS 8301 : 1985 (formerly CP 304) .

The contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, materials, equipment, machinery andany other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects.

The drainage system shall include the following :

1. uPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specifiedelsewhere.

2. Floor drains, floor gulleys, gully traps, overflows, bottle traps as shown ondrawings and specification

3. Manhole, Septic Tank, Manhole Covers, Gully Grating, Steps & Soakaways.


The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in good condition. Thecontractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to complete theworks in accordance with the program of works.

The installations shall comply with the following regulations :

i. The installation of works shall be as per the latest edition and publication ofSewerage Division, State of Qatar.






ii. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes ofpractice (current editions including all amendments).

iii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipments other thanthe specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approvalfrom the Engineer shall be obtained. However the Engineer reserves the right forsuch approval(s).

iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawingsbut mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories orwork necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and readyfor operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed orcarried out by the contractor without any additional costs.

Clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer in writing for any such cases atthe tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the

construction, the Engineer ’s decision shall be final and binding on all suchmatters.

20.1.06 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The Drainage system includes various, uPVC pipeworks including all the necessaryfittings and fixtures for the safe disposal of Soil, Waste and Rain Water from the projectsite, along with the provisions of various Manholes and Holding tanks,(upon availability)finally connected to the Municipal Drainge and Disposal system in the vicinity.

The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract drawings forhandling and disposal of :

a) Soil Waterb) Waste Waterc) Rain Water

20.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method orBar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to complete theproject in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the Program :

01 Mobilization

02 Drawings and Material Submittals03 Approvals04 Equipment Deliveries05 First Fix06 Main & Sub-Main Piping Works07 Second Fix08 Fixing of accessories09 Testing10 Commissioning & Handing Over







The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule ofDrawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared toshow the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for theproject.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor’sresponsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative andshall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall bebrought to the attention of the Engineer in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains,and other

accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances. TheContractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the localregulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with thesedrawings.


The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 fordetails and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Engineer ’s approval. Thecontractor shall project the following in the above drawings :

i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and

other accessories and fittings.

ii Typical connection details of the various drainage systems of appliances, likeWater Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,

iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to theother services Installations like, Electricals, Air-conditioning & Ventilation andPlumbing.

iv Levels, Center Lines and Slopes/Gradients of the pipework installations.


The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for theservices showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbingand Drainage systems.

The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly coordinatedbefore submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be installed in sucha manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearances requiredbetween each of them as per the prevailing regulations.







The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the specificationsand tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of theequipment, he intends to use for the project, to the Engineer for the necessary review andapproval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in theabsence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly supported bytelex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole covers( if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with

the materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical literatureclearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. TheEngineer shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or Not Approved, tothe contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the Materialssubmittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipments in the following proforma to theEngineer:

i. Submittal Number

ii. Type of Materialiii. Manufacturer / Local Agentiv. Date of Approvalv. Date of Order / Order Numbervi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )vii. ETA on Siteviii. Status as on date of Report

a Equipment Supply

All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed localagent in Qatar, who shall be the authorised agent and be able to supply the spare parts

etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same clearly onthe submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons, then thecontractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from the Engineerspecifically.







Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations inposition designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction programand the method of access.

c Design references

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requiresamendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the change inthe manufacturer’s range of production or availability etc., The contractor shall discussthe matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Engineer. Accordingly, thecontractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Engineer ’s advise and obtainapproval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed tohave studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained clarificationsduring the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the execution.


The contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the materialsat the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at site which isnot approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or the

sample submitted, will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall makea fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Engineer. Any time delaycaused due to the above shall be on the Contractor’s account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace withapproved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do so, theclient will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit theensuing amount to the Contractor.

a Materials Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials at

site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, allitems are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged. Thematerial storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as per Q.C.S.


Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule ofManufacturer’s. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons.Only in such cases, the alternatives will be considered by the Engineer, before the tenderis accepted and the Engineer ’s decision will be final regarding the matter.






In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed inwriting by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the specification, must bereplaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then suchreplacements shall be at the client’s convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor’sexpenses etc.,


The location of Floor Drains/Gullies, routes, Manholes etc., as indicated on the tenderdrawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. Theexact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings as

indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-ordinated with furnishing andother services.

20.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect man-power andmachinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the Safetystandards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at any point oftime.


The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage worksshall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of theMechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the projectand obtain approval from the Engineer. Once the approval is obtained, the contractorshall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approvalshould be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimumperiod of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. Insuch cases, the proposedreplacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. Anyapplication with less than 5 years of experience will be rejected by the Engineer.

20.1.17 PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work andobtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications forpermits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior to theexecution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the necessarypermits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected works to others.







Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used inthe works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plantor materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of theEngineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessaryinstructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the Engineershall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following such aprocedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of theEngineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.


The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in thiscontract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climaticconditions.

All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before shipment toensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.

20.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Engineer or Engineer ’s representative towitness hydraulic tests as pecified elsewhere, of major pipe work executed by the

contractor.

The Engineer will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the contract thelist of works that to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Engineer the requirednotice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant will be ready fortesting.

The Engineer will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's testsheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates inoriginal to the Engineer / Client at the time of handing over the project.


The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the operatinginstructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following :

a. Step by step operating procedures.b. Preventive maintenance schedule.c. Technical literature.d. Spare parts liste. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact

person. - Local as well as overseas.






f. Work test certificates, if any.g. Routine Test results carried out at site.


After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall becarried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be supported bysketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings which are to be submitted to theEngineer within one month of completion of the project.

Two sets of process negatives alongwith three sets of drawings shall be submitted afterapproval of the Engineer for onward submission to the client.


The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainge System installed against Faulty /improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days (FourHundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted by theEngineer. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, forany equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states thatall parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the period ofmaintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of notification atno additional cost to the contract.

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within the

specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault butnevertheless at the Contractor’s expense.






20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

20.2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS

All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 5750 and BS 5572, to BS4514 for Internal above ground, and BS 4660 for the internal under ground installations,and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same manufacturer allowingthe easy plumbing of an installation. All external under ground pipes shall be uPVC and manufactured under BS standards.The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and bear the Kitemark.

Applicable sub-sections of Section 20 of Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) shall beapplied to all drainage works.

20.2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPES

Soil, Waste and Overflow Systems

Reference should be made to the following Codes and Standards :

BS 3943 : 1979 Specification for plastic waste trapsBS 4514 : 1983 Unplasticised PVC soil and ventilating pipe fittings and accessories.BS 5254 : 1976 Polypropylene waste pipe and fittingsBS 5255 : 1976 Plastic waste pipe and fittingsBS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipework

(formerly CP 304)CP312 : 1973 Plastic pipework (Thermoplastic material) Part 1 & 2

Materials and colour : pipes and fittings shall be in uPVC in gray, white or rustic brown.

Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain ended pipes. Seal ring expansion joints shall be provided where required.

The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron (solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for weather flashingaround pipe at roof.

Adjustable, plastic coated steel holderbats shall be used to support pipes or securefittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used forhorizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated steelbrackets.

Floor gully inlet shall be in uPVC with stainless steel / bronze covers.






20.2.03 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE PIPES(uPVC Buried Drain System)

The uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998(formerlyBS 4660) andBS EN1401-1:1998(formerly BS 5481), comprising complete drainage system,compatible to soil waste and rainwater system and where appropriate shall bear theKitemark.

Materials and Colours : buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be uPVC withpolypropylene seal retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden brown,approximately to BS 381 C : number 414. Seal retaining caps and seal rings are black.Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.

uPVC solvent weld socket seal / lip and lip seal / lip seal shall be used.

Where necessary, lip seal / lip seal slip coupling shall be used.

Solvent Cements

Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non pressure pipework or BS4346 : Part 3 for pressure pipework.

Sealing Rings

Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS 2494.

20.2.04 RAIN WATER SYSTEM PIPES

As shown on drawings rain water system in uPVC complying with BS 4576, BS EN12200-1:2000 and bearing the Kitemark shall be provided. UPVC rainwater systemsshall be in gray as approved by the Engineer.

All joints should remain watertight under working conditions. Pipes inside the buildingshould be capable of withstanding the watertightness of a positive pressure of 38 mmwater gauge for at least 3 minutes.

Rainwater pipes should be firmly supported without restricting thermal movement.

Rainwater pipes shall not be encased in concrete columns structural walls and it isimportant rainwater pipes in casing or ducts are accessible for maintenance, repair andreplacement.

Relevant regulations of BS 6367, BS EN 12056-3:2000 shall be followed to ensure goodperformance of the rainwater system.

BS 5414 UPVC soil and vent pipes fittings and accessories and BS 4576 UPVC rainwatergoods may be used for rainwater system.






Roof and balcony outlets shall be made uPVC complying with the BSCP308 : 1974 andthe Building Regulations 1976. The rainwater outlets shall incorporate a circular griddomed outlets secured with brass crews and washers. All outlets are either 178 or 406mm in diameter. Self coloured, smooth, gloss and moulded, gray colour to BS 5252 :1976, 10 A.07.

When jointing UPVC pipes a gap should be left between spigot end of pipe and shoulderof socket that it enters in order to allow for thermal movement.

UPVC pipes shall be with solvent weld sockets usable with seal ring adapter.

All rainwater pipes from upper roofs shall be free discharge lower roof,and lower roofdischarges to soakaways at ground level.

20.2.05 PIPES AND FITTINGS. INSTALLATIONS & INSPECTION

A. Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers

All pipework shall be adequately supported in such manner as to permit free movementdue to expansion contraction, vibration or other changes in the system. Supports shall bearranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction. Spacing of supportsshall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practicefor sanitary pipework.

Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of the

riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the means ofsupport for the vertical pipework.

High temperature PVC waste pipework 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm shall be supportedusing two piece holderbats screwed to the wall using round head zinc plated woodscrews.

Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes aresuspended from the underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single angleiron supports may be used for pipework up to 500 mm from underside of slab. Doubleangle iron supports shall be used for pipework 500 mm, 1000 mm from the underside ofthe slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured from galvanized

steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single and double angle ironsupports at 6 metre centres of vertical and horizontal runs of pipework and anchored asnecessary.

B. Rodding Eyes

Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings andas required.

C. Roof Termination






All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the servicesduct.

D. Jointing

Jointing of uPVC and high temperature PVC shall be "O" ring and solvent welded. Priorto jointing all pipework fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned. Pipeworkshall be cut square, end chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior

to jointing pipes and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment andmarked to ensure accurate assembly.

Where 'O' ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth "O" ringplaced in ring seal prior to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum jelly

around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe shall then be inserted into the socket jointfinally adjusted to the correct insertion depth.

Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both spigot andsocket are free from all dirt, grease and swarf. Solvent cement shall then be appliedliberally and evenly to both socket and spigot prior to inserting spigot into socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned of surplus solvent with a dry cloth around newly formed joint.

Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or bentconnector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for W.Cspigot outlet.

E. Laying Rigid Pipe

Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected fordefects.

Pipes with flexible joints, except concrete protection is provided as specified hereaftershall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular bedding material extending for the fullwidth of the trench and with sufficient material at the side to permit the pipes to be workedinto the granular material and firmly supported to true line and level. Sufficient spaceshould be left to enable the joints to be made tested and inspected but the contractorshall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe length is fully supported. After the

pipeline has been tested and approved by the Engineer the trench shall be carefully filledto 300 mm above the crown of the pipe with granular material.

F. Laying Plastic Pipe

All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc., of pipes plasticmaterials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations subjectto the approval of the Engineer.






G. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment

All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or asotherwise directed by the Engineer.

All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where otherwisespecified, the finished pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes.Where shown on the drawings or other wise permitted by the Engineer small changes ofdirection shall be achieved by deflection at joints within the maximum permitted by themanufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required is greater than that obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the appropriate degree shall be used.Manufactured bends shall only be used where shown on the drawings or where otherwisepermitted by the Engineer.

All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified line and levelsso that every pipeline lies in straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes between

successive manholes on the line.

Every pipe shall placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the lineand level required. All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and individual pipesshall be achieved by methods approved by the Engineer.

Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid the contractor shall provide, fix andmaintain at such points as may be directed by the Engineer properly painted sight railsand boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of individual pipes tocorrect alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over the line of pipes orimmediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than three sight rails in positionon each length of pipeline under construction to any other gradient.

If the contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipelinealignment, he shall submit his proposed method to the Engineer for approval.

INSPECTIONS

Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,measurement and testing for each of the following cases :

i. Setting out completedii. Excavations completediii. Beddings Laid

iv. Drainage Laid and ready for testingv. Drainage bedding cover complete and compactedvi. Backfilling complete and compacted with ground level finish complete and ready

for final testing.






20.2.06 MANHOLES

CEMENT AND CONCRETE

A. Cement

All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whetherabove or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS 4027.

Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by volume insuitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS.

Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.

The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or shall bemixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous in colour.

Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no more than stiffworkability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.

Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked upagain after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be removed fromthe works.

Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved epoxymortar.

MANHOLES

A. General

Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter.

The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings andfully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.

B. Blockwork Manholes

Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to thedimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Engineer.

The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the ContractDrawings.

Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphateresisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1. Hollowconcrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.

Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound material. If






the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be coated with anapproved waterproofing material.

Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be ofconcrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of concreteGrade SRC 30.

Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick SRCmortar rendering Class 1.

All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel fittingsshall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen coating waterproofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.

All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge polythene

membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.

Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solidprecast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.

Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole access opening are less thanthe internal dimensions of the manhole chamber.

The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames ofthe quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set onprecast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.

Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half sectionvitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections. Benching inmanholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter and positions ofthe incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes shall have vertical sidesextending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level of the crown of the highestpipe. The benchings shall be sloped towards the channels at a gradient of 1 in 10 or asotherwise detailed on the drawings.

The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering. Theends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape to suit theinternal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the inside, thebenching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.

20.2.07 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS

Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes andtypes as shown on the contract drawings.

In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of two types, as follows unlessotherwise specified.

Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A






Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B

Heavy Duty

All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497 Grade A.Reference M.A 60.

The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the loosely-bolted double triangular type with three point suspension to provide stability under load.

Medium Duty

All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas, shallbe medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1.

The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either

rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shallincorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and testing ofthe drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to provide an airtightseal.

The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double sealbetween cover and frame. Following out and testing of the drainage system, the sealinggrooves shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.

In those areas where it is required to accept a tilled floor finish, the manhole covers shallbe of the recessed type. In kitchens or other areas subject to washing-down manholecovers and frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double cover units shall be

provided where specified in the Manhole schedule.

The contractor shall provide two sets of lifting key for each type of manhole.

Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.

Step Irons

Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall complywith BS 1247 and be of the general purpose or precast concrete manhole pattern asapplicable.The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.

20.2.08 SOAKAWAYS

Soakaways shall be constructed using precast concrete manholes rings 1800 mmdiameter and shall have a minimum depth of 2.5 metres below invert of entry pipe andconstructed to BS 5911: Part 1.3

The precast concrete rings shall be from sulphate resisting cement to British Standard4027:1980. The precast rings shall be a minimum of 100 mm thick with 75 mm diameterperforations, space 30 mm vertically and 410 mm horizontally with each symmetrically






staggered. The bottom ring shall be set on a cast in situ concrete base of a minimum 150mm thick from concrete with a 300 mm diameter bore hole lining sleeve cast in centrallyas shown on the drawings. All rings shall be bedded in cement mortar and the soakawaysshall be surrounded by granular material. All soakaways shall also comply with“Developer Drainage Guide” published by the Ministry of Public Works Civil EngineeringDepartment. Sewerage Division where applicable.

The granular infill shall extend 500 mm each side of the precast and 1500 mm each end.The entire void surrounding the precast rings shall be filled in layers of 300 mm eachlayer, tamped by hand.

The soakaway cover slab shall be reinforced precast concrete with cast iron cover andframe as shown in the manhole schedule and complying to British Standard BS 497.

Step irons shall be cast into side of the precast rings at 300 mm centres vertically, withthe first one being 450 mm below the cover level. All step irons shall be galvanized and

comply to British Standard BS 1247 : 1975.

A minimum of two coats of paint shall be applied.

22.2.09 HOLDING TANK

The construction of holding tank shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All cementshall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced concrete baseslab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete and comply withBS:8110, Part 1, 1985.

The tanks shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in

accordance with the structural engineering details.

Holding tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats) andexternally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access manholesshall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed in the scheduleof manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be provided at 30 mmcenters both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm below cover level. Theinlet and outlet foul sewer shall be cast iron and have a puddle flange located within theholding tank wall. The inlet shall be via a cast iron inlet tee complete with access cap.

A scum board shall be located at the outlet end of the tank as detailed in the drawingsand a 100 mm cast iron holding tank vent, complete with insect guard, shall be provided.

20.2.10 PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE PIPES

A. Concrete Protection to Pipelines

All underground drainage pipework shall be surrounded with 150 mm thick Grade SRC 20sulphate resisting concrete, along its entire length in the following locations :-

1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements2. All drainage with less than 600 mm cover.






3. Drainage with a cover of between 600 mm and 1200 mm where there is vehiculartraffic over the ground above the drain line.

4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract drawings.

The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as indicatedon the Contract drawings.

Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding ofconcrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench.

The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks which shall beseparated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing.

After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Engineer the top of the concretebed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20 carefully placedand compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150 mm above the

crown of the pipe.

Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard orpolystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full crosssection of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the profile ofthe pipe.

B. Pipelines Protection From Extraneous Material

The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is notis progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an approvedwatertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage the pipe will not

be approved.

The contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior to jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt sand or other matterthat may contaminate the pipeline.

The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a conditionprecedent to acceptance.

C. Trenches

All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS Section 20-

2 and this specification,Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the installation of therequired pipe bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally the depth of covershall not be less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.

Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table :

Nominal Minimum MaximumPipe Bore Width Widthmm mm mm






100 430 630

150 490 690

200 560 760

The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300 mmabove the crown of the pipe.

Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of theEngineer. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required depth withconcrete or other such materials as the Engineer may direct.

In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or within5 metres of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as tominimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require support by

timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not be permitted.

D. Granular Bedding Material for Rigid Pipes.

Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and shallbe a suitable "all in" ballast or stone.

For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12 millimetersto 5 millimetres all passing 12 millimetres and not more than 20 percent passing 5percent millimetres B.S sieve.

E. Backfilling Excavation

After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete surround,the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material freefrom all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm.Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it hasbeen completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the fullwidth of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact backfillingwhen the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 metres.


All drain pipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and the

requirements of Section 20 – 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S.

The Engineer shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the Engineer aminimum of 24 hours notice of all test. The contractor shall also provide test sheets setout in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.

The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies areavailable shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction of theEngineer and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.






After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractorshall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of theEngineer. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700 : 1987.

The tests shall demonstrate :

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is ofadequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet thespecified requirements.

c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc, are correctly calibratedand accurate.

d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.

The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with theEngineer. The Client's representative and the Engineer shall be at liberty to be present attests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of hisresponsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof shallprovide the Engineer with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The contractor shallalso provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and adequate labour forcarrying out the tests.

A. Proving Tests.

All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down andthoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipework system.

After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the drainage,soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow. Particular attentionshall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory flow when a number offittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any trap.

B. Water Test

All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been properly

laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set. A water testpressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at the high end, butnot more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall be carried out on lengths of drainnot less than half the distance between manholes, all to be agreed with the Engineer onsite. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and the higher end shall have a standpipe not less than 1.2 m high. The drain shall be filled, taking care to eliminate trappedair. After repair of leakage due to defective pipes, joints and plugs the drain under testshall be left for one hour to allow water absorption by pipes and fittings.






The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and notingthe quantity of water required to maintain the original level in the stand pipe. For drainsup to 300 mm diameter, the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per100 linear metres per millimeter of nominal bore of the drain under test. All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct beddingcover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface complete.

C. Air Test

A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of thelength to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall beplugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test until apressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further pumpingthe pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a period of f ive minutes.

Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipework shall be shaded from the sun atall times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described in thisspecification.

D. Profile Test

A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains frommanhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and W.C'sare filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal internaldiameter of the pipe by not more than 6 mm or by not more than 45% of the nominalinternal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.

During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall becarried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and that theyare free of debris.

E. Manhole Test

All manholes shall tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and therequirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S.

The Engineer shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the Engineer aminimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide test sheets setout in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.

All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water tests byplugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a minimumheight of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at ten minuteintervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall occur for anuninterrupted period of three hours.






20.2.12 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

DRAINAGE:

Item Manufacturer

uPVC Pipes HEPWORTH,KEY TERRAINMARLY

uPVC Fittings HEPWORTH,KEY TERRAINMARLY

Rain Water Outlet WADEFROSTSMITHHEPWORTH

M.H. Cover STANTONSAUDI CASTGLYNWED

Floor Gully, Cover WADE ACOFORST

SMITH

Sump Pump AURORANOCCHIEBARRA







DRAINAGE SYSTEM

DR-01 Site Plan –Drainage Layout

DR-02 Third Basement Floor - Drainage layout

DR-03 Second Basement Floor - Drainage Layout

DR-04 First Basement Floor Drainage Layout

DR-05 Ground Floor Drainage Layout

DR-06 Mezzanine Floor Drainage Layout

DR-07 First Floor Drainage Layout

DR-08 Second to Fifth Floor Drainage Layout

DR-09 Six to Seventh Floor Drainage Layout

DR-10 Eight Floor Drainage Layout

DR-11 Ninth Floor Drainage Layout

DR-12 Main Roof Plan –Drainage Layout

DR-13 Second Roof Plan – Drainage Layout

DR-14 Drainage Standard Detail Layout



SECTION – 21

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION




AEB 695-07/20081

Section 21.0-Electrical InstallationRev 0


21.1.00 GENERAL

21.1.01 Site


21.1.03 Definitions


21.1.05 Compliance with Specification and Regulations

21.1.06 Electrical Supply System

21.1.07 Program








21.1.15 Safety

21.1.16 Contractor's License

21.1.17 Permits



21.1.20 Labels and Identification

21.1.21 Works Test and Certificates






AEB 695-07/20082


21.1.24 Period of Maintenance

21.2.00 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION

21.2.01 Transformer

21.2.02 M. V. Panel

21.2.03 Bus-Bar Riser

21.2.04 Sub-Main Switch Boards

21.2.05 Distribution Boards

21.2.06 Air Circuit Breakers

21.2.07 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

21.2.08 Miniature Circuit Breakers

21.2.09 Fuses

21.2.10 Fuse Switches and Isolators

21.2.11 Single core Wires & Armored Cables

21.2.12 MICC Cables & Fire Rated Cables

21.2.13 Conduits and Conduit Fittings

21.2.14 Cable Trunkings & Cable Trays

21.2.15 Electrical Ducts

21.2.16 Lighting Fixture

21.2.17 Wiring Accessories

21.2.18 Fire Alarm System

21.2.19 Central Battery and Emergency Pack up for Lighting

21.2.20 Voice Alarm Systems

21.2.20 Communication System

21.2.21 CCTV System.

21.2.22 Standby Generator

21.2.24 Uninterruptible Power Supply System (U.P.S.)




AEB 695-07/20083


21.2.25 Lightning Protection System

21.2.26 Earthing and Bonding


21.2.28 Warranty and Guarantee

21.2.29 Spares

21.2.30 Schedule of Approved Mounting Heights


21.2.32 Schedule of Light Fixtures




AEB 695-07/20084


21.1.01 SITE

For Site Location, refer to the Project Specifications.


Unless otherwise specified, all the Electrical Equipments shall be capable ofwithstanding the following site conditions :

1 Maximum Ambient : 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in SummerTemperature & 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Winter

2 Altitude : Sea Level

3 Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

4 Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour

5 Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

6 Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

7 Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

21.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawingsshall mean:

Site : The Locations where the works are to becarried out.

Contractor : The Main Contractor

QGEWC : Qatar General Electricity and WaterCorporation

SED : State Electricity Department

Q-TEL : Qatar Public Telecommunication Corporation

QGEWC Regulations : Regulations issued by the Ministry of Electricity &Water regarding the installation of Electricalequipment, Wiring & Air-conditioning of residentialand commercial Buildings (Latest Edition).

IEE Regulations : Regulations for Electrical Installations issued by theInstitution of Electrical Engineers (Latest Edition).




AEB 695-07/20085




Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and

the schedules therein.

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor forthe purpose of execution of work at site.

As Built Drawings : Which is the true record of the actual workcarried out at site.

Works : To include the provisions for al the materials andworks to be carried out by the contractor as perthese specifications and for the satisfactory

completion of the installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant inwriting.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant inwriting.

Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant inwriting.




Concealed : Shall mean Hidden from normal sight in theshafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.

Exposed :Shall mean visible to building occupants inspaces, which may be reached without the useladders or any other temporary means of access




AEB 695-07/20086


21.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installations, testingand commissioning of the electrical materials and equipment as per thespecifications drafted in these sections and the drawings.

The contractor shall provide complete installation of the project and otherassociated works such as supporting structures, ancillary works etc. A briefdescription of electrical works is as follows:

Transformer

MV Panel

Bus-Bar Riser

Sub-Main Switch Boards, Distribution boards, ELCBs, Isolators,

etc.

Wires and Cables

Conduits and conduit fittings

Trunking and Trays

Wiring accessories

Lighting fixtures

Telephone system.

Fire alarm systems.

Central Battery / Emergency Pack for lighting.

CCTV system.

Standby Generator

Uninterruptible Power Supply system.

Lightning Protection system.

Earthing and bonding system.

Voice Alarm Systems




AEB 695-07/20087



The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition.The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled Labour tocomplete the works in accordance with the program of works.

The installations shall comply with the following regulations:

i. The installation of works shall be as per the 6th edition and publication ofQGEWC regulations and 16th edition of IEE regulations. In case ofcontradiction, QGEWC regulations shall take precedence.

ii. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications &codes of practice (current editions including all amendments).

iii. If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipments other than thespecified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written

approval from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultantreserves the right for such approval/s.

iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contractdrawings but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or anyincidental accessories or work necessary to make the work complete andperfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularlyspecified shall be supplied and installed or carried out by the contractorwithout any additional costs.

Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any suchcases at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises

afterwards during the construction, the consultant‟s decision shall be finaland binding on all such matters.

21.1.06 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM

The following supply system is prevailing in the state of Qatar.

Supply : Alternating currentVoltage : 415 volts on 3 phase and 240 volts on

Single phaseFrequency : 50 cycles per second (Hz)Number of wires : 4(3phases+1 neutral) + Earth conductor.Neutral : Full capacity as phase solidly earthed at

MV Panel or Main switchboard.Voltage tolerance : Plus or Minus 6%

NOTE :-

All the equipments and accessories shall be rated for 240 or 415 volts, 50 Hz, AC. No alternatives will be permissible i.e., 220 / 380 volts or 115/220 voltsequipments will be summarily rejected.




AEB 695-07/20088


Throughout this specification and on the Drawings, the following ranges ofnominal voltages (r.m.s values of a.c.) are used and defined as follows :

Extra Low Voltage : Normally not exceeding 50 Volts between theConductors or to the Earth

Low Voltage : Normally exceeding Low voltage but not exceeding250 Volts between Conductors and the Earth

Medium Voltage : Normally exceeding 250 Volts but not exceeding650 Volts, whether between the Conductors orbetween any Conductor and Earth.

High Voltage : Normally exceeding 650 Volts between Conductorsor between any Conductor and Earth

21.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical PathMethod or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities andoperations to complete the project in time. The following points shall behighlighted in the Program:

1 Mobilization2 Drawings and Material Submittals3 Approvals4 Equipment Deliveries5 First Fix6 Main & Sub-Main Distribution Equipment

7 Second Fix8 Fixing of Light Fixtures9 Testing10 Commissioning & Handing Over


The electrical tender drawings related to this project have been listed in theSchedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawingshave been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and generalarrangement required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor‟sresponsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions aretentative and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing atthe time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Lighting points in relation tothe furniture and equipments. The Contractor is deemed to have studied theservices drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in hisprices for all builders work associated with these drawings.




AEB 695-07/20089



The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans,1:5 for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant‟sapproval. The contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:

i. Actual conduit routes with circular junction boxes indicating the size ofconduit, number and size of wires it is carrying, where it is rising up orbending down etc.

ii. Separate drawing shall be prepared for each small power and lighting.

iii. Reflected ceiling plans showing coordinated services, light fittings andother ancillary equipment such as fire alarm, A.C diffusers etc., withrespect to the ceiling.

iv. Mounting arrangement of light fittings, cables, cable trays, trunkingetc.

v. Sectional views for coordinating the electrical wiring and otherservices i.e., Air-conditioning, Drainage & Plumbing to the Consultant‟srequirements.


The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works requiredfor the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical,

Mechanical, Plumbing and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properlycoordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the servicesshall be installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other andmaintain the clearances required between each of them as per the QGEWCRegulations.


The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with thespecifications and tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item ofthe equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for thenecessary approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall besubmitted: in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall besubmitted duly supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.




AEB 695-07/200810


In case of items involving aesthetic, like light fittings, wiring accessories, smoke /heat detectors, etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with thematerials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technicalliterature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the

equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one,either Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all theMaterials submittals of the Electrical Equipments in the following proforma to theconsultant:

i. Submittal Numberii. Equipment / Model Numberiii. Manufacturer / Local Agentiv. Date of Approvalv. Date of Order / Order Number

vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )vii. ETA on Siteviii. Status as on date of Report

a Equipment Supply

All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointedlocal agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply thespare parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall markthe same clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,

then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approvalfrom the consultant specifically.


Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable forinstallations in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type ofstructure, construction program and the method of access.

c Design references

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, whichrequires amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, dueto the change in the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., Thecontractor shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative fromthe Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal basedon the Consultant‟s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor isdeemed to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well asobtained clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation forthe execution.




AEB 695-07/200811



The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all thematerials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any materialused at site, which is not approved earlier specifically, shall stand rejectedwithout notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copyor the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, thecontractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from theConsultant. Any time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟saccount.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site andreplace with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractorfails to do so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other

agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

a Materials Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of thematerials at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensurethat on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with allprotective finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection atsite shall be strictly as per Q.C.S respective sections.


Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in theSchedule of Manufacturer‟s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals forany of the equipment or material for the Consultant‟s consideration. Only in caseif the specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases,the Consultant will consider the alternatives, before the tender is accepted andthe Consultant‟s decision will be final regarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptanceof the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternativeequipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and thecontractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto thespecification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will notpermit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, butnevertheless at the Contractor‟s expenses etc.,


The location of switches and sockets as indicated on the tender drawings istentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. Theexact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings asindicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and coordinated with furnishingand other services.




AEB 695-07/200812


21.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protectmanpower and machinery. The temporary supply either generated or obtainedfrom supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with suitableearth leakage circuit breaker.

The socket outlets used for construction shall be weather proof, industries typewith suitable plugs etc., The cables and socket outlets shall be protected againstmechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be properlywired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel andangle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient placesand shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for thistemporary supply.

The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used

for the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lieon the floor preferable projected against mechanical damage.

The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the approval of theConsultant and carry out the works strictly in accordance with QGEWCRegulations.


The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Electricalworks shall have the valid license from the QGEWC. The grade of license shallalso be in accordance with the total load of this project. A copy of the License

shall be submitted to the Consultant.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of theElectrical Consultant, Electrical Foreman and Electricians to be employed on theproject along with their QGEWC license copies, and obtain approval from theconsultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace thestaff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should beobtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum periodof 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, theproposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years localexperience. The consultant will reject any application with less than 5 years ofexperience.

21.1.17 PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of workand obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. Allapplications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, aminimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fullyresponsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his worksite as well as for any connected works to others.




AEB 695-07/200813



Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not beused in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order toutilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be broughtto the attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey afterwhich the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a writtenpermission from the Consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” conditionfollowing such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal &discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final andbinding.


The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used

in this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction oflocal climatic conditions.

The contractor or his representative before shipment to ensure that finishes arein accordance with the specifications shall inspect all materials.

21.1.20 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION

All main switches, isolating switches, distribution boards and main switch boardsshall have labels fixed to the outside by means of four small round-head screws,labels of not less than 50x12 mm. high, engraved with 6 mm. or more, blacklettering to indicate the purpose of the switch or distribution board. The labels

shall be of white / black / white Trifoliate. The minimum height of lettering forswitchgear equipment shall be 6 mm.

Each distribution board shall be provided with type-written circuit chart oncartridge paper protected overall by thin Perspex sheet and fixed to the inside ofthe door. The circuit list shall give the number and details of points served byeach circuit and the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker. Sample lists shall besubmitted to the Consultant for approval before installation.

Each underground cable shall have its size and feeder‟s name engraved /punched on an aluminium strip 12 mm wide of 16 gauge thickness and shall betightened on each end where cables enter / come out of the trench or soil.

All the accessible switchboards and distribution boards shall be provided withwarning plates “DANGER - 440 VOLTS” having 8 mm red letter on white vitreousenamel plate.

21.1.21 WORKS TEST AND CERTIFICATE

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or the Client or theClient's representative to witness tests of major items of equipment atmanufacturer‟s works.




AEB 695-07/200814


The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of thecontract the list of equipment to be inspected and the contractor shall give theConsultant the required notice of the date on which the plant will be ready fortesting.

The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept thecontractor's test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the test certificates inoriginal to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.


The contractor shall provide six copies in the form of bound documents theoperating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following:

a. Step by step operating procedures.b. Preventive maintenance schedule.

c. Technical literature.d. Spare parts liste. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and

contact person. - Local as well as overseas.f. Work test certificates, if any.g. Routine Test results carried out at site.


After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawingsshall be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shallbe supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings, which

are to be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of theproject.

Two sets of process negatives along with three sets of drawings shall besubmitted after approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.


The contractor shall guarantee the entire Electrical System installed againstFaulty / improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of400 days (Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissionedand accepted by the Consultant, after the availability of the QGEWC mainsElectric Supply at site. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods areotherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shallapply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, whichstates that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documentsduring the period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies,within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.




AEB 695-07/200815


In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned abovewithin the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectifythe fault but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.

21.2.00 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION

21.2.01 TRANSFOMERS

The Contractor shall include Supply & installation - Dry type transformer rating1600 KVA, 11KV/ 415V 3-Phase, 4-Wire, 50 Hz, complete with all accessories

and complying with the exact specifications and requirements of “KAHRAMAA”.

The detailed specifications shall be obtained from “KAHRAMAA” by the

Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain specific approval from “KAHRAMAA”,before procuring the Transformer. After installation of the transformer, the testing

and commissioning shall be carried out as per “KAHRAMAA” regulations andshall be approved by the authorities.

The contractor in co-ordination with KAHRAMAA shall lay the single coresecondary cables from the transformer to the MV Panel incomer.

21.2.02 M V PANEL

a General

The MV Panel installed in MV room at the substation shall receive electric powerfrom the transformer substation and distribute power to the equipment as listedin the schematic diagrams.

The MV panel shall be of form 3B Type 2 in constructions. The panel shall havefacility for Top/ bottom entry of all the cables as per project requirement. ThePanel manufacturer shall take the above matter into consideration during panelconstruction. Tthe main horizontal busbars shall be placed on top part of thepanel having its own enclosure and vertical drop down to be taken from the mainbus bar. The outgoing cables shall be tapped from the vertical drop downs only.

The panel shall have adequate space for the termination of the cables andfacility shall be made from connecting parallel cables to the outgoing MCCBs.

The electricity supply shall be 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hs. alternating

current. The switchgear and busbar system comprising of three phase andneutral fully shrouded and insulated busbars incorporating withdraw ablemotorized and manual main Air Circuit Breakers and MCCB‟s shall be of cubicaltype having a minimum fault rating of 44 kA for 3 seconds. The ratings shallapply to the whole Panel board including main air-circuit breaker, main busbars,MCCB‟s etc.

Panel board shall be manufactured in accordance with the following:

1. BS 5486, which outlines the requirements for electrical power switchgear andassociated apparatus.




AEB 695-07/200816


2. MEW regulations for the installation of electrical wiring, electrical equipment andair conditioning equipment, sixth Re-issue January 1992.

b Panel Construction

The Panel board shall be suitable for front and back access only to givecomplete accessibility as far as cabling and termination are concerned.

1. Panel Board shall be flush fronted, metal clad protected type enclosure, suitablefor indoor use in the form of freestanding floor mounted cubicle. The cubicleshall be sectionalized as required to facilitate transport and erection. The heightshall be not more than 2200 mm. MV panel shall have a steel frame chassis atthe bottom.

2. Panel Board shall be rigidly built using a minimum of 2.6-mm. thick sheet steel inconjunction with an angle iron base frame. A folded metal frame construction

may be acceptable in lieu of an angle iron base frame subject to the Consultant'sapproval. Removable panels shall be a minimum of 2 mm. hinged / gasketed /lockable and totally dust proof to IP 54.

c Panel finish

1. The finish shall be hard, smooth, blemish free and durable prior to painting, allexternal welds and any rough areas be smoothed and all surfaces shall be freefrom rust, scale of grease. Rustproof steel works are to be used in theconstruction; otherwise the panel shall be treated with passivity‟s agent, such asphosphoric acid.

2. All internal surfaces shall have a minimum of three coats of paint. The first shallbe an approved anti-rusting priming coat and the final coat shall be white glossenamel.

3. All external surfaces shall have a minimum of five coats of paint. The first twoundercoats shall be applied, with each coat being rubbed smoothed when drybefore the application of the next coat of paint. At least two final coats of stoveenamel paint, gloss or semi-matt finish shall be applied.

4. The finish color with the appropriate BS color code number shall be selectedfrom the manufacturer's range at the time of approval of the manufacturer'sdrawings.

All busbars shall be 3 phase and full neutral and shall comply with BS 159. Theyshall be of high conductivity rectangular section, hard-drawn copper, electrolyticgrade suitably marked and color-coded in accordance with BS 159. The shortcircuit ratings of the bus bars shall be as stated above. All the busbars shall beprovided with bolts, nuts, and pressure type flat washers and spring washers atall joints. The jointing of busbars shall be carried out by special torque wrench tothe pressure recommended by the relevant BS




AEB 695-07/200817


The Panel board shall be so arranged that the bus bars are accessible withoutremoving any ACB, fuse switch, isolator or MCCB.

Insulators for busbar supports shall be non-hygroscopic and of non-agingmaterial and shall be able to withstand the designed fault current referred above.

The interconnections shall be of copper busbars for 400 amperes and above.The lower sizes may be PVC insulated flexible multi-strand copper conductors ofrequired capacity. These connections shall be so arranged that they do notobstruct the access to cable terminations.

The Panel board shall be complete with all-necessary sealing chambers andcable connecting (glanding) plates to terminate all incoming and outgoing cables.Where single core cables are required to enter the switchboard, a removablebrass gland plate shall be provided.

Cable boxes, glands and lugs shall be supplied and installed as applicable foreach main or sub main cable entering or leaving the cubicle. Cable glands shallbe as near to the terminations as possible but enough space shall be allowed toterminate cables. Cable glands shall be of brass and compression type tosuit the size of cable.

Control wiring within the cubicle shall be in accordance with BS 6004 or BS 5467and shall be neatly arranged and cleated. Cleats shall be fixed to the Panelboard structure at sufficient intervals to avoid cable sag. Adequate cable loopsmust be allowed to accessories on doors to avoid cable stretch.

Control wiring within the switchboards shall be a minimum 2.5 sq. mm and

protected by HRC fuses of 20A mounted directly on the busbars in an accessiblelocation. The busbar shroud shall be extended around the fuse bases to preventaccidental contact with the busbars while replacing the fuses.

The neutral busbars shall be linked to the earth busbars. These links shall beremovable. The earth bar shall be a minimum of 300 sq. mm and continuousthroughout the length of the panel. Under no circumstances, a commonearth/neutral bar will be accepted.

All earth bars shall be so mounted that there is no restriction to cable access bythe structure.

The Panel board manufacturer shall be deemed to have included in his price forcompliance with MEW regulations for all internal wiring, connections, earthingtapes, meters and instruments etc.

Contractor shall provide BMS linking facility in coordination with the specialistcontractor.

D.C Supply




AEB 695-07/200818


30 D.C supply is required for tripping of the LV ACBS through D.C shunt trip forrestricted earth fault relay. Contractor to provide for this unit complete withtrickle charger and long life batteries.

The unit shall be designed to operate on 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C supply andfor continuous duty at an ambient temperature of 50 deg. C and 98% relative

humidity.The capacity of the unit is to be determined by the manufacturers and based onnumber of trip units.

21.2.03 BUS - BAR RISERS (Trunking)

The Bus-bar risers including the accessories, used for the project shallconform to BS EN 60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the16th edition of the Wiring regulations BS 7671.

The 5 bar 3-phase Bus-bar risers shall be constructed to the British standards

requirements; with Extruded aluminium housing and side flanges and be suitablefor both Horizontal and Vertical Installation. The entire system shall conform toBS EN 60529 for ingress protection to IP 42 as a minimum.

All the Phase and Neutral conductors shall be of copper and of same size andrating as mentioned in the drawings and shall be supported individually within thehousing of the riser and insulated by high di-electric strength sleeves.

The Copper conductors shall be hard drawn and of high conductivity to BS 1432and rated at 660V with required current ratings specified in the drawings andelsewhere.

Interlocking covers shall be provided on the tapping faces with the use of Highdi-electric strength Insulating material.

The Bus-bar risers shall be suitable of operating at an ambient of 50 Deg.C, andsuitable derating factors shall be considered during the selection, and thetemperature rise shall not exceed 55 deg.C, when the Bus-bar riser is carryingthe full load current continuously.

The prospective short circuit rating of the busbars shall be at least 40KA whenprotected by HRC fuses of equal rating to the bus-bars and the system‟s shorttime rating shall not be less than 20kA for 1 second.

The trunking (bus-bar risers) shall be mounted as shown in the drawings withsuitable universal brackets, suitable expansion fittings shall be installed, ifrequired to take care of the expansion of the bus-bars under varying load andambient temperature conditions.

The Incoming feed arrangements shall be of End feed type as mentioned in thedrawings, with suitable load break switches, suitable cable glands and sockets.




AEB 695-07/200819


Suitable fire barriers of intumescing compound shall be installed when the bus-bar riser passes through the floors and fire integrity for at least 2 hours shall bemaintained.

The outlet connection provisions in the busbar riser shall feature a fullyautomatic safety shutter at each tap-off point (at least 6 tap-off outlets per 3

meter length as standard), and the shutter shall be actuated by the insertion ofthe tap-off boxes, and shall operate only if the boxes are fitted in correct way,and the safety shutter shall close automatically upon removal of the tap-offboxes.

Required safety feature to ensure non-reversibility of the tap-off boxes shall beprovided in the shutter actuator.

The Tap-off boxes shall be complete with, fuse or fuse switch or miniature circuitbreaker or moulded case circuit breaker or earth leakage circuit breaker /protective devices of suitable ratings as mentioned in the drawings.

FACTORY TESTING

The manufacturer on each piece of busbar trunking shall carry out the followingtests before it leaves the factory:

3.5kV Dielectric Test for 4 seconds. 1000V Megger Test

A Factory Certificate of Testing and Inspection shall be submitted to theConsulting Engineer.

SITE TESTING

Before installation each piece of busbar trunking shall be Meggertested at 1000V

On completion of the installation each busbar run shall be Meggertested at 1000V

A temperature heat rise test in accordance with the manufacturer‟srecommendation/procedure shall be carried out on site.

All test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Consultant Engineer forapproval.

21.2.04 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS

The complete sub main switchboard shall be capable of withstanding, withoutdamage, a symmetrical prospective fault current of the system.

The switch board shall be of cubicle type suitable for Wall mounting as specified,comprising of incoming and outgoing MCCB‟s as shown on the Electricalschematic drawings. The construction of the Switchboard shall be of FORM - 2

The sub main switchboard shall incorporate all items detailed on the attacheddrawings and specification and shall be designed such that no operating handle




AEB 695-07/200820


exceeds a height of 2.10 m from finished floor level. Main incoming isolator shallform part of the unit.

The Bus bars shall be of electrolytic copper, PVC sleeved, supported on non-hygroscopic insulating material confirming to BS 159 and suitably de-rated forproviding the sleeves.

The equipment sizes indicated are the minimum acceptable to the Consultantbut manufacturers standard items may be utilized providing that they are notlower rating than those specified.

The switchboard shall contain a suitable earth bar to which all items ofequipment and cable glands are bonded. The minimum size of this earth barshall be that of feeder cable. Similarly neutral bar shall be provided of the samecross section as live bars.

Door of dead front cover shall be supplied as an integral unit that shrouds all live

parts. Blank fillers shall be fitted to fill all unused branch breaker space.

The switchboard shall be constructed to conform to the specified requirements ofthe MEW, relevant British Standard and codes of practice. The drawings ofproposed arrangements should be forwarded to the Consultant and MEW forapproval prior to commencement of manufacture.

The contractor shall be responsible for checking access, builders work, to ensurethat the switchboard is constructed and installed as required by the MEWregulations, relevant British Standards and Code of Practice.

The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS) of all outgoing MCCB's

shall be equal to or greater than 25 kA/for 3 seconds.

All MCCB's in the sub-main switchboards shall be of the selective type to providefull discrimination on the downstream circuit breakers and conform to IEC 947-2,and shall be of triple pole in construction with magnetic and thermal overloadprotection, de-rated for the ambient temperature of 50 Deg.C.

In case the fault level does not match the specified 25kA, the current limitingdevices shall be provided in accordance with Table No.1 of MEW regulations.

The rating of all MCCB‟s incorporated in the sub-main switchboards are shown indetail on the drawings.

All current ratings, shown on drawings, must be for a continuous ambienttemperature of 50 deg. C and relative humidity of 95%.

All front cover shall have suitable label inscribed to denote the purpose of eachitem with the label inscribed to show a line diagram of the interconnectionsbetween units.

All the sub-main boards shall be complete with 3 Nos. of Ammeters of maximumdemand indicating types, voltmeter with selector switch, control fuses and 3 Nos.of Indication lamps for the three phases.21.2.04




AEB 695-07/200821


21.2.05 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1 General

Distribution boards shall conform to B.S. 5486 Part 12/IEC 439 –3 and besuitable for operation on 415 volts, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire and 240 volts, 50 Hz,single phase A.C. system. The required fault level shall be 10 kA for 3 secondsat 415 volts, at the DB level, as per the QGEWC regulations.

These boards shall be factory assembled suitable for flush or surface mountingas indicated on the tender drawings. All boards shall be complete with MCB‟s,ELCB / RCCB‟s, incoming isolators and other accessories as required.

The enclosure shall be fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having adequategauge to ensure a rigid and robust construction free from distortion. Eachenclosure shall be of adequate size to accommodate all components specified

and in stove enameled.

The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel, which shall be firmlyfixed by cheese-head screws. Screw holes shall have a minimum depth of 6mm.

The front panel shall be cut neatly to allow, the MCB‟s / RCCB‟s levers toprotrude through. The front panel shall however effectively conceal allconductors, contactors, busbars and any other live parts installed within theenclosures. Each enclosure shall be fitted with a rigidly constructed double-hinged sheet steel door.

All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with atleast two robust hinges.

The busbars shall be electro –tinned copper busbars. Multi-terminal busbars shallbe provided for neutral & earth circuits. Each single phase of a three DB shallhave its own neutral & earth terminal.

Each enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCB‟s /RCCB‟s of ratings as indicated on the tender drawings. The contractor shallsupply the additional breakers of ratings to be agreed with the consultant. Blankshields shall be provided for the rest of the spaces.

Distribution boards located remote from the Main Panel, or sub-main boardsshall be mounted at a height of not less than 1200mm to the center of the boardfrom the finished floor level and the maximum height from the finished floor levelto the top of the board shall be 2200mm.

Where single phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete withdouble Pole Isolator and 3 phase distribution boards are specified, they shall becomplete with triple Pole Isolator and removable / Demountable neutral link.Common ELCB for distribution boards shall not be accepted. Single-phasedistribution boards with ELCB incomer also shall not be accepted.

Earth and Neutral bars located in distribution boards shall have the same numberof connections as there are for phase connections.




AEB 695-07/200822


All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full load current of thecontrolling fuse which shall be of flat tinned copper rigidly mounted, supported onshock resisting, non-hygroscopic, high-grade insulators with high resistance totracking, not subject to mold growth or termite attack with adequate space andclearances.

Connections from the bus bars to the breakers shall be made by using solidcircular conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed.Each connection to or from the phase or neutral bar shall have its own brassfixing screws, washers and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted withan identification label on its front cover.

The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution board‟s referencenumber / rating in volts and amperes and the number of ways in English and Arabic.

In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distributionboard giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size, Fed from which SMDBand location etc., The reference cards shall be fixed to the inside of thedistribution boards door via a transparent envelope.

All live terminals and parts shall be shrouded with insulating materials to ensurethat it is impossible for any live part to be touched while withdrawing or replacingthe MCB‟s. All distribution boards should conform to IP 30 protection asminimum.

The breakers with correct rating shall be fitted in each way to confirm to the sizeof the sub-circuit conductor connected.

All distribution boards and the breakers shall be of one make throughout thewhole of the works.

21.2.06 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Air circuit breakers shall be fully withdraw able type, spring charged manuallyoperated closing as shown on the drawing, 3 pole suitable for 3 phase, 415 volts,4 wires, 50 Hz alternating current supply.

ACBs shall be of the horizontal withdraw able, load making and breaking typewith the contacts being of the double break pattern with arcing chutes, shutters

etc. The main arcing contacts shall be of the high-pressure butt type with wipeand roll action on opening and closing. The main contacts shall be silver alloy.Removable arc chutes shall be fitted together with an air circuit breaker. ACBshall be complete with a mechanical ON/OFF position indicator. ACB shallconform to BS 4752. The short circuit interrupting capacity- service shall be 50-kA minimum.

Each circuit breaker shall be enclosed in sheet steel and provided with threephase manual and automatic isolating devices suitably interlocked so as toprevent isolation except when the circuit breaker is in open position. It shall bearranged in such a manner that it will not be possible to withdraw the breaker or




AEB 695-07/200823


remove the front cover unless the ACB is in the isolated position. Provision shallbe made for locking the ACB in this position.

Shutters shall be provided to protect the live terminals against accidental touchwhen the ACBs are in a fully withdrawable position. The ACB shall have solid-state overload and short circuit protection devices along with earth fault trip

mechanism. The ACBs shall be equipped with shunt trip of 30 V DC tripmechanisms for tripping the breaker with restrictive earth fault relay to beprovided separately with suitable size of CTS.

The ACB section of the switchboard shall be in separate cubicle separated fromother parts of the switchboard. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders.

The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be non-ferrous material with brasscompression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds. In case single corePILCA/PVC cables are used, the clamping arrangement is to be supplied.

21.2.07 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Contractor to provide MCCB's as indicated on the tender drawings for theoutgoing feeders. They shall be triple pole, 415 volts, 50 Hz, with magnetic shortcircuit and thermal over load protection complying with BS 4752 Part 1. MCCBshall be of interrupting rating as specified in the drawings and conform to theMEW regulations. In case these MCCB's do not meet with required fault level,the current limiting device shall be used in series with them as per MEWregulations Table No. 1.

- Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall comply with IEC 947-2 latest edition

and shall be of high quality mouldings with all essential parts treated forcorrosion resistance and plated for good electrical conductivity. Over capacity ofthe MCCBs is not to be less than 125% of the rated amp. rating for 90 minutes.

- Where MCCBs are mounted individually, then, enclosure shall be manufacturedfrom heavy sheet steel with removable front plate, and removable gland plates attop and bottom. Knockouts shall not be accepted.

21.2.08 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Miniature circuit breakers shall be of an approved make and comply with IEC898 and B.S. 3871 Part I with magnetic or temperature compensated thermaloverload trips with magnetic short circuit trips. They shall be single pole rated foran ambient temperature of 50 deg. C. on the outside of the enclosure in whichthe breaker is mounted. They shall be of hermetically sealed type with minimumbreaking capacity of 10 KA at 415 V or otherwise indicated on the tenderdrawings. The frame size of all MCBs shall be identical so that they can beeasily interchanged. The MCBs shall be of the din rail mounting type (plug-intype are not acceptable). Circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free patternto prevent closing the breaker on a faulty circuit without resetting and shall alsoindicate the ON/OFF positions. Standard rating of MCBs shall be used for easeof availability.




AEB 695-07/200824


Miniature circuit breakers shall be used for the protection of final branch circuits.These shall be housed in sub-distribution boards. Short circuit rating shall beminimum 10 kA at 415 V.

Earth leakage circuit breakers shall be used to protect final branch circuits or

sections of sub-distribution boards supplying power to socket outlets, waterheaters and domestic appliances. For three phase supply a four pole ELCBshall be used and double pole for single-phase supply, trip setting shall bemaximum 30 mA, unless specified otherwise. The ELCBs shall comply with IEC1008 – 1MCBs shall be suitable for use without any distinction to be made betweensupply side & load side.

The fault withstands rating for the ELCB's - combined MCB/ELCBs shall not beless than 6 kA.

21.2.09 FUSES

High rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses shall be used for overload protection andshort circuit protection. In case molded case circuit breakers are used foroverload protection then HRC fuses shall serve for short circuit protection.

The contractor shall include for the provision of HRC fuses of the maximumrating of all equipment, in compliance with BS 88 for AC 46 Category of Duty andClass Q1 fusing factor.

Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Consultant before placing

any order. H.R.C fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the samemanufacturer and be of the same class or type to ensure adequatediscrimination and grading throughout the distribution system.

Semi-enclosed or re-wireable type shall not be provided or used. Cartridge fusesfor use in conjunction with 13 amp. socket and fused plug tops shall be inaccordance with BS 1362.

21.2.10 ENCLOSED FUSE SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS

A. GENERALLY:

To be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with enclosure to

prevent opening switch in the "ON" position.

Switch shall have "On/Off" indication and means of locking in "Off" position.

Protection class IP65 for outdoors and IP54 for indoor locations.

Load break switch and switch fuses should be „ARC TESTED‟ complete system

(along with enclosure) should be type tested from reputed international testing

laboratory for degree of protection as well as ARC Testing.




AEB 695-07/200825


Enclosure should have reliable position indicator. If the contacts are welded

together, the handle (front operated) should deviate from ON-Position less than

45o.

B. FUSE SWITCHES AND SWITCH FUSES:

To BS 5419 (IEC 408).

Fuses: to BS 88 bolted type, class Q1, certified for 415V and AC3 duty, rated as

indicated.

Fused switch carriages: withdrawable type.

Fuse switches: ASTA certified to 50 kA.

Protection class IP65 for outdoors and IP54 for indoor wet locations.

C. DISCONNECT SWITCHES OR ISOLATORS:

Same design as switch fuses, with solid copper links in place of fuses. Single pole and neutral, or triple pole and neutral.

Ratings: rated fused short-circuit current 50kA RMS.

Protection class IP65 for outdoors and IP54 for indoor wet locations.

21.2.11 SINGLE CORE WIRES AND ARMOURED CABLES

PVC INSULATED SINGLE CORE WIRES

The PVC insulated non-sheathed wires to be used for lighting and power wiringshall be of 450/750 volts grade conforming to B.S. 6004-1975 and laid in PVC or

galvanized conduit/trunking as specified. The wires used at this project shallhave stranded copper conductor and sized as indicated on drawings and inaccordance with QGEWC regulations.

The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit/trunking shall not exceedthan that given in the appropriate tables of QGEWC regulations. In all cases, itmust be possible to withdraw any wire without damage to the remaining cables.The wires to be used shall be colour coded - Red, Yellow and Blue for therespective phase wiring, Black for the neutral wiring and Green/Yellow for theearth conductor. The cables shall be installed on the ' loop-in' system, no jointsbeing made anywhere in the installation.

Wires ends shall be stripped with purpose made stripping tools correctlyadjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessoriessubject to a temperature rise in excess of 130 deg. F shall be carried out withconductors insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or Equal.

In distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit, sub-circuit or final sub-circuit shall be bound together and neatly wired into position in an approvedmanner.

When wires are installed in trunking the wires of each circuit, sub-circuit or finalsub-circuit shall be bound together in an approved manner at 600 mm. intervals.




AEB 695-07/200826


In vertical trunking, wires shall be fixed to prevent stress vertical trunking, wiresshall be fixed to prevent stress by weight. Where wires are installed in trunking,the trunking shall be of sufficient cross sectional area, having regard to thenumber of wires installed so that a space factor of 45% is not exceeded inaccordance with QGEWC regulations. The wires shall be of stranded core.

To identify the wires, each phase wiring shall be of its own color at both endsand provided with ferrules to identify the circuit number.

The wiring for the entire installation shall be carried out using loop system frompoint to point with no joints made anywhere on the installation. Not more thantwo ends of wires shall be joined in each terminal of switch/socket or light fitting.The minimum size of wire to be used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm. sq. andfor ring circuits, it shall be 4 mm. sq. unless otherwise specified.

The core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating material whichshall be white and shall have a glossy finish. The ferrules or sleeves shall be

unaffected by oil or damp. Characters shall be suitably marked in black.

ARMOURED CABLES

The armoured cables shall be sized to comply with the following:

i. Derating regulations of QGEWCii. Switch rating of the loadiii. Allowance for 2.5% voltage drop

The contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. Thesecables shall be designed for 600/1000 volts system. These cables shall be

either PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC as indicated on the drawings.

Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name onthe outer sheath and voltage rating for which it is manufactured.

XLPE/SWA/PVC B.S. 5467 & B.S. 5468PVC/SWA/PVC B.S. 6346

Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 cores, the neutralconductor having the same cross-sectional area of the phase conductors.

The minimum internal radius of bends in cables shall not be less than that given

in the appropriate Table of the IEE regulations for Electrical Equipment ofBuildings.

Cables laid above the false ceiling or on the walls shall be fixed on suitable sizeof clamps (PVC) at an interval of every 1.5 meters on the cable tray or cableladder.

The arrangement of cables and the methods of lying shall approved by theConsultant. Cables shall be laid direct buried in ground with protective covers,drawn into pipes or ducts, laid in troughs or on racks or supported on trays orcleats as may be required by the Consultant, in accordance with the following




AEB 695-07/200827


clauses. Where cables are installed in areas or locations that may be subjectedto direct sunlight, the contractor shall provide suitably approved sunshield madeof 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet.

Cables buried underground shall be laid at a minimum depth of 600 mm. fromthe ground level. The cables shall be laid on a cushion of graded and washed

builders fine sand of 200 mm. thick and shall be covered with another layer of200 mm. above it. Cable marking tape shall be installed on the top layer of sandthroughout the cable route. A minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm. shall bemaintained between the cables.

Cable and joint route markers of approved type shall be provided along the routeof buried cables as instructed by the Consultant. Markers shall be installed at allduct and joint positions, all places where the route changes direction and onstraight routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. Their provision andinstallation shall be included in the schedule rate for excavation andreinstatement.

Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not beused as the earth. Either a separate earth conductor shall be provided or thecable shall be increased by an extra core.

Cables crossing the roads/pathways shall be provided with PVC duct ofminimum 150 mm. dia., buried at a depth of 800 mm. below ground level andsurrounded by concrete layer of 100 mm. thick from all sides, unless otherwisementioned.

The contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing the trench covers,

free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the Consultant.

All single core and multi core main power cables shall be installed in cleats orsaddles fixed on vertical routes. Small power cables, those having conductorareas of 16 mm. sq. and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated fromother cables on the same tray by a space of 30 mm. All control cables shall beinstalled on trays.

All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glandsdesigned to adequately secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring and allfaces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly cleanedduring installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure good

electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there is no discontinuity inthe return circuit via the armouring and no local spot or high resistances. Meansof earthing the armouring to the main earth electrode at the supply end shall beprovided by means of a metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bondingconnection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are tobe fitted with PVC shrouds.

21.2.12 MICC CABLES & FIRE RATED CABLES

MICC CABLES




AEB 695-07/200828


MICC/PVC covered cables 600/1000 V grades Conforming to B.S 6207 Part 1,shall be used mainly for the substation wiring. Mineral insulated cables shallhave copper conductors with copper sheath and PVC oversheaths.

Neoprene sleeving and cold setting compound shall be used with pot seals for

normal applications.

Terminations shall comply with B.S.6081 Part 1. The temperature classificationof the seal shall be “Class 105” unless otherwise indicated or directed by theconsultant. Glands shall be Type “Y” and PVC shroud over glands shall beprovided when PVC covered cables are used. Before applying a shroud, all baremetal shall be wrapped with pressure sensitive adhesive PVC tape.

On three phase circuits, the sleeving shall carry distinction bands identifying thevarious phases, and for phase and neutral circuits the live or phase a red bandshall identify wire. For circuits involving 3 phases, the correct phase

identification colour bands shall be used, and the markers shall conform to B.S1710.

Cable shall be fixed to walls or cable tray by means of PVC covered copperclips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type as made by thecable manufacturer, or by special copper saddles for runs of large number ofcables.

The distance between fixing centers shall follow manufacturer'srecommendations and the completed installation shall present a neat,appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.

Cable rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form ofmechanical protection for approximately 450 mm. above floor level. This mayeither be a short length of metal channel (mainly cable tray).

Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensurethat pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried inthe structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and itsprotection channel have been covered.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal set-off shall be made in thecable run.

FIRE RATED CABLES

The Fire Rated Flexible cables conforming to BS 7629 shall be used as shown inthe drawing. Thermoplastic LSOH sheathed / insulated cables shall havestranded copper conductors with high performance damage resistant insulationand aluminium / polyester tape screen in contact with adequately sized tinnedannealed copper stranded circuit protective conductor.

The Fire rated flexible cables shall comply with the following fire performancestandards:




AEB 695-07/200829


Resistance to Fire : IEC331, BS6387 category CWZ Smoke Emission : IEC1034, BS7622 Acid Gas Emissions : IEC754, BS6425-1 <0.5% Acid gas Flame Retardant : IEC332-1,BS4066-1 Reduced Flame : IEC332-3, BS4066-3 Category C

Propagation

In addition the cables shall have excellent data/signal transmissioncharacteristics, manufactured under ISO9001Quality system and BASECcertified.

Cable shall be run in PVC conduits or cable tray / trunkings or run in openexecution in the ceiling voids by means of LSOH coated single hole metal fixingclips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type as made /recommended by the cable manufacturer or by special LSOH coated saddles forruns of large number of cables.

The distance between fixing centers shall follow manufacturer'srecommendations and the completed installation shall present a neat,appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed, whenthe cables are run in open execution.

Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensurethat pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried inthe structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and itsprotection channel have been covered.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal set-off shall be made in the

cable run.

21.2.13 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

General

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and accessories shall be used for lighting and smallpower circuit wiring unless otherwise specified. These shall be concealed in theslab, walls, on surface on false ceiling voids or floor screed. In areas where theconduits are exposed to the external weather, galvanised steel conduits andaccessories shall be used.

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and Accessories

The Plastic (PVC) conduits shall be of heavy gauge, rigid un-plasticised PVC, ofthe High impact grade. The impact strength shall be tested in accordance withB.S. 4607. No conduit smaller than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.

The Minimum wall thickness for the conduits shall be as follows:

20 mm dia. : 1.8 mm25 mm dia. : 1.9 mm




AEB 695-07/200830


32 mm dia : 2.5 mm38 mm dia. : 2.5 mm50 mm dia. : 2.5 mm

All PVC conduit accessories shall be from rigid un-plasticised PVC of the samemanufacturer as that of the conduits.

Where a solid fixed joint between conduit and accessory is required, use shall bemade of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduitsselected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plasticconduit is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion.

Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be usedin conjunction with the expansion couplers.

Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance withthe manufacturer‟s instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit/s. For

plastic conduits upto 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. Thebends shall be formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plasticconduits manufacturer.

For large sizes of conduit/s, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tubebefore inserting the spring to prevent shrinking. Pre-heating shall be done with ablow lamp or a blow flame, sufficient care shall be taken to avoid physicaldamages of the conduits (deformation). Any other method of bending can alsobe considered subject to the approval of the consultant.

Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. of 2.5 sq.mm PVCwires are crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in

situations where continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50 deg.C or where,for intermittent periods, the ambient temperature exceeds 70 deg.C; badlyformed plastic conduits or plastic conduits damaged in any way shall not bepermitted. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of plasticconduits exceeding 6 meter in length. The plastic conduit shall be free to slidewithin saddles if used on the surface above the false ceiling.

Special consideration should be given to fixing of all accessories in situationwhere the temperature fluctuates excessively. The plastic conduits shall be fixedat 1 meter intervals by spacer bar saddles; draw-in points shall be provided every8 meter straight runs or after not more than two right angle bends; where suchpoints are provided exclusively for draw-in purpose, they must comprise

inspection couplers.

The conduit system shall be laid concealed in the concrete slab and the walls. Allthe lighting conduits shall be laid at the roof level and dropping down to eachpoint and all the power circuit conduits shall be laid in the screed of the floorwherever possible or in the floor slab, based on the British Standard Code ofPractice.

The Electrical Contractor shall exercise care when installing plastic conduits toprevent interference with or from other services and shall keep at least 300 mmclear of the hot water pipes.




AEB 695-07/200831


No equipment weighing more than 12kg shall be suspended from the circularplastic boxes. For loads more than 12kg in weight purpose made supportingsystem shall be used with flexible cable and ceiling roses.

Where purpose made junction boxes are used to draw the wires, the covers of

these boxes shall be of the same finish as that of the switch / socket plates.Where enclosed tungsten luminaires are fixed directly to a PVC high impactcircular conduit box, steel insert clips must be used for fixing the luminaries onthe box.

Galvanized Steel Conduits and Accessories

Steel conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, solid drawn, galvanized and shallcomply with B.S. 4568 Part 1 and B.S. 31. Each length of the conduit shall beara stamp guaranteeing it to be as per the specifications. The use of conduits lessthan 20mm in diameter will not be permitted.

All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips,saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, locknuts and male andfemale brass bushes shall comply with B.S. 4568 Part 1 and B.S. 31. Table 2wherever applicable. All screwed couplers, screwed reducers, and locknuts onlyshall be used on surface work, Inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplingmust not be used.

Galvanized steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed ininspection positions where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall be150 x 150 x150 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fullyrecessed, they shall be provided with 14 SWG galvanized steel lids, overlapping

the boxes 6mm all, around.

General Methods of Installation

Conduits buried on concrete shall have 37 mm depth of cover over its entirelength; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth of cover over its entirelength. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete withgoose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed bymeans of corrugated steel saddles secured by hardened steel pins at 1200mmcenters. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the jointsbetween the beams unless otherwise instructed by the consultant.

In case “in-situ” applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequateprecautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protectionof all conduits and boxes during the construction operation.

All conduit outlets or other “in-situ” construction must be plugged with extremecare to prevent ingress of foreign matter and the conduit system from becomingblocked during the building construction. The additional costs resulting fromblockage or damage to conduits due to the negligence or lack of attendance.Female brass bushes shall be greased on to all free ends of the conduit.




AEB 695-07/200832


Conduit system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tightafter the installation.

Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed outuntil dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthingsystem. Separate earth shall be installed in all cases.

All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall befitted with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspectionboxes must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by theconsultant.

No more than two right angle bends or equivalent sets must be made in conduitruns between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must beinserted after each second conduit length.

Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the

section or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radiusof less than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must bemachine made.

The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smoothand free from burrs and other defects. The exposed GI conduits shall be paintedwith two coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.

21.2.14 CABLE TRUNKING & CABLE TRAYS

G. I. Trunking

Cable trunking shall be used where it is accessible and can replace numeroussub-circuit conduit runs.

A reputed Engineering company shall manufacture all trunking and fittings.

Sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical rising ducts, inthe positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and cables atdistribution boards etc. Cable trunking may be used if required in ceiling voidswhere otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur.

Cable trunking and fittings shall be in accordance with B.S 4678 and shall beeither Class 2 stoved black enamel (BE) or Class 3 galvanized (G) protected asdetailed in the following specifications and drawings. All the trunkings installedon the floors shall be stove enamelled.

All cable trunking shall consist of butting sections manufactured from Zinteccoated high-grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such asbends, tees, offsets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish.

Multi-way trunking shall be divided into the required number of compartments bymeans of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length of thetrunking. Each separator shall be at such a depth that when the trunking cover




AEB 695-07/200833


is fastened in position there is no gap between the edge of the separator and theinside face of the cover. Separate compartments shall be provided in all tees,angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the various services iseffected as detailed in the specifications and drawings.

All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners.

All angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners.

Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and trunking shall be joined togetherby means of internal fishplate connector or purpose made coupling piecesdepending on the design of the trunking. After joining, there shall be no gapvisible between sections of the trunking or between lengths of separators wherethese are used.

Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm. thick and attachedby means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4screws for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm. sq. and 8

nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking havingcross sectional areas in excess of 5700 mm. sq. each passing through clearanceholes, shame proof washers and buts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be connected by tinned copper links with split soldering washers underthe nuts to provide electrical continuity across the joints.

The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copperstraps shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, teesetc.

All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixedat intervals not greater than 1.2M.

The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material orcover secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom headscrews spaced not greater than 450 mm. Where trunking terminates in anypiece or an apparatus, a proper-flanged coupling piece shall be used, securelybolted to the trunking and to the piece of apparatus.

Solid end stops shall be purpose made steel sheet terminal piece. In case oftrunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut edges aretrue and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will not bepermitted, under no circumstance neither will gaps be accepted.

Where the trunking passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shallbe fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends approx. 50 mm.beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.

The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means ofsuitable clips fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of trunking, separatecable clips being provided for each compartment of the trunking.

Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment andconnected to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase powercircuits, they shall be distinguished by separating the cables with insulated taping




AEB 695-07/200834


at intervals of 1.20 meters together with an approved means of identificationsleeve adjacent to each taping that clearly denotes the circuit type andreference.

The trunking shall also be bonded to each piece of apparatus to which it isdirectly connected by means of copper bonding strips of 13 mm x 2 mm. and

also at each joint and bend.

All connections between trunking and/or busbar chambers to each item ofswitch, switch fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and withoutintermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom plates of theitems being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is tobe cut to accommodate with cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with similarslot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A laminatedpaxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and trunkingand busbar chamber with a slot 6 mm. smaller all around than the slot cut in the

metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.

All covers shall be easily removable and the trunking shall be properly spacedaway from any surface which may prevent this.

Dimensions obtained from site shall determine shape of purpose-made pieces oftrunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed . Flexible expansion joints shallbe provided in trunking runs as necessary.

Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity for the installation of any futurecables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor ofthe fully loaded trunking is provided in accordance with IEE regulations.

Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilingswherever possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in ahorizontal plane with the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and allconduits connected to the top and sides of the assembly.

The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structureconcrete ceiling slab soffit.

Conduits used to complete the final section of each circuit from the generaltrunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated shallemanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and

rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall be taken then throughthe structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the variouslighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.

For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall beused with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables beinginstalled on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In bothcases, cables shall be terminated with glands of appropriate size.




AEB 695-07/200835


The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a workmanship like manner so thatit presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access ismaintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.

Undefloor Trunking

The trunking shall be 3 compartment type including junction boxes and 3 wayoutlet boxes for telephone, socket outlet (small power) and computer terminalsas shown on the tender drawings.

All the under floor trunkings and under floor service outlet boxes used for theinstallation shall be pre-galvanized and conform to BSEN 10143 of 1993(formerly BS 2989).

The junction boxes, outlet boxes offset units, intersections shall be manufacturedof Zinc Alloy die cast and base frame shall be moulded in one piece. Thetrunkings shall be divided into three equal compartments. The trunking shall be

held in position using fixing clips. Trunking lengths shall be supplied with onepair of connectors and one earth continuity link.

The intersections shall be supplied with a flyover unit and cover to give acomplete unit ready for installation into an in-cavity trunking system. Allaccessories, compartments and connection shall be of the same manufacturer.Locally made attachment units will not be accepted.

Outlet boxes shall be adjustable height type and allowance shall be made forcarpet thickness in order to have final even level flooring. The outlet box shallaccommodate one twin socket outlet, one telephone outlet and one computeroutlet. The conversion packs shall be allowed for in the Tender price and the

contractor is to supply and install all the terminal outlets, including the computeroutlets at the model and type as requested by the Consultant.

The outlet box frame shall be finished with flanged ends to allow insertion ofcarpet over it.

The Main contractor shall do the cement screed under, above and around thesystem.

Additional spare conduits, though not indicated on the drawings, may berequested to be drawn from the junction boxes to the walls at the time ofinstallation for additional outlets. The contractor is to allow for such additions in

his tender price since no V.O will be entertained later.

Cable Trays

The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with returnflanges manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel. Aluzinkis a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting ofSilicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc(43.4%) sageguarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215.




AEB 695-07/200836


Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts andspring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screwsand nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occuron the part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.

The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with spacebehind to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The bracketsshall be spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shallensure that overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for allcable trays necessary to be fixed at the terrace or in the false ceiling.

The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowdingand shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the presentrequirements. Cables shall be run single; stacking will not be permitted.

Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flangeoutwards or downwards respectively to suit and shall be fixed with an approvedfixing with spacing and washers such that the tray is at least 25 mm. from thesurface of the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between eachsection of cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to thenearest earth continuity conductor.

Each length of tray shall be securely bolted to an adjacent length with sufficientoverlap to prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bend of not less than 450 mm.shall be used.

The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant

prior to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from thestructure of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shallbe approved by the Consultant before installation.

Manufacturer should confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable traysagainst any corrosion in Qatar climatic conditions.

Wherever the tee or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factorymade. No cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the sameshall be properly painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviationfrom the straight shall, if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Wherepurpose made bends cannot be used, the tray may be cut and the bends

fabricated on site.

All the supports shall be fabricated out of galvanized angle iron or uni-strutchannels. If not, the M.S. supports shall be painted with two coats of red oxideand two coats of lacquered paint of approved colour.

21.2.15 ELECTRICAL DUCTS

PVC Pipe ducts shall be installed in accordance with the configuration andmethods detailed in QGEWC (Electricity) standard drawing SED 884 for roadcrossings and elsewhere as described on the drawings.




AEB 695-07/200837


PVC pipe duct continuous pathway systems shall be installed in accordance withQatar National Telephone Service (QNTS) publication, with which the contractoris deemed to be familiar.

Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per

QGEWC regulations & Q-Tel standards and supplied by an approvedmanufacturer.

Material - High Impact Resistant PVCInternal Diameter - 150mm Dia., 100mm Dia., 75mm Dia.,

50mm Dia., as specifiedMinimum Wall thickness - 3.6mm for 150mm Dia.,

- 2.4mm for 100mm Dia.,- 2.4mm for 75mm Dia.,- 2.4mm for 50mm Dia.,

For Telephone Cables - 90mm Dia., Ducts as per Q-Tel

Standards.

21.2.16 LIGHT FIXTURES

The contractor shall include in his costs for supply, erection, and connection ofall specified light fittings complete with suitable lamps in positions specified,unless otherwise directed.

No lighting fittings shall be purchased until authorization has been received, inwriting from the Consultant. This authorization shall be sought by the Contractorin good time in order to allow the programme of works to continue unaffected.

All light fittings shall be of types specified or similar and approved. Noalternative light fitting will be considered unless the contractor in writing from theConsultant receives permission.

All fluorescent fittings shall be complete low loss epoxy filled ballasts with switchstart control gear and power factor correction condensers to give a minimumpower factor of 0.9 lagging and control gear noise level shall be limited to 24 dB.

The contractor shall provide and fix plain pendants. Each pendant shallcomprise of ceiling rose, a suitable length of flexible cord in relation to themounting height of the fitting and B.S. lamp holder.

Lamp holders incorporated in tungsten luminaries shall comply with B.S. 5042Part 1 in the case of bayonet cap holders and with B.S. 5042 Part 2 where screwtype lamp caps are employed. Lamp holders incorporated in fluorescentluminaries shall comply with B.S. 5042 Part 4.

Ceiling roses shall comply with B.S 67 and be manufactured from either rigidPVC or bakelite. Wiring from the ceiling rose to the lamp holder shall be carriedout using heat resistant flexible cord of minimum size 1.0 mm. sq. The insulatedheat resistant flexible cord may be butyl rubber, EP rubber, silicon rubber orglass fibre. A plug and socket type ceiling rose shall be provided for all recessedluminaries, located within each reach of the aperture provided for the luminaries.




AEB 695-07/200838


The light fitting shall not be considered complete without the lamps of specifiedwattage.

The connections between the circuit wiring and fitting shall be effected by meansof fixed nylon connector terminal block mounted in the lighting outlet conduit box

or ceiling rose above the false ceiling. All metal work shall be bonded to earth.

Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of theloop-in type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position.Extension rings shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flushwith the underside of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall be providedbetween the fittings and conduit box to mask the joints as deemed necessary bythe Consultant.

Light fittings designed for mounting on a flush ceiling shall be mounted on asurface outlet box. The contractor shall supply and install a suitable metal

support for each fitting.

In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduitand light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceilingand suitable two independent fixings shall be provided and installed by the contractor to carry the weight of the fittings.

All lighting fixtures are to be suspended as required by QGEWC regulations.Ensure that the light fittings are adequately ventilated and where appropriate,suitable spacers hall be installed to give a minimum clearance of 6 mm betweenthe fitting and the finished ceiling.

All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as perthis contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150watts shall be of screwed cap-type. The lamps shall be supplied complete withend caps suitable for the fitting to which it is to be attached. The lamps shall berated for 240 volts. Unless otherwise specified, lamps shall be coiled coilconforming to B.S. 161, 555, 1853.

Fluorescent tubes shall be day light type. Each and every fluorescent light fittingshall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors.

All lighting luminaries shall comply with B.S. 4533 and 5225 and fitted with bi-pinand bayonet end caps as necessary. All control gear associated with fluorescent

fittings shall comply with B.S. 2818 and 4017 and shall be of the switch starttype. Final connections to luminaires shall be by 3 core heat resisting flexiblecables connected as previously described.

The contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the threephase distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect or error.

With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial types of lightfittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where lightfittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal supports.




AEB 695-07/200839


External Lighting

The contractor shall supply and install all necessary materials and equipment toprovide façade, tree and external pathways lighting as shown on the drawings.

All excavation, the Building Contractor shall carry out provision of conduitstogether with the backfilling of trenches, unless other wise stated. The electricalcontractor shall include for the necessary liaison with the civil contractor in theinstruction for this work. Before excavations are backfilled the Consultant shallbe notified in writing that the cable installation is complete in order that aninspection may be made of the cable installation.

All cables serving the luminaries shall loop in and out of the fittings and jointboxes. No other tee joints will be permitted.

An efficient earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of theluminaries and the wire armouring of the cables.

All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise detailed,shall be of PVC/SWA and PVC sheathed type supplied and installed inaccordance with the relevant clauses of the particular specification.




AEB 695-07/200840


21.2.17 WIRING ACCESSORIES

i. Switches

The switches shall be single pole type of 240 V grade, 10 A X rated. No deratingof the switches should required in case of use for Fluorescent or inductive loads.These shall be of robust construction to provide long life of operation. All thecover plates, single pole switches, grid mounted systems and boxes shallconform to BS 3676 and BSEN 60669 –1 and shall operate on downward modeonly. Wherever more than one switch is shown on the drawings, they shall bemulti-gang and where they are wired with different phases, phase barriers shallbe used with the warning label. Switch terminals should be preferably screw lesstype to avoid any loose contacts.

ii. Switched Socket Outlets

The socket outlets shall be of switched socket combination type of 13 A rating.These shall be 3 pin, 240 volts with shutters conforming to B.S. 1363. Twinsocket outlets shall be used wherever two sockets are shown together unlessotherwise mentioned.

All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed to terminate direct into outlet anda flying lead shall be installed between outlet and outlet box. The switchedsocket outlets exposed to external environmental conditions shall be weatherproof in galvanized ceiling. The switched socket outlets shall be provided withindicating lamp to indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructedby the Consultant. All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuitsunless otherwise specified.

iii. Flex Outlets

The flex outlets shall be installed near the equipment like air conditioners, waterheaters and exhaust fans. These exhaust fan outlets shall be of suitable ratinghaving three-way terminal blocks and brass screws for direct connection offlexible heat resistant cables. They shall be of robust construction, of approvedfinish and of very high quality. All flex outlets other than the ones for exhaustfans shall conform to BS 5733.

iv. Ceiling Rose

Ceiling roses shall be of approved manufacture and be of ivory finish conformingto BS 67. All ceiling roses shall be fitted with integral enclosure and earthingplate or connection to comply with QGEWC regulations and shall be fitted with abreak joint ring where used on recessed conduit boxes.

v. Double Pole Switch




AEB 695-07/200841


The switches for window A.C s. water heaters, hand dryer‟s units etc., shall bedouble pole, 20 or 30 A rating based on the load current. The switches shallhave indicating lamps and the covers shall be as stated above. All DP switchesshall conform to BS 3676.

vi. Time Switches and Contactors

The switches shall be photo-resistor type mounted remote from the contactor atthe place approved by Client. These photo-resistors shall be equipped with luxadjustment to operate the switch at the desired light level.The electro-mechanical time switch shall be provided. The time switch shall besuitable for solar time adjustment throughout the year. It shall have 12 hoursreserve winding so that the power failure up to 12 hours will not change theoperating time of the time switch.

The contactor shall be of rating indicated on the drawings and shall be 240 volts50 Hz, 1 phase A.C. coil. It shall conform to relevant British Standard.

The contactor shall also provide an override switch to switch on and switch offthe lights in the event time fails to operate.

21.2.18 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

General Description

The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a fire alarm system(analogue addressable) comprising of a main fire alarm control panel, repeater

panel, detectors, alarms, wiring ... etc.

The main, fire alarm panel and system components shall be interconnectedusing a multiplex data transmission cable. The main panel, slave and repeatersshall be self contained and capable of Stand - Alone Operation.

The fire alarm equipment and installation shall comply with the followingStandards: -

CDD Civil Defence DepartmentBS 5445 Components of automatic fire detection systemsBS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems in buildings NFPA

System of Operation

Operation of an analogue addressable detector or break glass call point shallsignal to the main panel to indicate the loop, detector. etc. in which the signalwas originated, an LED display shall be provided in the main panel.

Upon receipt of an alarm signal, the sounders through the system shall soundfor 5 seconds in the loop zone where the call originated shall soundcontinuously. In other loops the processor shall be programmable so that for




AEB 695-07/200842


each alarm signal the sounder shall remain silent (after the first 5 second pulse)or shall sound intermittently one second on five seconds off. The alarm signalshall alert the Project‟s Staff first to check and respond properly, then in case ofa true alarm it should go general.

Provision shall be made at the main panel to silence the alarms but the visual

indication shall remain until the system is reset. A further call shall not beinhabited whilst the sounders have been silenced.

Provision shall also be provided at the main panel to operate the alarm soundersin any loop to indicate that the area should be evacuated.

In the event of an alarm call output signals shall be provided to release theautomatic doors closers, unlock fire escape exit doors, send a signal to shutdown the A/C and ventilation system through the BMS system (if applicable)…... etc.

In addition operation of an analogue addressable detector in a lift motor roomshall provide a signal to the particular lift or lifts associated with the motor roomand dispatch the car to the ground floor.

The repeater panels (if applicable) shall incorporate a LED display and shallindicate for each loop on the system the name of the loop where an alarm callhas originated.

Alarm calls shall be relayed to the Local Civil Defence Department by an autodial machine with recorded message via a dedicated telephone line.

Fire alarm system shall be interfaced and connected to the BMS (if applicable).

System of Wiring

Fire alarm wiring shall be completely segregated from any other system.

All cables associated with the fire alarm installation shall be fire retardant coppercables with a red PVC oversheath. Joints in cables shall be made only ataccessories unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer when the joint box shallbe detailed on record drawings.

All wiring shall be fire retardant/resistant and comply with BS. Sensing loopswires shall not be less than 1.5mm2 for detectors and 2.5 mm2 for alarm loops.

Equipment shall all be connected on a two wire fully maintained closed circuit.Fire alarm cables shall be installed in pvc conduits concealed in the buildingfabric except in plant rooms and service where a surface installation shall beprovided.

Repeater Panels

Repeater panels shall be of analogue addressable type.




AEB 695-07/200843


Repeater panels shall each have the number of loops indicated plus two spareand shall incorporate:-

- Fault indicators and power on indicator- Loop indicator lights each with two LED's- Lamp test button

- Switches- Supervising buzzer for when voice alarms have been silenced- Output signals- Power supply and battery- A module for indication of other repeater alarms.

- A 3 position key switch to provide "Evaluation signal" 'normal' and„reset‟. The key shall only be removable in the ' normal' position.

The equipment shall be mounted in a single surface mounted sheet metallic boxwith epoxy powder finish to house the above and the interface equipment. The

panels shall comply with EMC requirements (electromagnetic compatibility).

The battery shall be heavy duty higher performance with sufficient capacity tomaintain the system for 24 hours followed by an alarm condition for 30 minutes.It shall be nickel cadmium or sealed lead calcium acid with a life guarantee for10 years.

The charger shall be the static type, compatible with the battery and capable offully recharging the battery within 24 hours whilst maintaining the system load.The charger shall incorporate semi-conductor monitoring of the battery voltageand a momentary test switch and voltmeter.

Main Control Panel (MFACP)

The main control panel shall be an analogue addressable type panel.

The panel shall be flush mounted in a polycarbonate or sheet metallic box withepoxy powder finish. The panel shall comply with EMC requirements(electromagnetic compatibility).Digital codes shall be incorporated to allow on site reprogramming and isolationof inputs and outputs. All programming shall be possible on site.

The panel shall be complete with a battery and charger unit. SLA freemaintenance for 48 hour in normal operation and 1 hour in general alarm.

The panel and associated equipment shall have capacity for all alarm and faultsignals required in the Contract and shall be capable of future upgrading toserve a 15% extension of the project.

MFACP shall contain a microprocessor-based central processing unit (CPU). Itshall communicate with & control the following types of equipment used to makeup the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, transponders, local&remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators, alarm system, and othersystem controlled devices.




AEB 695-07/200844


MFACP shall perform the following functions: -

1. Supervise and monitor all intelligent/addressable detectors and monitormodules connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarmconditions.

2. Supervise all initiating singalling and notification circuits throughout thefacility by way of connection to transponders.

3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarmcondition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices asprogrammed.

4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm,condition on operator‟s terminal, panel display, and annunciators.

Operation

1. MFACP shall include a full featured operator interface control andannunciation panel, which shall include a liquid crystal display (LCD),individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numerickeypad for field programming.

2. All programming or editing of the existing programming in the systemshall be achieved without special equipment or interrupting the alarmmonitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.

3. The system shall include alarm-annunciating system utilizing distributed

sounders such that loss of operation by the MFACP will not result in theloss of alarm signal throughout the project.

4. MFACP shall be capable of providing the following features:-

Block acknowledge for trouble conditionsRate charger controlControl by-time (delay, pulse, time of day, etc.) Automatic Day/Night sensitivity adjust (high/low)Device blink control (turn of detector LED strobe)Environmental drift compensation (selectable ON or OFF)Smoke detector pre-alarm indication at control panel.

Smoke detector sensitivity testSystem status reports Alarm verification, by device, with tallyMultiple printer interfaceMultiple CRT display interfaceNon-fire alarm module reporting Automatic detector testProgrammable trouble reminderUpload/download system database to PC computerSmoke detector maintenance alertSecurity monitor point




AEB 695-07/200845


Alpha-numeric pager interfaceOn-line or off-line programming

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

1. MFACP shall include a central processing unit. The CPU shall comminute

with, monitor, and control all other modules within the control panel.Removal, disconnection or failure of any control panel module shall bedetected and reported to the system display by the CPU.

2. The CPU shall contain and execute all control-by- event interlock forspecific local and network action to be taken if an alarm condition isdetected by the system. Control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if systemprimary and secondary power failure occurs.

3. The central processing unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time

annotation of all system displays. The time-of-day and date shall not lostif system primary and secondary power supplies fail.

Break Glass Contacts

Break-glass contacts unit shall be analogue addressable type and shall be flushmounted. It shall have a plastic coated glass cover, which can be broken withoutthe use of a hammer and incorporate a key operated test facility.

Fire Alarm Detectors

All detectors shall be of analogue addressable type suitable for mounting to a

common back base and connected to a two-wire circuit.

Heat detectors shall generally be designed to operation on "rate of rise" and a

fixed temperature 57C. Where heat detectors are installed in kitchens, plantspaces etc., where rapid temperature changes may occur they shall be fixed

temperature type set for 85C. Rate-of rise shall operate between temperature

rise 8.25C – 13.5C.

Smoke detectors shall be photo-optical type. They shall incorporate green LED'sto indicate that the unit is operational. Smoke and heat detectors shallincorporate red LED's to indicate when the unit is in "alarm" state.

Where detectors are located in inaccessible positions, a remote indicator lightshall be provided to illuminate when the unit is in an alarm condition. This shallbe engraved (Fire detector in.).

All programming and sitting should be done from the FACP or the base ofdetector.

All fire alarm detectors shall have built in short circuit isolator.




AEB 695-07/200846


All required interface modules shall be provided for mech. Duct smokedetectors, transfer, switches, lifts …etc.

Smoke Beam Detectors (Not Applicable)

Beam detectors (analogue addressable) provided to operate at high ceilingareas shall comprise a pulsed infra-red light source and a matching receiver unitincorporating a time delay feature (2-5 seconds).

The units shall be positioned to provide maximum protection of the area and tobe agreed on with the Engineer.

Each detector shall be suitable for use on 2 wire alarm circuits.

Alarm Unit

a. Sounders/Bells

Alarm sounders shall be connected through an analogue addressablemodular and mounted directly over a flush conduit box at 500 mm. belowceiling level and clearly labeled "Fire Alarm".

Sounders shall be the electronic type with an output of approximately 103dB(A) with a distinctive tone. Sounders for installation outdoors shall beweatherproof. Sounders shall have different selectable toner.

b. Buzzers with visual alarm with decorative shape for flats.

Buzzers with 15 cd visual alarm shall be provided for specific areas.

c. Strobe light shall be provided from mech. Rooms, gym. hall.

Lamp Indicators

In areas where alarm sounders would be disruptive and in plant rooms,generator house etc. where noise would prevent the sound being heard lampindicators shall be provided.

These shall comprise Xenon flashing indicator housed within a red lens rated atand 8 watts in plant rooms.

Door Hold Units (if Applicable)

Door hold units shall be 24 V.D.C. fail safe type and shall be integral with thefloor spring of the door.

Final electrical connections shall be made using heat resisting flexible cablefrom a flex outlet plate located as close as practical to the door-loaded unit.




AEB 695-07/200847


A door release push button connected in series with the door release coil shallbe provided adjacent to each door or pair of doors fitted with door hold units.The button shall be mounted at 1350 mm A.F.F.L. and engraved "Door Close".

A separate 24 V.D.C. power supply shall be provided to serve the door holdunits and the release signals shall be provided via relays operated from the fire

alarm system.

Door release Unit (if Applicable)

Where doors are normally kept locked for security purposes provision shall bemade for these to be released when a fire alarm signal is raised. The releasecircuits shall be related to the loop and adjacent loops in which an alarmoriginates.

The release mechanism shall comprise a brass keep fitted into the doorframeand related to the door lock. Upon signal from the fire alarm system, a solenoid

shall release the lock allowing the door to open.

Fireman Telephone

Two-way voice communication Fire Telephone system shall be installed asshown in the respective drawings. The system shall comprise of a CentralExchange, Operator Panel and number of Fire Phone Handset Outstationsdistributed as shown.

2 conductors shall discretely wire each Outstation to the Central Exchange asradial circuit. The system shall be entirely non-blocking and display the status ofall fire phone outstations.

Response from the Outstations shall be sited on the Operators Panel and shallbe latched onto the memory of the system immediately. The Central Exchangeand Operating Panel shall have built-in facility for transferring the selectedOutstation to the building‟s public address and voice communication system loudspeakers.

Operator Panel

The Operator Panel shall be housed in a extruded Aluminium enclosure, finishedin red epoxy painting (red to ral 3020), and shall have a capacity of 80 outstationzones. Fire phone handset and momentary push button corresponding to eachFir e Telephone outstation shall be integral to the Operator‟s Panel. A pair ofLED‟s corresponding to each Fire Telephone shall be provided to indicate“Outstation Call in” and “Outstation Circuit Trouble”.

Momentary Push button station shall facilitate:

1 Initiation of audible alert to selected Fire Phone Outstations.2 Initiation of audible alert to all Fire Phone Outstations.3 Testing of Lights and Sounders.4 Acknowledge fault sounder push button.




AEB 695-07/200848


5 Identify System healthy, System Trouble, A.C Supply healthy and DCcharger healthy, through visual display LED indications.

the Power supply to the Central Exchange and Operator‟s Panel shall be 240 V, A.C. 50Hz, and the system shall operate on transmission audio frequency of 300Hz, and the signaling principle shall be loop disconnect.

Fire Phone Stations

The Outstations shall be housed in a surface mounted Mild steel enclosure with220º open able door with magnetic catch. The enclosure shall be complete withsounder and termination chamber behind tamper proof fixing plates. Outstationshall be fixed in each floor at the fire escape staircase.

Operating and Maintenance Manuals

Upon practical completion of the Works, the Contractor shall furnish to the

Employer Four copies of a Maintenance Manual relating to equipment andplant forming the Works.

The Manual shall be loose-leaf type International A4 size with stiff covers. Itmay be in several volumes and must be subdivided into sections, each sectioncovering one engineering service system. It shall have ready means of referenceand a detailed index.

The manual shall contain full operating and maintenance instructions for eachitem of equipment, plant and apparatus set out in a form dealing systematicallywith each system. It shall include as may be applicable to the Works thefollowing and any other items listed in the text of the Specification herein after:

a. System description.b. Switch operation.c. Procedure for Fault Finding.d. Emergency Procedures.e. Maintenance and Servicing Periods and Procedures.f. Schematic and Wiring Diagrams of Apparatus.g. Record Drawings, true to scale, reduced to International A-4 size.h. List of Primary and Secondary Spares.

The manual is to be specially prepared for the Works, and Manufacturers'standard descriptive literature and plant operating instruction cards will not beaccepted for inclusion unless exceptionally approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall, however, affix such cards, if suitable, adjacent to plant andapparatus. One spare seat of all such cards shall be furnished to the Employer.

Operation, spare-parts, general instructions and safety instructions etc. manualsas well as all technical catalogues, wiring diagrams, drawings and sketches etc.to be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer for approval.




AEB 695-07/200849


Testing and commissioning

The contractor shall perform all tests required by international standards, thelocal regulations and manufacturer's recommendations.

Test on insulation and continuity as mentioned in the above rules andregulations shall be carried out by the Contractor on the completed installation,as well as all running tests for insulation.

The expenses for the above tests shall be included in the tender.

All tests must be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or such otherperson appointed for this purpose, but the Contractor alone will be responsibleto the authorities as to the installations' compliance with rules and regulations.

The Contractor shall provide precise instruments and all labor for testing. Testresults shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of the test, and the

Contractor shall issue the Certificate upon completion, as required under theabove-referred regulations.

Any defects, faults or omissions of the installations made apparent by such testshall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense.

Power supplies needed for all tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

Test certificate including factory test procedure for all equipment shall besubmitted to the Engineer afterwards.

Partial and spot tests on Site shall be carried out during the execution of the

Works according to the Engineer's recommendations. In addition the contractorshall perform his own partial and final tests.

Final tests should be carried out in the presence of the Engineer, upon thecompletion of the works. The Contractor must submit to the Engineer a detailedtest procedure and time schedule for the test.

The contractor shall provided and establish a regular testing method andprocedure. The contractor shall provide training for employees of the client,which shall cover all aspects of the system including but not limited to using,running, commissioning, and maintenance. etc.

21.2.19 CENTRAL BATTERY / EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed &installed to meet the local fire department requirements & the respective EN &BS standards and regulations applicable on the project. The product shall bearCE certification for electromagnetic compatibility. The product shall have abinding agency agreement with a local company in Qatar and the product shallhave installation references in Qatar and shall have installations in the MiddleEast for at least 5 years. Spares/ Engineering support shall be constantlyavailable for the product both during installation/ commissioning as well as




AEB 695-07/200850


operation period. Local Fire department approval shall be available for theproduct.

Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,Illuminate the escape routes.Indicate the escape route direction clearly

Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life savingequipment on the premises are illuminated.Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardousprocess

Each emergency supply panel shall be used for supply, automatic testing &monitoring of maximum 20 Nos. Escape route, EXIT & Safety on each circuit.Panels should be distributed on the building based on Security Zone or Typical Areas etc., to minimize wiring. Number of panels shall be as per the layout/riserdrawings. The system shall be fully addressable type with individual light

monitoring facility.

Input Voltage: 240V ACOutput Mains: 240V ACOutput Emergency: 220V DCBattery back up required for Duration of Three Hours under emergencyoperation, with minimum of 75 -100% light output on connected fittings.

Mechanical Construction

The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP21 withremovable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the

batteries. The electronics section shall have IP21 sheet steel enclosure withtransparent polycarbonate window. Substation panels shall be with IP54 degreeof protection and shall draw their battery supplies from the central battery panels.

The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cableentries from top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. Allincoming cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fusedterminals as per ENVDE0100. All outgoing luminaries circuits shall be connecteddirect to relevant components via plug-in type terminals 2.5 sq. mm.

Electrical Construction

Changeover Module

The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in-type encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeovermodules. Each module is capable of switching two separate circuits withmaximum load of 3 Amps or 20 Nos. light fixtures connected to it. Emergency &Exit lights will be connected to each circuit, thereby allowing connection ofluminaries of all switching modes, namely Maintained, Non-maintained andSwitched Maintained in the same circuit. All the changeover modules will beplug-in type and are no load and short circuit protected with independent fuses




AEB 695-07/200851


for mains and battery supply and will have LED type status indication foroperation & failure.

Battery

Each panel will have maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries with 10 yearsservice life at 250C and capable of supporting the connected load for 3 hours.The central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximumroom temperature of25

0C. The room shall be air-conditioned using a re-circulation air-conditioning

system without any special battery room ventilation requirement. Where thespace required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same instandard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, onpurpose built support stand / enclosure.

Charger

Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, microprocessorcontrolled module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IUcharacteristics. Automatic boost charging facility shall be built in to the systemdepending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging &supervising method via battery monitoring at intervals of 5 minutes or less forfailure indication of battery circuit as well as battery charger. The charger shallbe designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.

Charger shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuitmonitoring. It shall be provided with LED indications for,- Operation- Charger On

- Booster On- Mains Operation- Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%- Charging Failure- Insulation fault

Charger shall have potential free indicator contacts for,- Charging failure- Fast charge- Insulation fault

Charger shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. It shallinclude plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains & batteryaccessible via the front plate of the charger

Control Module

Each panel will have modular plug in type freely programmable control modulewith 4x20 character contrast controlled liquid crystal display, touch pad keys forprogramming and monitoring of the panel & constant memory back up with twoyears logbook facility. It should have separate buttons for Test, Function Testand Battery duration test. Additionally three freely programmable buttons should




AEB 695-07/200852


be provided to conduct functions as per user‟s priority. Each control module shallbe programmable as master / slave to access status of the other panels installedon site.

The control module should have the following features,Monitor & control all test cycles & functions

Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminariesDisplay & program the status of each circuitConduct an Earth Leakage test on each circuit.Luminaries‟ failure will be displayed with text location Communicate and program the function of addressable electronic ballast onevery slave luminaries.Programming for the potential free contacts for BMS operation.Programming and status of the Sub circuit monitoring inputs and the associatedluminaries.

Control Module also displays battery voltage level, withdrawn battery current in

test or emergency modes, charge failures, interrupted battery charge circuit,luminaries failure with address with text location, sub circuit or sub distributionboard supply failure with address & text location, function test, battery test, earthleakage failure with respect to circuit. Both tests can be manually programmed.The control module has three LED‟s for status indication of mains supplyON/OFF, luminaries or unit failure & battery supply.

Failure recognition for each individual safety / EXIT light in conjunction withproprietary electronic ballast including two wire monitoring module withoutadditional data line.

Programming of the control module will be possible through a smart card & all

the information including the logbook shall be stored on smart card, which isreadable on PC directly.

An electronically regulated monitoring loop output is included to monitor themains failure at distribution/sub-distribution board. Sub circuit monitoring shall becarried out from the panel in such a way that emergency lights‟ pertaining tospecific areas where power has failed will only be energized.

Central monitoring shall be carried through an Open Protocol network. Eachcentral battery/ substation panel shall be fitted with a terminal to facilitatecommunication to the BMS system / Central monitoring unit via an open protocolto provide the complete panel status.

Automatic & Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility

An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanentcyclic charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less withdaily/weekly function test of the complete load supplied from the battery,charger, wiring, luminaries, registration and logging of tests and results. Amanually operated test feature shall also be provided in addition to theautomatically operated testing feature. The monitoring system and data transfershall be carried out based on a current multiplexed system in DC mode.




AEB 695-07/200853


Central Monitoring Facility

When not centrally monitored through a BMS system, a separate centralmonitoring computer shall be provided for the emergency lighting system. Thecentral monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software,monitoring & programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBMcompatible PC with monitor, Pentium generation processor, keyboard, mouseand a printer. The unit shall operate with latest visualization software to givedetailed address & information of all luminaries connected to system. Theprogram shall be user friendly with visually clear fault indication screens on themonitor.

The CG Vision should have the following features,Monitor & control all test cycles & functionsIndicate every status of the system & the connected luminariesDisplay the status of each circuit

Luminaire status & failure information will be displayed with text locationLog the events on the system in a separate window to facilitate easy access.

Sub circuit Monitoring/ Switching Interface

Exit lights shall remain in Maintained mode of operation. Dedicated luminariesused for emergency operation shall remain in Non-Maintained mode ofoperation. Sub circuit monitoring shall be carried out for Non-Maintained lightsusing 24V-monitoring loop in the panel wired to phase monitoring relays in therelevant Lighting DB‟s, all up to the approval of the Engineer. Where Mains lightsin Switched Maintained mode is used for Em. Operation, the switching shall beco-ordinated using fully encapsulated switching interface modules such that the

same switch is used for switching Mains and E. Lights. A detailed schematicshall be presented for approval of the Engineer.

EMERGENCY PACK

The emergency pack for lighting shall consist of individual power packs installedwithin the light fittings, as shown on the tender drawings. The light fittings to beprovided with these power packs have been indicated with a symbol. Thesepower packs shall consist of converter/inverter with nickel-cadmium battery toprovide 3 hours operation for one of the lamps in these fittings.

The design of the unit shall be such that it can be fitted easily into all types offittings including batten luminaries. The unit shall have the capability ofsustaining high temperature so that it can be accommodated into the fittings withhigh internal temperature. However, if the internal temperature of the fittingexceeds 50 deg. C, then the provision of mounting it in remote location shall bemade. In case of remote mounting, a purpose made remote box shall beprovided.




AEB 695-07/200854


Charger system shall have solid state constant current with full recharge time of24 hours. The inverter shall be high frequency transistor oscillator, producingsine wave output.

There shall be red light emitting diode type charge indicator and an internalcontrol circuit to prevent the battery from deep discharge. The circuitry shall

have two live supplies, one switched and one unswitched. Failure of unswitchedsupply shall operate the change over circuit.

The system shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 ph, 50 Hz., A.C system.

21.2.20 VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

20.1. System OutlineThe system shall be provided, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned.

The system shall cover all areas, as shown on drawings.Terminology for characteristics and measurement techniques of Sound System

Equipment shall be in accordance with BS 6840 (IEC 268).The system shall provide background music broadcast to all areas, shown ondrawings.

20.2. PerformanceMusic reproduction shall be of good quality and natural sounding.The system shall be free from audible distortion, hum & noise. All switching shallbe inaudible.The system shall be able to produce overall average sound levels 15dB(A) aboveambient noise levels but not exceeding 95dB(A).The sound levels shall be measured at 1.5m above floor level (1m above floor level)in all normally-accessible areas, using a sound level meter complying with BS EN

60651 (IEC 651) Type 1 or 2, set to 'S' (slow) response and calibrated immediatelybefore the measurements.

20.3. Applications

Radio Tuner

A rack mounted tuner shall be provided. The tuner shall provide for-set selection of16 FM stations to program individually in the frequency range of 87.5~108.0MHz. Automatically and manual station searching mode. LCD- and LED display. The tunershall provide the following minimum performance:

1. Input sensitivity : 1.5 V2. THD : 0.5 %3. IF Bandwidth : 250 KHz4. Antenna Input : 755. Output Signal : 0-500 m V Adjustable6. Power supply : 24 VDC, 100 Ma7. Signal to noise (S/N) : 60 dB8. I.F. rejection : 60dB9. Total harmonic distortion : 1% @ 1kHz




AEB 695-07/200855


Double deck cassette recorder/ player

Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission audio recording facilities each unitincludes double –cassette, auto-reverse cassette player/recorder as the followingspecifications:

-Contains two separate auto-reverse cassette players/automatically changes from one

cassette player to other , with built-in monitor loudspeaker with volume control.

- Suitable for table –top or 19” rack mounting with level-limiting circuit, complies with

international regulations.

- Mains Supply: 240V,50Hz.

-Outputs:

Headphone output:

Signal:3V.

impedance:68 ohm.

Audio output:

Signal :1V±1dB

Impedance:<200 ohm

Cassette Unit:

Tape speed:4.75 cm/s

WOW and flutter:0.35%

Frequency response:100Hz to 10 kHz (±4dB)

Signal to Noise

ratio at 40 KHz: 40dB.

Cassette Head Cleaner A non-abrasive cassette unit head cleaning cassette shall be obtained. Instructionsfor cleaning of cassette units shall be included within the system manual.

Compact Disc Player

A rack mounted compact disc (CD) player shall be provided.The CD player shall provide the following minimum facilities:(a) one-control load and play(b) Continuous repeat of a pre-programmed track selection(c) Latching pause control(d) Visible display of track number and of total playing time on the inserted disc.

The CD player shall include a cartridge for pre-loading of 5 or 6 compact discs, withrandom track selection facilities.

The CD player shall provide the following minimum performance:(a) Frequency response 40Hz - 20kHz ±0.5dB(b) Signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio >100dB(A)




AEB 695-07/200856


(c) Channel separation >85dB(d) Harmonic distortion <0.01% @ 1kHz.

Test Input An industry standard socket with gain control (female XLR-3 or standard ¼" jack)shall be obtained for the insertion of external test sources. A latching switch shall be provided on the rack for continuous broadcast of the testmessage.

20.4. EquipmentThe system shall include all the equipment either shown on drawings or listedbelow :

- Power amplifier.- CD PLAYER.- AM/FM Tuner- Double deck cassette player.- Desk top goose neck microphone.-

Wall mounted loud speakers.- Equipment rack.




AEB 695-07/200857


Equipment Rack

A standard '19 inch' rack or racks, as detailed in BS 5954, shall be provided to

house the equipment. The word 'rack' as used throughout this Specification refers toa single rack or a system of multiple racks, as necessary.

The rack shall be of steel construction.

The height of the rack shall not exceed 2000mm.

A fully demountable rear access panel shall be fitted.

Fully demountable side access panels shall be fitted.

The rack shall be fitted with lockable castors.

Sufficient natural ventilation shall be provided within the rack to permit continuous

operation of the equipment, in a room ambient temperature between 10°C and 40°Cassuming mechanical ventilation.

Equipment shall be installed within the rack in a logical (signal path) sequence.Notwithstanding this requirement, equipment requiring routine operation (e.g. switch& monitor panels) shall be located at a convenient working height. Equipmentrequiring internal access during commissioning and/or routine testing shall

preferably be installed on rack runners. The equipment shall remain fully operationalwhen extended on the runners.

Items requiring routine operation shall, where practicable, be installed within the

same cabinet.

Unused rack space shall be fitted with blank panels.

An internal mains power (240V) distribution system shall be provided. Eachtermination shall be labeled with the equipment item served.

All mains terminals shall be shielded from inadvertent touch.

A mains power on/off switch indicator light shall be provided on a mains panel at the

bottom of the rack.

The mains panel shall include a standard 13A or IEC socket for test equipment, etc.This socket shall be independent of the rack power switch and shall be annotatedaccordingly, i.e. 'UNSWITCHED'.

The rack shall be fitted with a transparent or translucent (smoked) lockable door.




AEB 695-07/200858


Contact details for the equipment supplier (name, address, telephone and faxnumbers) shall be provided on a permanent nameplate affixed in a prominent

position on the rack.

An integral drawer shall be provided for storage of spares, manuals, etc.

An integral pull-out shelf shall be provided as a working surface for test equipment.

Power Amplifiers

The power amplifier shall be of modular construction and shall exhibit the followingminimum features and specifications:

A. The amplifier shall be equipped with an adjustable delay switch function toallow for a smooth start of signal feed to the loudspeakers to avoid cracklenoise on switching on.

B. The final stage shall be short-circuit protected and a thermal switch shall beprovided to switch off the amplifier in case of excessive heat that may resultfrom a continued overload. A red front panel LED shall be provided toindicate such an overload.

C. The amplifier shall have the facility for the connection of an emergencypower supply.

D. The amplifier shall be capable of internally monitoring the amplifier output toassure a silent switch off of the loudspeaker system.

E. The amplifier shall have the facility to switch the AF signal from a remotelocation.

F. The speaker outputs available from the amplifier shall be suitable for 100V,70V, 50V and 35 Volt lines. Full power shall be available from the amplifier atall these voltages.

G. The amplifier shall exhibit the following technical specifications as aminimum:- Frequency Response 100V/ 50V 2dB : 70 Hz - 15 KHz- S/N Ratio : 60 dB- Distortion Factor 1 KHz 80% load : < 0.2%- Input Sensitivity : 600 mV/ 10K

H. The amplifiers shall be sized to provide the specified loud speaker outputand area sound levels, with adequate headroom, allowing for appropriatediversity of loudspeaker tapping and loudspeaker line losses.

K. No more than 3 amplifier or module output rating shall provided, (e.g. 50W,100W and 200W), to facilitate interchangeability. No amplifier or moduleshall have an output <50 W rms or > 250W rms. Amplifier shall be sized for

maximum 90% of rated load, to allow for future additional loudspeakers.




AEB 695-07/200859


L. The amplifiers shall be fully protected against short and open circuits andshall include protection against damage to loudspeaker. Fuses (preferablyfront panel mounted) shall be clearly labeled with rating and type.

M. Power „ON\OFF‟ switch and indicators shall be fitted on the front panels.

N. Gain controls shall be lockable internal type, preferably with steppedattenuation in 2dB steps.

O. Each amplifier shall be clearly labeled with the loudspeaker zone(s) served(for parallel bank amplification, the labeling shall indicate the amplifiernumber).

20.5. Loudspeakers

A. Types:

1. Column Loudspeakers

The column loudspeakers shall be of rugged construction decorativetype. Simple installation shall be accomplished with suppliedmounting brackets.The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application withhigh reproduction quality for music and speech.The column loudspeaker shall meet the following minimumperformance:1. Handling power : As shown on the drawings2. Frequency range : 200 ...... 20 KHz4. With Matching transformer @ 100V

B. Interconnections

All loudspeakers shall be 100V line working. All loudspeakers shall be supplied with high quality audio transformers. TheTransformers shall have a minimum of 3 secondary tapings, with a ratio ofat least 4:1 between the highest and the lowest tapings (6dB power factor).Tapings shall be clearly labeled with the wattages.

20.6 Panels

Panels shall be permanently and clearly annotated by engraving or epoxy silk-screening. Self-illuminating switches may be permanently annotated by printinginside the lens. Printed designation strips, with clear plastic legend protection strips,may be used as an alternative on the central rack equipment only. All lettering shallbe in capitals. Legends shall not be obscured by adjacent indicators or controls,

when seen from the normal viewing angle.




AEB 695-07/200860


20.7 Technical Information

20.7.1 General Requirements

The following minimum technical information shall be obtained:

(a) A list of all proposed equipment items, with technical data sheets or otherdocumentary evidence to show that each item will meet the requirements of

the Specification;

(b) Details of any minor deviations from the Specification(c) A schematic drawing

(d) Details of proposed signal routing arrangements

The following minimum technical information shall be obtained prior to themanufacture or delivery of any equipment:

(a) Drawings of the racks plus drawings of panels as appropriate, e.g. inputpanels, alarm panels;

(b) Drawings of loudspeaker supports

(c) Specifications for all cables to be installed together with full wiring drawings

showing the duty, type, route, protection, separation & terminationrequirements for each cable, including full details of back box requirements.Power supply requirements shall also be shown;

(d) A power amplifier schedule

(e) Loudspeaker line loss calculations (to show compliance with 0.5dB line losslimit)

(f) A Schedule of loudspeaker tapings

(g) Samples of any equipment items as required.

20.7.2 System Manual

Three copies of a system operation & maintenance manual shall be obtained before

the system is tested to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. Themanual shall describe system operation (eg zoning, system priority & the use ofinput panels), routine care, maintenance & testing & simple fault-finding procedures.Settings records for all controls, including pre-amplifier, & amplifier settings, shall be

included. Also included shall be a schedule of loudspeaker tapings & a copy of thedrawings showing the final sound level measurements. The manual shall alsocontain a full set of drawings, manufacturers' handbooks for all proprietary items, &a list of the spares. The front page of the manual shall include contact details(name, address, telephone & fax numbers) for the system supplier.




AEB 695-07/200861


A draft copy of the manual shall be obtained before the testing is scheduled tocommence.

A system layout drawing, framed or otherwise permanently mounted, shall beobtained for installation adjacent to the rack. The drawing shall show the coveragezones, main distribution routes and the locations of all input panels, andloudspeakers.

20.7.3 SPARES An appropriate set of spares shall be provided, including consumable and modularitems, which can be swiftly replaced by on-site maintenance staff, and to protect theuser from the effects of components going out of production. A list of proposed spares shall be obtained.

20.7.4 Works Inspection Arrange for works inspection of the central equipment rack and remote panels.

20.7.5 Performance Tests

Full tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the works meet the requirementsof the contract documents. Upon successful completion of these tests, a full systemdemonstration test shall be carried out for acceptance purposes.

20.7.6 Maintenance Contract

Obtain details of an (optional) Maintenance Contract to extend the maintenancebeyond the Defects Liability Period, on an annual basis.

20.8 Wiring Requirements

20.8.1 System Wiring

a) CABLES All cables shall have a unique reference number, and shall be clearly and

permanently labeled at each end. All cores shall be colour coded or numbered.Loudspeaker cables shall be sized to ensure not more than 0.5dB powerloss, assuming an additional future power load of at least +10% on each

circuit.

B) Connections And TerminationsIn-line connections shall be limited to the absolute minimum practicable. Anyconnections shall be within suitable steel junction boxes, permanentlyannotated 'MUSIC SYSTEM'.




AEB 695-07/200862


Connections to equipment racks shall be via marshalling boxes, alsoannotated 'MUSIC SYSTEM'. The boxes shall be fitted with fixed terminal

strips, which shall be permanently annotated with unique circuit referencenumbers. Final connections between the marshalling boxes and the racksshall be via suitable flexible cables of sufficient length to gain working accessto the rear of the racks.

Internal rack connections shall be either hard-wired or via professional type

audio connectors, preferably of the latching type.

20.8.2 Electromagnetic Interference

All equipment supplied shall be immune from and shall not radiate signalsexceeding the limits of BS 800 and BS 6667.Protection shall be provided by means of surge suppressors to any equipmentincluding cables, which may be vulnerable to voltage transients. This shall include

the incoming mains connections to the power supply unit. The equipmentmanufacturers instructions shall be observed in applying the protection.

Music system cables shall be segregated from all other cables by at least 300mm inany direction as far as practical. Cables shall only cross at right angles.

21.2.21 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

EPABX , telephone equipment and wiring are not included in this contract andwill be installed by others.

The contractor shall supply and install all manholes, manholes covers, conduits,trunking, Cable trays, MDF, MTF, telephone junction boxes, accessories andoutlet. The contract includes for excavation, trenching laying of conduits bends,accessories, backfilling and finishing of all exterior line all in accordance with

Q-tel Consultants instructions.

The contractor shall supply and install telephone distribution frame boxes asindicated on the drawings. Consult Q-tel planning section for exact dimensionsrecommended prior to supplying the MDFs & IDFs.

Telephone outlets shall be of a line jack type used by the Q-tel and to theapproval of the Consultant.

Outlet boxes shall be provided where shown on drawings. Telephone outlets forthe under floor trunking shall be suitable for the under floor trunking system. Pull

boxes shall be provided according to Q-tel regulations and wherever needed tofacilitate the pulling-in of wires. Others shall provide all conduits with pull wiresto facilitate pulling-in of cables.

All internal telephone conduits shall be 25 mm. unless otherwise specified. Alldistribution boxes shall be connected to each other by minimum 50 mm. PVCconduits, or as shown on drawings.




AEB 695-07/200863


All telephone outlets shall be connected to their nearest distribution frame boxes,a maximum of 3 shall be allowed on one radial circuit unless indicated otherwise.

PVC conduit, trunking, boxes and accessories shall comply with the relevantclauses of these specifications.

Manhole covers for telephone manholes shall be heavy-duty type of amanufacturer and shape approved by Q-tel.

21.2.22 CCTV SYSTEM

Scope of Work

Generally the works shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning,hand over, training and maintenance CCTV System complete with cameras,matrix for camera, key pad, monitors one for each 8 cameras, power supply

unit, enough number of digital video recorders and all needed peripherals,accessories and wiring.

General

A. All equipment and materials used shall be of last up to date technology andbest quality USA, West Europe or Japan made manufactured by a wellknown international company.

B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and provenin actual use.

Indoor/Outdoor CCTV Camera Dome Drive System

A. The indoor/outdoor CCTV camera dome drive system shall consist of adiscreet, miniature camera dome; variable speed/high speed pan and tiltdrive unit with continuous 360 deg. rotation; high resolution, 1/4-inch,color CCD camera; optical and digital zoom, auto focusing, motorizedzoom lens; integral receiver; and quick-install mounting.

B. The lower dome shall meet or exceed the following design andperformance specifications:

1. Diameter: Maximum of 5.9 inches

2. Depth below Back Box: Maximum of 2.75 inches

3. Material: Acrylic, optically clear, with no distortion in any portion ofthe dome up to +2 above the horizontal

4. Dome Color: Clear, smoked, chrome, and gold versions




AEB 695-07/200864


5. Trim Ring Connection: Two screws (environmental); snap in place(indoor)

6. Safety Cable Plastic tether

7. Weight Maximum of 1 lb. 5 oz.

Variable Speed/High Speed Pan And Tilt Drive Unit

A. The variable speed/high speed pan and tilt drive unit shall meet or exceedthe following design and performance specifications:

1. Pan Speed Variable between 250 per secondcontinuous pan to 0.1° per second

2. Vertical Tilt Unobstructed tilt of +2 to-92

3. Manual Control Speed 0.1 to 80 per second, and pan at 150 per

second in turbo mode. Tilt operation shallrange from 0.1 to 40 per second

4. Automatic Preset Speed Pan speed of 250 and a tilt speed of 200per second

5. Presets Forty preset positions with a 20-characterlabel available for each position; presetprogramming through control keyboard orthrough dome system on-screen menu

6. Preset Accuracy +/- 0.25

7. Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed Speed decreases in proportion to the

increasing depth of zoom8. Automatic Power-Up User-selectable to the mode of operation

the dome will assume when power is cycled

9. Zones Eight zones with up to 20-character labelingfor each, with ability to blank the video inthe zone

10. Motor Drive Cogged belt with .9° stepper motor

11. Motor Operating Mode Microstep to .015° steps

12. Motor Continuous duty, variable speed, operatingat 18 to 30 VAC, 24 VAC nominal

13. Limit Stops Programmable for manual panning,auto/random scanning, and frame scanning

14. Inner Liner Rotating black ABS liner inside sealed lowerdome




AEB 695-07/200865


15. Pattern One user-defined programmable patternincluding pan, tilt, zoom, and presetfunctions;pattern programming throughcontrol keyboard or through dome systemon-screen menu

16. Pattern Length One pattern of user-defined length, basedon dome memory

17. Auto-Sensing Automatically sense and respond toprotocol utilized for controlling unit whetherCoaxitron or RS-422 P and D protocols;accept competitors‟ control protocols withthe use of optional translator cards

18. Menu System Built-in for setup of programmablefunctions;

multilingual, including English, French,Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and German

19. Auto Flip Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel

20. Password Protection Programmable settings with optionalpassword protection

21. Diagnostics On-screen diagnostic system information

22. Display Setup User-definable locations of all labels anddisplays; user-selectable time duration ofeach display

23. Azimuth/Elevation/Zoom On-screen display of pan and tilt locationsand zoom ratio

24. Compass Display On-screen display of compassheading;user-definable compass setup

25. Video Output Level User-selectable: normal, or high tocompensate for long video wire runs

26: Compatibility All dome drives are compatible with all backbox configurations

27. Power Consumption Maximum 70 VA

28. Weight Not to exceed 2.4 lb (1.09 kg)

B. The high resolution, color CCD camera shall meet or succeed thefollowing design and performance specifications:




AEB 695-07/200866


Color Optic System

1. Image Sensor 1/4-inch2. Scanning System 2:1 interlaced output3. Effective Pixels NTSC -- 768 x 4944. Horizontal Resolution NTSC -- >470 TVL5. Lens F1.4 (f=4-64 mm optical, 16X optical zoom,

8X electronic zoom)6. Zoom Speed 4.2 seconds7. Horizontal Angle of View 43° at 4 mm wide zoom – 3° at 64 mm

telephoto zoom8. Focus Automatic with manual override9. Sensitivity at 35 IRE NTSC, color: 0.05 lux at 1/2-second shutter

speed10. Synchronization System Internal/ AC line lock phase adjustable via

remote control, V-sync

11. White Balance Automatic with manual override12. Shutter Speed NTSC – 1/2-1/30,00013. Iris Control Automatic with manual override14. Gain Control Automatic/Off15. Video Output 0.714V ± 0.07V (100 IRE ± 10 IRE)16. Video Signal-to-Noise >46 dB

C. Certifications UL and cUL, FCC Class B, and CE Class B

Matrix

Microprocessor-Based, Video matrix system

The System shall be a full featured video matrix switching control systemallowing users to view and shall control not less than 16 Cameras and 3monitors The video control Matrix system is compact self contained matrixunit incorporating video input/output control facilities, camera controlfunctions, multilingual text in picture, video presence detection and alarmhandling.The unit features text-in picture facilities for set up menus, video input/outputidentification, alarm and control text plus time and date view option.Control of cameras functions such as pan and tilt, lens control and otherauxiliary functions can be operated from the key board . Alarm handling allows control and use of upto 48 alarm inputs and 6 alarmoutputs.

The unit is designed in the standard 19” frame for rack mounting . A video presence detector provides indication of a loss of input video signal.Matrix shall be able to be connected with digital video recorder to recordcameras outputs.The unit shall be so equipped to allow to the user to set his own configurationand programming with the help of on-screen set-up menus or by use of PCwith camera group switching, sequence switching and salvo switchingfacilities.




AEB 695-07/200867


DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER

A. The digital video recorder shall provide a high quality recorder capable ofstorage and play back of images from 1 to 16 camera inputs at a simultaneousrefreshing recording rate of up to 60 frames per second (NTSC) and shallposses external watchdog system lock-up, duplex operation, Windows

® 98

software, watermarking of each frame, external alarm events, internal videomotion detection, and scheduled event recording.

B. The digital recorder shall meet or exceed the following design and performancespecifications:

1. The digital recorder shall be able to record images continuously, uponmotion detection, or according to a time schedule. The recorder shallstore video images onto a hard drive varying in size from 30 GB to 480GB, depending on model.

The processing unit shall operate with a Pentium IV, 3.6 GHz processor

and 512 MB of RAM.

512 MB - RAM

2. The processing unit shall operate with Windows XP software.

3. The digital recorder shall provide NTSC/PAL signal format with aresolution in CIF format of 352 x 240 pixels for NTSC format and 384 x288 pixels for PAL format. The video shall have a compressed image sizeof 320 x 240 pixels using an average of 6 KB of memory per image.

4. The digital recorder shall provide 8 or 16 video camera inputs, depending

on model, at a refreshing recording rate of up to 160 images per second(simplex mode), NTSC or PAL format.

5. The digital recorder shall function as a recorder and a full-duplexmultiplexer, providing video inputs for 8 or 16 cameras, depending onmodel, and controlling pan/tilt/zoom functions via RS-422communications.

6. The digital recorder multiplexer portion of the system shall allow forvarious viewing/recording configurations of full-screen, 4, 8, 12, or 16cameras.

7. The digital recorder shall provide simultaneous playback viewing whilerecording live images in full-duplex operation.

8. The digital recorder shall provide up to 24 individual schedules forprogramming by motion event, alarming input, or continuous recording.

9. The digital recorder shall provide for a hardware watchdog system, whichshall be a separate hardware device that monitors the clock on themotherboard of the CPU for lockup of the system. Upon lockup of thesystem, the recorder shall automatically reboot.




AEB 695-07/200868


10. The digital recorder shall provide four password-protected user levels forsetup functions, operation, and system exiting.

11. The digital recorder shall provide built-in motion detection for eachcamera. Upon detection of motion, the recorder will start recording orincrease the recording rate of the system. The operator shall be able to

select the camera‟s detection area and the sensitivity of each camera.

12. The digital recorder shall provide eight cameras with a hard-wired alarmpoint. When activated this input will start the unit recording, or if alreadyrecording, increase the recording rate. A pre-alarm recording functionshall be available to record images before the alarm sensor has beenactivated. An alarm history log shall be provided.

13. The digital recorder shall provide eight dry contact alarm outputs toactivate external devices.

14. The digital recorder shall provide scheduled time recording groups duringa 24-hour period. While in this mode, if a camera detects motion or analarm is activated, the system shall activate and begin recording theevent.

15. The digital recorder shall provide 8 or 16 BNC inputs for video, two 9-pinD-type connectors for COM 1 and COM 2 ports, two 6-pin mini-DINconnectors for a PS/2 mouse and keyboard, a 15-pin D-type port for aPC monitor connection, a 25-pin D-type port for a printer connection, aBNC jack for analog monitor output, and an RJ-45 connector for anetwork connection. The system shall provide 8 push-in connectors foralarm inputs and 8 push-in connectors for control outputs.

16. The digital recorder shall provide full remote control operation via TCP/IPprotocol and RS-422 interfacing to receivers for full control ofpan/tilt/zoom functions.

17. The digital recorder shall provide a LAN/WAN connection. Requiredsoftware or hardware shall be provided for viewing/controlling over thenetwork.

18. The processing unit shall have ISO 9001, FCC, CE, UL, and cULcertifications.

19. The digital recorder shall utilize M-JPEG compression technology.

20. The digital recorder shall provide high quality video recording of at leastVHS grade compared to the original video and shall support NTSC- orPAL-formatted video.

21. The digital recorder shall provide a minimum of 16 million color palettesand 256 shades of gray.




AEB 695-07/200869


22. The digital recorder shall provide watchdog capability, automaticallystarting after an electric failure or operational error without having tochange any settings.

23. The digital recorder shall provide a back-up management system tocreate backups and copies to external devices, (for example, CD or other

storage devices), without interrupting hard disk recording.

24. The digital recorder shall provide an internal 3.5-inch floppy drive forexporting short-term events.

25. The digital recorder shall provide up to four 120 GB hard disk drives inthe system for extending the recording time.

26. The digital recorder shall provide on-screen programming and operationthrough a PC keyboard or PS/2 mouse.

27. The digital recorder shall provide the necessary software for imageverification of each image recorded.

28. The digital recorder shall provide the capability of being rack mounted inan EIA 19-inch rack or placed on a shelf or desktop.

29. The digital recorder shall measure 7 (H) x 17 (W) x 18 (D) inches.

30. The digital recorder shall have an operating temperature rate of 41°F to104°F (5° to 40°C).

31. The digital recorder shall operate at a relative humidity rate of maximum80% non-condensing.

Monitors

(3) 15” Flat Screen inch colour monitors; 2 no. shall be located in the ControlRoom+ one at reception counter/G.FL .The remaining monitors shall be used to sequence through the camerasthroughout the site.Monitors shall comply with the following technical requirements.

300 lines or better resolution at centre

Less than 7% deflection distortion

Less than 3% raster distortation

Hum Noise less than 45 dB




AEB 695-07/200870


21.2.23 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR

1.0 GENERATOR SETS

1.01. General Description

Generating sets, rated as shown on the drawing for .8 PF, powered byturbocharged Diesel engine running at 1500 RPM and directly coupled to asingle bearing alternator, enclosure IP21, Brushless, Synchronous, self-exited ,self regulated, insulation and temperature class H, 240/415V , 3 phase ,4 wires ,regulated at +/- 1%, 50 Hz.

Generator set rating shall be applicable for Continuous Power supply at variableload in lie of commercially purchased power, 10 % overload capacity shall beavailable for a period of operation

The Genset shall be equipped, with set mounted AMF control panel and

complete with:

- Heavy duty fabricated steel skid type base frame with anti-vibration mountings.- Set mounted radiator with engine driven blower type fan and protecting

guards.

- 12V Electric starting system with starter motor, heavy duty lead acid batteriesmounted into a rack and battery charger alternator.

- Residential exhaust silencer , 29 dB attenuation equipped with flanged andsupplied loose.

- Air, fuel and lubricating oil filters.- Mechanical governor.

- Automatic engine shutdown protection for:- Low lub oil pressure- High water temperature- Overspeed- Earth fault

- Built in fuel service tank (suitable for 8 Hours operation at full Load) +

storage tank for 48 hours. - Jacket water heater- Instruction manuals and electrical wiring diagrams.

Engine

a. The engine design is to be four stroke cycle, direct injection, turbocharged industrial type.

b. The engine shall operate on fuel to BS 2869 : 1983 Class A.

c. The overload capacity of the engine is to be 10 % of the full load for onehour in any 12 hours period.




AEB 695-07/200871


d. The engine shall have a flywheel complete with coupling fitted to ensuresmooth running of the engine under various load conditions. A flywheelsheet metal guard is to be furnished for full protection of the personnel.

e. The engine is to be equipped with a sensitive mechanical speed governorwith a hydraulic servo gear for operating the fuel pump control.

Cooling System:

a. Cooling of engines to be achieved using engine drivenradiators.

b. Radiators are to be capable of dissipating the required amount ofheat from the engine jacket cooling water and the enginelubricating oil, with an ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.

c. Radiators are to be rated 130 % of actual load.

d. Heat transfer matrix is to be composed of standard,interchangeable, individually removable elements, built-up usingbrass tubes with copper fins solder bonded together for maximumthermal efficiency and mechanical strength

Exhaust System

a. Engine exhaust gases are to be ducted from the engine mountedturbocharger outlet flanges to a higher performance type exhaustsilencer.

b. Exhaust silencer are to be residential type, vertical cylinder withside entry and top outlet.

c. Exhaust silencers are to be adequately supported on the unit.

d. Exhaust silencer are to be provided with flanged inspection andcleaning points, positioned to allow all parts of their interiors to beinspected and cleaned with appropriate equipment.

Alternator

a. Alternator are to be specifically suited for direct coupling to thediesel driving engines previously specified. They are to be suitablefor mounting on a combined engine / alternator base plate.

b. The alternator is to be brushless, self ventilated, three-phase,salient pole synchronous type. The revolving field shall beincorporated on a common shaft, with the excitation system andthe rotating diode assembly.




AEB 695-07/200872


c. Alternator rating to be defined on a continuos base in accordancewith BS5000 Part 3 and capable of sustaining a 10 % overload forone hour in any 12 hours period.

d. Alternator Characteristics are to be as follows:

- speed : 1500 r.p.m.

- output : net as per schedule kw at 0.3lagging , after deducting

power required by engineauxiliaries.

- Voltage and frequency : 415 volts, 3-phase, 50 Hz, withearth neutral through neutral

earthing link.

- Overload : capable of taking for one hour inevery 12 hours , an overload of10 % at the rated voltage and p.f.of 0.8 without the temperaturerise of any part exceeding thelimits specified for full loadcontinuos running.

- Insulation : Suitable for class “H” to BS 2757temperature rises at a maximumair inlet temperature of 50 deg.C.

e. Low voltage power supply to the automatic voltage regulator andthe excitation system is to be made via an auxiliary power wiringconnection are to be made at terminal blocks at one location in theunit.

f. Alternator is to be fitted with surge suppression equipment toprotect the rotating diodes against effect of external faults andfaulty synchronizing.

g. The alternator should be of single bearing type with solid forgedhalf coupling for bolting to the engine flywheel.

h. The alternator bearing is to be of the oil lubricated sleeve type,ring of the disc lubricated and insulated to eliminate the risk ofshaft / bearing currents.

Alternator Excitation System:

a. The excitation system is to be brushless type, the exciter is to beconsist of a three phase A.C. generator with revolving armatureand a stationary field. Solid state hermetically sealed rectifiers areto be mounted directly on the generator armature.




AEB 695-07/200873


b. The exciter rectifier output shall be directly connected to therevolving generator field windings without brushless, slipring or commutators.

Set mounted control panel:

Set mounted AMF panel, mounted into a rack to enable easy access formaintenance and enclosed inside a heavy qauge cubicle, complete with:

*In Front:- 1 ammeter, DIN 72- 1 ammeter selector switch, 4 position- 1 voltmeter, DIN 72- 1 voltmeter phase selector switch 7 position- 1 combined Frequency / Tachometer- 1 hour run meter

- 1 test lamps push button- 1 panel front lighting, dia. 28mm- 1 fuel contents gauge- 1 battery condition voltmeter

*Controls:-1 emergency stop push button-1 selector switch ( auto/manual/test/stop) with reset

facility.-1 selector switch (start/stop)- 2 Nos. Volt free (i.e., 1NO + 1 NC) contacts for

status indication

*LED‟s Indicators: - battery loading- low fuel oil level- failure to start

*Inside :- Contacts for to receive remote order to start- Adjustable timers for automatic sequence:- Starting on mains failure: 0.5 sec.- Stabilization of generator : 0.5-3.0sec.- Connection to the load: 0.5-3.0sec

- Mains return: 60-420sec.- Cooling down: 90-900sec.- Engine shutdown on

overload or overheat: 30-360sec.- Mains monitoring , 3 phase type.- Static battery charger- (12 or 24)- Jacket water heater outgoing feeder.- Contacts to trip the ATS.- Timers for automatic sequence- Pre-set attempt to start : 3 or 6- facility on terminal to received remote order to start




AEB 695-07/200874


- set mounted manual Circuit Breaker, 4 pole , fix pattern,adequately rated, for alternator protection againstoverload and short circuit.

21.2.24 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

The contractor shall include for the supply, erection testing, commissioning andsetting to work of purposely designed UPS, 415 VOLT, three phase and neutral50 Hz uninterruptible power supply equipments.

The uninterruptable power supply shall be supplied and installed by a specialistcontractor.

1.01 DESCRIPTION

The Uninterruptable Power Supply (U.P.S) shall be of the static no-break typewhich when used in conjunction with batteries shall provide a reliable low-

maintenance continuous well regulated an uninterrupted AC power supply to thecritical load regardless of transients on or disruption to the primary and under allrated load conditions.

The U.P.S. shall consist of rectifier/charger inverter, static by-pass switch,maintenance switch, synchronising equipment, protective devices andaccessories as required to provide cleans, regulated power to the critical load.

The U.P.S shall include all mechanical and electrical devices that shallautomatically effect continuity of electrical power within specified toleranceswithout interruption upon failure or deterioration of the primary power.

1.02 OPERATION

Power from the AC supply shall be supplied to the rectifier/charger unit of theU.P.S in service. The rectifier/charger shall be solid state and shall convertincoming AC power to DC power which shall directly supply the solid stateinverter unit. The inverter shall convert the DC power into AC power as requiredto supply the critical load.

Failure of the primary AC supply shall automatically result in no-break responsewhereby input power for the inverter shall be supplied from the batteries with nointerruption to or disturbance of inverter outputs in excess of the limits of thespecifications. Primary power failure shall instantaneously energise the U.P.Salarm circuit and associated fault indicators.

Restoration of the AC supply shall automatically and without interruption ordisturbance beyond specified limits reinstate the rectifier/charger output as thesource of input power for the inverter unit and for recharging batteries. U.P.Smalfunction shall automatically initiate uninterrupted transfer of the load to theby-pass line.

1.03 RECTIFIER/CHARGER




AEB 695-07/200875


A silicon control rectifier bridge as connected to the input transformer shall rectifythe AC input which shall be passed through an inductance and capacitance filteras connected to the DC bus. Control logic shall be provided to effect thenecessary control of the firing angles of the rectifier thyristors in order to achievethe required output voltage and current.

1.04 INPUT

The primary power for the rectifier/charger shall be provided from the input of theU.P.S. Start-up and shut-down controls shall be provided within the unit. Therectifier/charger shall be designed to accept input voltage over a range of + 6%from normal voltage and with frequencies between + 5% from normal frequency.The input power factor due to the U.P.S shall be approximately 0.8 lagging whenthe system is operating at full load and nominal input voltage.

1.05 CURRENT LIMITING

The rectifier/charger shall provide for input current limiting whereby the criticalload and an additional pre-set maximum power level required to recharge thebattery shall be taken into account. Thus the input KVA drawn by the systemshall be the sum of two components i.e. that due to the critical load and that dueto battery charging.

1.06 INPUT POWER WALK-IN

The U.P.S modules shall not initially draw from the power restored after anoutage except as transformer in-rush current. Input power requirements after aperiod of approximately 15 seconds, known as walk-in time, shall rise to a leveldictated by the power required to drive the critical load and by the additional pre-

set power required to recharge the batteries as previously described.

1.07 BATTERY CHARGING

The rectifier/charger shall, in addition to supplying power for the load, charge thebattery at a sufficient rate to restore the battery from discharge to 95% chargewithin ten time the discharge period. Charging current shall be voltage regulatedand current limited. The rectifier/charger shall, after the battery is recharged,maintain the battery at full charge until the next emergency operation. Automaticbattery - equalising charges shall be provided as required.

1.08 INVERTER

The inverter shall be a static device of slid state type and shall be capable ofaccepting the output of the rectifier/charger or battery and of providing analternating current output. Each phase of the complete inverter shall consist oftwo inverter switching units, which shall each produce a square wave. Outputvoltage regulation shall be accomplished by varying the phase angle betweenthe units shall be controlled by a feed-back system. The outputs of the inverterswitching units shall be summed by means of a transformer network and shall bephased through a filter to the output terminals.




AEB 695-07/200876


1.09 CURRENT LIMIT

The U.P.S shall be capable of supplying 125% of the rated current for 10minutes, 150% for 10 sec, 200% for 1 sec. and shall be able to withstand a shortcircuit across the output terminals of 50 KA.

1.10 HARMONIC DISTORTION

The total harmonic distortion generated by the U.P.S. when feeding a linear loadshall be limited to 2% by the output filter of the inverter unit. There shall be nosingle harmonic greater than 2%.

The U.P.S. shall have a low output impedance to high harmonies in order tominimise harmonic voltage caused by the load.

1.11 BUILT-IN SELF PROTECTION

The U.P.S modules shall have built-in self protection against :

(i) Over and under voltage power line surges.(ii) Load switching and circuit breaker operations in the distribution

system.(iii) Sudden changes in output load exceeding the rating limit.(iv) short circuits at output terminals.

The U.P.S shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to themodule and to the connected load for all predictable types of failure within theU.P.S and fast acting current limiting devices shall be used to protect againstfailure of solid state devices. Internal failure in a power converter module shall

cause the module to trip off-line and automatically switch to bypass. All failureshall be denoted by visual and audible indications.

1.12 EQUIPMENT EARTHING

The U.P.S output AC neutral and by-pass neutral shall be connected andelectrically isolated. The U.P.S chassis shall be provided with an equipmentearth terminal.

1.13 EFFICIENCY

The efficiency of a U.P.S module being defined as the output KW divided by theinput KW shall be at least 95% under the following conditions:

(i) The module operating at rated load

(ii) The battery fully charged and floating on the system

(iii) The input voltage within the specifications

(iv) The load power factor between unity and 0.8 lagging




AEB 695-07/200877


1.14 BATTERY ISOLATION

The U.P.S shall have a contactor enabling on-load connecting and disconnectionof the battery when necessary.

A fused switch shall be provided close to the battery terminals for isolation andprotection of battery cables.

1.15 STATIC BY- PASS

The U.P.S shall be equipped with a static by-pass witch. The switch shalloperate in parallel with the by-pass circuit breaker and shall allow anuninterrupted transfer to the by-pass supply in the event of U.P.S modulemalfunction. The operation of the by-pass shall be inhibited in the event of theby-pass supply being outside the frequency tolerance of the U.P.S module.

The single to initiate a transfer shall be simultaneously fed to the static by-pass

switch and the mechanical by-pass circuit breaker. The static by-pass switchassembly shall instantaneously connect the load to the by-pass supply. Themechanical by-pass switch in the by-pass line being in parallel with static by-pass switch shall then take over from the static unit while the mechanical circuitbreaker in the output of the U.P.S module at the same time opens.

The transfer to by-pass may also be initiated manually to allow a premeditatedtransfer by-pass for maintenance and service purposes and in this casearrangement of overlap switching shall allow the breakers to transfer the loadwithout any interruption in the supply to the critical load.

1.16 CONTROL AND INDICATING PANELS

The U.P.S shall be fitted with an integral control and indicating panel. Allinstrumentation, alarms and indicators required to show the operation of theU.P.S shall be positioned on this panel.

The mimic diagram and alarm indication will remain live after tripping of theU.P.S module in order to facilitate the tracing of a malfunction. A single linediagram of the system shall be silk-screened on the control panel. The control,instrumentation and indicators shall be physically located in the proper positionson the single line diagram. A mimic diagram showing a typical module controlpanel shall be submitted for approval. The control panel shall have provisions forremote annunciation of the status, alarm functions provided through potentialfree contacts of NO/NC pairs each.

1.17 MEASUREMENT

The following measuring instrument shall be provided :

1 DC voltmeter measuring rectifier output voltage1 DC ammeter, with zero at mid-scale, measuring battery current.1 DC ammeter measuring rectifier output current1 AC Voltmeter measuring inverter output voltage




AEB 695-07/200878


1 AC ammeter measuring inverter output current1 frequency meter measuring inverter output frequency.

1.18 INDICATING LAMP

Neon lamps on the mimic diagram shall indicate the live circuits in the U.P.S andthe state of breakers and contactors.

1.19 ALARM INDICATIONS

Alarm lamps shall indicate the presence and facilitate the location of a fault in theU.P.S

(i) All alarm functions shall be electrically latched in order to indicatetransient as well as continuous faults.

(ii) All alarm functions shall cause a horn to sound and the simultaneous

energizing of a common alarm relay.

The displayed alarm indicated shall be as follows :

Alarm Action

BLOWER FAILURE Alarm only

OVER TEMPERATURE Alarm only

BATTERY OVER VOLTAGE Switch to by-pass, Trip Module

FUSE FAILURE Switch to by-pass, Trip Module

BATTERY ALARM Alarm only

MODULE OVERLOAD Alarm only, but switch to by-pass withoverload sustained

OUTPUT VOLTAGE ERROR Switch to by-pass, Trip Module

SUPPLY FAILURE Alarm only

STATIC BY-PASS OPERATED Switch to by-pass, Trip Module

1 - ALARM TEST This shall illuminate all the alarm lamps

1 - ALARM ACCEPT This shall cancel the horn and theremote alarm but permit re-operation inthe event of further fault occurrence.

1 - ALARM RESET This shall enable all alarm functions tobe reset when the fault has been cleared.




AEB 695-07/200879


1.20 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The U.P.S shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the followingexternal environment conditions without mechanical or electrical damage ordegradation of operations.

1.21 CHARACTERISTICS

i) Operating ambient temperature 0 degree centigrade 5 degree centigrade.

ii) Non-operating and storage ambient temperature : 20 degree centigrade to + 70degree centigrade.

iii) Humidity : to 100%

1.22 PARTS AND COMPONENTS

i) Parts and Materials

All materials and parts comprising the U.P.S shall be new and of currentmanufacture, of a high grade and free from all known defects and imperfectionsand shall not have been prior service except as required during factory resting.

ii) Components

All active electronic devices shall be solid state. All semi-conductor devices shallbe hermetically sealed. Vacuum tubes shall not be used for any purposes. Allrelay shall be dust tight.

iii) Terminals

Terminals shall be supplied for making all power connections.

iv) Semi-Conductor Fusing

All power semi-conductors shall be fused in a manner which prevents cascade orsequential semi-conductors failures. Indicator lamps denoting blown fusecondition shall be readily observable by the operator without removal of panels oropening of module doors.

1.23 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION AND MOUNTING

The U.P.S shall be of modular construction and installed in sheet metalenclosure designed for floor mounting. The U.P.S shall be constructed on a rigidbase frame. The modular units shall be mounted where feasible in pulloutand/or units swing-out trays. Cable connections to the trays shall be sufficientlength to allow for easy access to all components. Modular units shall be firmlymounted inside the enclosure where installation in pull-out or swing-out trayscannot be effected.




AEB 695-07/200880


1.24 VENTILATION

Adequate ventilation shall be provided in order to ensure that all componentsshall operate within environmental rating. A cooling system shall be integral tothe U.P.S module as required to dissipate heat as efficiently as possible and withminimum heating of air and parts near heat resources. Air shall be drawn in atthe bottom of the cabinet and exhausted at the top. Inlets in the doors shall befitted with replaceable filters.

Temperature sensors shall be mounted on the semi-conductor heat sinks andshall be provided to initiate an alarm of the maximum working temperature isexceeded.

1.25 RADIO SUPPRESSION

Radio interference during the operation of the U.P.S shall not be allowed toexceed limits laid down in B.S. 800.

INPUT POWER TECHNICAL DATA

Voltage 415 V with a limit of +/- 6%

Power factor 0.9

Phases Three Phase and Neutral

Frequency 50 Hz + 5%

Power Walk-in 0-100% in 15 secs.

Window 415 (+ 15%) 380 V (-15%)Transient to 415 V (+ 25%) & 380 V (-20%)

Harmonics < 25% THD

OUTPUT POWER TECHNICAL DATA & SYSTEM RATING

Nominal for 24 hrs. daily input healthy 10 KVA

Nominal for 10 mins. from battery 10 KVAOverload (per phase) on inverter 125% for 10 mins.

150% for 10 secs.200% for 1 sec.

Power factor 0.8 to unity within the powerrating

Voltage : Nominal (415 V), 3 Phase

AccuracyBalance load : 3.5 % max.




AEB 695-07/200881


50% unbalanced : + 3.5% max.

Adjustments : +/- 5%

Transient performances : 30% full load step + 10% - 8%max. loss of AC input - 6%

Return of AC input + 10%Uninterrupted transfer of criticalload from U.P.S to by-pass orvice versa + 10% - 8% max.

Response Time : Recovery to 95% in 50milliseconds nominal voltage in100 milliseconds

Phases Number Three + Neutral

Displacement Balance load 120 degree +/- 1degree 100% Unbalanced 120degree +/- 2.5 degree

Frequency :

Nominal : 50 Hz Accuracy : +/- 0.5%

Harmonics :

Linear load 2% max

Non linear load @ crest factor 3 5%

Battery Characteristics :

Battery voltage range 307 - 436 VBattery Float voltage 436 - (2.27 V/cell)

NOTE

Batteries shall be sealed lead type with minimum 10 years Life.

21.2.25 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

General

The Lightning Protection shall be carried out in accordance with B.S. 6651:1999.

Air Terminations

The type and location of the air terminations shall be as indicated in thedrawings, Where indicated, metal framed or metal clad roofs or all of an air




AEB 695-07/200882


termination shall be bonded across joints between constituent parts. Thebonding may be carried out by the specialist roofing contractor but where this isnot the case the bonds shall be made as indicated; no drilling of roofing orcoping shall be done without the approval of the consultant.

Metalwork of structure, ductwork pipes, cowling, air-conditioning equipments,

plant handrails and similar components of the building that are exposed at orabove the roof level shall be bonded to the nearest air termination.

Signal, SMATV aerial is mounted on the structure it shall be bonded to thenearest air termination.

Down Conductors

The type and location of the of the down conductors shall be as indicated in thedrawings. Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of abuilding and an earth electrode, and conductors interconnecting pipe electrodes,

shall be sheathed; but conductors interconnecting copper electrodes may be leftbare. Conductors in other locations shall be sheathed. Sheaths shall be of PVCextruded, shrunk on or similarly applied; the colour shall be approved by theconsultant.

Where the profile of the building consists of an overhang or re-entrant loop to beformed in a down conductor the consultant shall be informed.

Metalwork, including pipe work, ductwork and armoured cables, adjacent todown conductors shall be bonded to them unless the distance between themprovides adequate isolation.

Where reinforcement bars of the concrete structure forms the down conductors,welding of the reinforcement shall be carried out by the building contractor. Theelectrical continuity of the welded reinforcing bars shall be tested prior and aftereach pour of concrete is completed.

Connection from the down conductors formed by reinforcement steel or thebuilding contractor shall make concrete clad steel frames. The shall comprisestainless steel tape of not less than 20 x 3 mm, welded on to the steelwork. Todetermine and coordinate the length of the tail to be left for subsequentconnection.

Joints

Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. All contact surfaces shall bethoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive electrical jointingcompound suitable for the conductor material. For bi-metallic joints a separateabrasive shall be used to clean the metal surfaces.

Joints between conductors of same Metal, other than at test points, shall bemade by thermal welding process or by riveting and sweating. Overlap ofconductors shall not be less than 100mm.




AEB 695-07/200883


Where an aluminium conductor is joined to a copper conductor, one of thefollowing methods shall be used :

a) Bi-metal connector formed by friction welding of high purity copperand aluminium.

b) The copper conductor shall be completely sheathed for atleast100 mm of its length with metal strip electrically compatible and Aluminium, and then clamped to the aluminium conductor.

Bi-metal joints shall not be made at test points nor between the test point andearth electrode.

A test clamp shall be provided for each down conductor, it shall be located 1.2meter above the finished ground level unless otherwise indicated. Test clampsshall be of cast gunmetal.

Bonding connections to other metal parts of the building shall be electrolytically

compatible with those metal parts. Screws and rivets shall be phosphor bronzeor naval brass or high tensile manganese brass for copper conductors.

Joint connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal andexclude moisture in all weather conditions. At connections to earth electrodes thecoating shall cover all exposed conductors and, in case of earth pipes, the topsurface of the flanges. The Protective coatings shall be of waterproof, inert,tenacious materials and of one of the following forms :

Solvent cutback thixotrodic corrosion preventative forming a filmof resilent matt petroleum wax.

A fast drying durable rubberised sprayed coating.

A heat shrink clear sheathing.

Conductors

Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main bonding conductors shall beof the type, size and conductor materials as detailed in the drawings or approvedby the consultant.

Tapes shall comply with B.S. 1432 where used to interconnect copperelectrodes. The tape may be bare, but for interconnecting pipe electrodes andfor all other purposes the tape shall have an extruded PVC sheath.

Main earthing bars shall comply with B.S. 1433 and shall be bare.

Cables shall comply with B.S. 6004, Table 1, without sheath, unless specifiedotherwise.

Earth Electrodes

The type and number of earth electrodes shall be as indicated in the drawings.




AEB 695-07/200884


Unless otherwise indicated, earth rods shall be 15mm normal diameterextensible copper clad high tensile steel rods connected together. Coppercladding shall be molecularly bonded to the steel and shall be not less than0.25mm thick. Driving heads shall be of high tensile steel. Screwed joints shallconnect rods by one of the following methods.

Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05 mm copper in theroots of the thread; couplers shall be of high strength silicon aluminium bronzealloy and threads shall be counter bored at the ends so that the couplerscompletely enclose the threads on the rods.

The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise acopper ferrule with the phosphor bronze coupler screw; a corrosion inhibitingpaste shall be applied to the threads on rods and couplers.

Pipe electrodes shall be flanged pipe complying with B.S. 2035 or B.S 4622,150mm bore and 3000 mm long. Pipe to B.S 2035 shall be shot blasted to

remove the scale and rust.

Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape shall be to B.S. 1432, of thesize, length depth below ground level and layout as indicted in the drawings.

Fixing

The consultant‟s approval of the tape clips, saddles and holdfasts used shall beobtained before the work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall notexceed 600mm. No fixing shall be made into joints in masonry.

Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials :

For copper conductors, gunmetal, aluminium -- Silicon bronze or naval brass.

For aluminium conductors -- aluminium and aluminum alloy or Stainless steel.

Clips either shall be of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate orpolypropylene with snap-on lids which can not be inadvertently removed. Clipsand saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk screws. Brasscomponents shall not be used.

For general areas inside the building screws and nuts shall be of cadmiumelectroplated steel or stainless steel; outside the building, in plant rooms or otherlocations they shall be of stainless steel.

No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shallbe carried out without the approval of the consultant. Drilling and cutting of theoutside fabric of the building shall be carried out only after the consultant hasgiven approval.

Inspection Pits

Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and itsassociated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure.




AEB 695-07/200885


Lightweight Inspection pit rated to 5000kg shall be manufactured from highperformance polymer, UV stabilized, chemically resistant and with lockable lid .Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in aninspection pit measuring 300 x 300 mm and the connections shall be eitherwelded or clamped. Waterproof earth electrode seal shall be used with suitably

sized compression rings and seals. Installation of the earth pit shall be properlyco-coordinated with the specialist manufacturer to satisfy the projectrequirement. Integral earth bar shall be used. The enclosure shall be flush withfinished floor level.

Installation

Backfills immediately surrounding electrodes shall have, low specific resistivityand good water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.

Where earth electrodes are to be installed through the base slabs of a building,

electrode seals shall be provided. As indicated, either the rods shall be drivenand the seals fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals handed over to thebuilding contractor for him to incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven ata later date. Harmful ingress of water shall be avoided when driving the rods.

Pipe electrodes shall be installed with the flange at the top, in 500 mm diameterbored boles. Electrodes shall be installed vertically in an excavated hole, with aminimum depth of 2000mm below ground level; and 10 ohms ground resistivity.

21.2.26 EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEM

Earthing

The contractor shall provide for an adhere to QGEWC regulations very strictly asregards earthing and bonding systems are involved. However, the context ofthese regulations are highlighted briefly as follows :

The M.V. panels connected from the transformers shall have an earth bar ofminimum cross-sectional area of 300 sq. mm. running the full length of thepanels. Removable neutral and earth links shall be provided in the M.V. panelswhich shall be of a minimum cross sectional area of 300 sq.m.

The earth bar in the m.v panels shall be connected to the earth provided byQGEWC or with independent earth station specially provided for this.

Where armoured cables are above ground, the armouring of the cable shall beused as the earthing conductor and in case of armoured cable in ground andback-filled, the armouring is not to be used as a sole means of earthing, butadditional means are provided by either of the following :

a. A separate single insulated PVC copper cable whose insulation colour shall begreen or green and yellow. The cable shall be run along with the main cable andtaped to it at regular intervals.




AEB 695-07/200886


b. The inner lead or lead alloy sheath of armoured cable i.e. in case of PILCA orPVC.

The outer copper sheath of MICC cables may be used as the earth conductor.This cable shall not be buried in ground directly but in a non-metallic pipe.

In case of wiring in conduits, a separate earth conductor of PVC copper ofappropriate size shall run.

For ring main circuits, the earth conductor shall also complete the ring.

Where a means of earthing has not been provided by QGEWC, the consumer'searthing terminal shall be connected by the earthing lead to an effective earthelectrode or electrodes, such as copper strip or rod, which shall be buried in theground at a position as near as practicable to the consumer's earthing terminal.Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the summer

water table by a minimum of 2 meters.

Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in a pitmeasuring 300 mm. x 300 mm. The connection shall be either soldered orclamped. The pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on eachpit.

Bonding

i. Where metal works other than current carrying conductors is liable to becomecharged with electricity in such a manner as to create a danger, if the insulationof a conductor should occur in any apparatus:

a. The metal work shall be earthed in such a manner as will ensure immediateelectrical discharge without danger.

OR

b. Other adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger.

In a situation which may be normally wet or damp, where electrical apparatus ispresent and might give rise to danger and where there are substantial exposedmetal parts of other services (such as gas and water pipes, sinks and baths), theearth continuity conductor of the electrical installation shall be effectively

connected, electrically and mechanically to all such metal parts and to anyexposed metal work of the electrical apparatus.

A separate green/yellow PVC insulated copper bonding lead shall be taken fromthe earthing terminal of the water heater and bonded to the metal pipe work onboth sides of the pump.

Where water pumps are installed a bonding lead shall be taken from the earthingterminal of the local isolator and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides ofthe pump.




AEB 695-07/200887


The size of bonding lead shall be the same as the earth continuity conductor ofthe circuit subject to a minimum size of 2.5 mm sq.


General

The contractor shall fully test and commission the whole of the electricalinstallation in accordance with QGEWC/IEE regulations and also in accordancewith the following clauses.

The test shall be recorded in detail and the results submitted to the Consultant.The contractor shall then demonstrate that the installations are properlycommissioned, that they operate in the correct manner and are capable offunctioning to accomplish the design intention as outlined herein.

Site Tests

Site testing of all systems and components comprising the works shall be carriedout in the presence and to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant after thecontractor has first satisfied himself that the installation is functioning properly.

The contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labourand materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall beresponsible for and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all the testinstruments supplied by him.

The contractor shall give the Consultant, notice in writing when any portion of theelectrical installation is complete. Should the Consultant or his representative

not attend within 7 days of receipt of such written notice, the contractor mayproceed with the test, however duplicate certified copies of the results obtainedshall be forwarded the Consultant.

All electrical installations, plant and equipment tests shall fully satisfy therequirements of the Ministry of Electricity and Water, State of Qatar and thoselaid down in the IEE regulations as issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers,16th edition.

The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all safetydevices etc., as required by QGEWC. Once the contractor has satisfied himselfthat the installation complies with QGEWC requirements, he shall arrangeQGEWC to conduct their own test prior to handing over. Observations shall bemade of the operation and performance of the installation and subsequentreadjustments shall be made as necessary.

Records of commissioning and testing shall be kept and when the contractor hassatisfied himself that the installation is functioning correctly, the results shall becomprehensively reported in a bound copy to the Consultant.

Maintenance and Servicing




AEB 695-07/200888


The contractor shall be held responsible and shall replace any defective part ofall and every part of the works for the period of the guarantee from the date ofthe acceptance test carried out by the Consultant.

The contractor shall also be held liable for any cost of dismantling or re-erectionand making good of any works, which may have to be undertaken in order to

replace defective parts.

Electrical Tests

Following tests shall be carried out by the Contractor.

All alarm, control and protective circuits shall be tested for correct operation.

All lighting circuits shall be energized and checked to ensure that they are alloperational.

All single pole switches shall be checked to ensure correct polarity and that thelive conductor has been connected. Neutrals must not pass through any switch

All motors, plant and any electrical equipment connected with mechanicalservices shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct direction ofrotation and that they run without undue noise or vibration.

Test of Continuity of Ring Final Circuit

A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the earthcontinuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be tabulated.

Insulation Resistance Test

Insulation resistance test shall be made before a completed installation or majoralteration to an existing installation if permanently connected to the supply. Forthese tests, large installations may be divided into groups. A.D.C voltage notless than twice the normal voltage of the supply (R.M.S. value of a A.C supply)shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance provided that fortests on low voltage circuits, the test voltage need not exceed 500 v. D.C.

When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including if practicable,the main switch) closed and except where earthed concentric wiring is installedthe insulation resistance for whole installation shall not be less than 1 mega ohm.

When measured between all the conductors connected to any one pole or phaseof the supply and in turn all conductors connected to each other pole or phase ofthe supply, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm.

Wherever practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lampsshall be removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and alllocal switches controlling lamps or apparatus shall be closed; where the removalof lamps and/or the disconnection of current using apparatus is impracticable,




AEB 695-07/200889


the local switches controlling such lamps and/or apparatus shall be open. Thistest is not applicable to earthed concentric wiring system.

Where apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation resistance betweenthe case or framework and all live parts of each item of fixed apparatus shall bemeasured separately and shall comply with the requirements given in the

appropriate British Standard for the apparatus. If there is no appropriate BritishStandard, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega ohm.

Verification of Polarity & Phase Rotation

A verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single polecontrol devices are connected in the phase conductor only. The centre contactof Edison type screw lamp holders is connected to the phase conductor andouter metal threaded part is connected to neutral conductor. Wiring to plugs andsocket outlets should be such that they are connected with phase conductor onright when inspected from front. A proprietary type of polarity testing device shall

be used for the tests.

The complete installation shall be tested to ensure that all main switch gear isconnected to give the correct phase rotation.

Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test

The contractor or others responsible for the work shall test the effectiveness ofthe earthing of each completed installation by means of an earth fault loopimpedance test. This test shall be carried out by using earth fault loopimpedance test instrument.

General Commissioning

The contractor shall:

a. Set all units and apparatus to work

b. Adjust and set up all automatic controls, regulating devices, measure and adjustany plant under his responsibility, duties and ratings and performance of allcomponents for all items installed separately and integrated into the installationas a whole.

c. Record in detail each step and stage of commissioning and test results, reportingthe test stages until the tests are satisfactory.

d. The contractor shall carry out insulation, continuity, earth loop impedance,switching and sequencing, direction of rotation and all other tests required underthe IEE regulations, 16th edition.

e. Should the test carried out fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment iscorrectly installed and/or functioning correctly, the Consultant shall decidewhether such failure is due to negligence upon the contractor's part (including in




AEB 695-07/200890


this context as defined all his subcontractor's and suppliers) in which case, thecontractor shall carry out all remedial works entirely at his own expense.

f. After remedial works have been completed the Contractor shall again report tothe Consultant for further tests to be carried out. The Consultant's decision as towhat constitutes a satisfactory result shall be final.

Commissioning & Testing of Distribution System

The completed installation or parts thereof shall be subjected to acceptancetests as instructed by QGEWC or the Consultants before being connected to theSupply.

The following tests shall be included as applicable:

i. Tests as prescribed in the QGEWC regulations.

ii. Test in accordance with British Standards and Codes of Practice containedtherein.

iii. Insulation resistance

iv. Earth continuity

v. Continuity resistance of conductors and sheathing of each section and the wholeinstallation.

vi. Full load tests as required by the Consultant

vii. Current injection tests of all over-current devices and residual current operatedcircuit breakers etc.

These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Consultant. TheContractor shall give 7 days written notice of any intention to carry out any of thetests.

21.2.28 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

The contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practicalcompletion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free ofany defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any partfound defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by thecontractor.

If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceedto do so by another agency at the contractor's entire risk and expense withoutprejudice to any rights of the Client.

21.2.29 SPARES




AEB 695-07/200891


When making submittals for approval of items of equipment, the contractor shallinclude a list of manufacturer's spares for 2 years running, further to theWarranty period. These shall be provided, procured and supplied under thiscontract. Prior to order, the contractor shall prepare in triplicate a submittallisting all spares for each item of equipment, clearly detailing manufacturer'sname, address telephone and telex numbers and spare part reference number,

together with component cost. The submittal shall be passed to the Consultantfor approval and only upon receipt of approval in writing from the Consultant maythe final order be placed.

Contractor shall also provide the following spares:

- 2 sets of Fuses for each type and size used along with fuse holder.- Spare MCBs as per the DB schedule- 10% of lamps of all types (min. 2 nos.)- Two set of lugs for each type & size of cable used.- 1 Set of Contactor for each type of C/O Panels and Motor Control Panels

Also the recommended spares for 2 Years standard operation and maintenancefor all the following specialized systems shall be included – procured andsupplied:

a) Fire Alarm Systemb) PA and Voice Alarm Systemc) CCTV and Access Control System

It should be noted that no spare materials are to be brought on site until thecompletion of the contract when arrangements for all spares shall be made andformally handed over to the Client or his representative.




AEB 695-07/200892


21.2.30 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING HEIGHTS

1. Lighting Switches : 1250 mm. AFFL

2. 20 A DP switch for water heater and : 1250 mm. AFFLwater cooler

3. Mirror light : To match with the mirror

4. 13 A socket outlet, computer terminal, : 450 mm AFFL orsocket, television outlet 250 mm. above(unless otherwise mentioned) worktop in kitchenand

Pantries

5. Cooker control unit : 1600 mm AFFL

6. Cooker low level connection outlet : 450 mm AFFL

7. Telephone outlet : 450 mm AFFL

8. Wall mounting telephone : 1350 mm AFFL

9. Thermostats : 1700 mm AFFL

10. Fire alarm indicator panel : 1500 mm AFFL

11. Fire alarm bell : 2200 mm AFFL

12. Manual call station : 1250 mm AFFL




AEB 695-07/200893



1. MV PANEL BIN GHALIB (QATAR)QATAR SWITCHGEAR(Qatar) ABB (UAE)

2. SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS MERLIN GERIN (FRANCE)& MEM (UK)

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS BILL TALISMAN (UK)

3 FUSE SWITCHES, SWITCH FUSES ABB STROMBERG-SWEDEN,ISOLATORS SQUARE D (UK)

MEM (UK)

4 BUSBAR RISER MEM POWER, BARDUCT

5 CABLES DUCAB (UAE),RIYADH CABLEOMAN CABLE (OMAN)

6 MICC CABLES PYROTENAX BICC, AEIWREXHAM

7 CABLE TRAY DAVIS (U.K)

WIBE (SWEDEN)EGA/MK

8 CABLE TRUNKING EGA/MKBARTON (UK)BURNTUBES, DAVIS

9 UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING ACKERMANNMK (UK), SALAMANDRE

10 G.I. CONDUITS, AND FITTINGS BARTON, EGA/MK

11 PVC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS, EGA, DECODUCTCLIPSAL

12 FLEXIBLE FIRE CABLE FP 200 GOLD, PIRELLI, FIRECELL

13 WIRING ACCESSORIES MK (UK),LEGRAND (FRANCE)MEM(UK)




AEB 695-07/200894


14 FIRE ALARM EST (CANADA)SIEMENS PYROTENAXGENERAL ELECTRIC (USA)

15 EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING JSB, VENTILUX, FITZGERALD

16 EARTHING W.J. FURSE (UK), AN WALLIS (UK)ERICO

17 SKIRTING TRUNKING M.K., MITA, CLIPSAL

18 SECURITIES, ACCESS CONTROL MOLYNX (UK)CCTV VIDEOTRONIX

COMELITGENERAL ELECTRIC (USA)

19. LIFT OTIS, MITSUBISHI, HITACHI

20. UPS MERLIN GERIN (FRANCE)SAFT (SWEDEN), ALPHATEC (CANADA)

21. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ABB, PHILIPS, PANASONICMERTEN (GERMANY)

22 MUSIC & SOUNDSYSTEM MERLAND (FRANCE)

RCF (ITALY)PHILIPS

23. LIGHT FIXTURES RIDI (GERMANY), REGIOLUX (GERMANY)PHILIPS (HOLLAND), THORN (UK)REGGIANI (ITALY), IGGUZINI (ITALY)ERCO (GERMANY), REISS (GERMANY)THORLUX (UK), FITZGERALD (UK),FRANKLITE (UK), EGOLUCE (ITALY)

24. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT KOPPEX, BURN TUBES, BARTON




AEB 695-07/200895


21.2.32 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

Type A 2 x 36 watts, surface mounted fluorescent fitting with injection mouldedpolycarbonate body with surrounding sealing edge and molded ondiffuser holding clips with acrylic glass diffuser pearled inside, IP 67protection, as REGIOLUX POFW2/36W.

Type A+E same as above but with emergency pack.

Type A1 2 x 36 watts surfaced mounted fluorescent fitting with sheet steelhousing opal acrylic diffuser IP 50 protection, as REGIOLUX KLKF 2/36.

Type A1+E same as above but with emergency pack.

Type A2 2 X 36 watts surface mounted fluorescent fitting with housing made of

stiff profiled sheet metal complete with white painted galvanized sheetsteel reflector as REGIOLUX ILF2/36+SMR.

Type B 2 x 36 watts TCF lamp surface mounted round luminaire with housingmade of deep drawn sheet steel ,roud bomb shaped acrylic diffuser withopal structure surface, dia 492mm complete with built in emergency packfor 3 hour duration as REGIOLUX WBRL 2/36

Type C 2 x 26watts ,TC_DE lamp recessed downlight with diecast aluminiumbody, highly polished anodized, aluminium reflector with safety glass,black powder coated metal ballast box, IP33 with highly electronic ballast

as RZB 911009.952.79

Type C+E same as above but with emergency pack.

Type C1 2 x 26watts TC-D lamp recessed downlight wiyh polycarbonate body,highly polished metalized polycarbonate reflector with low loss ballast andsemi frosted polycarbonate cover, IP 44 as RZB911052.952+981526.012

Type CH 10 x 18 watts TC-TE lamp pendent luminaire with large spattered effectacrylic bowl on nickel metal work with graphite inlay design. Dia 820mm,drop 1090mm as FRANKLITE PE 33210 FL.

Type D 2 x 55 watts TC-L lamp recessed luminaire with sheet steel body powdercoated with pearl finished, optical system consist of RAL 9003 powdercoated reflector and perforated lamp cover complete with electronicballast as INDIRECT CSL2.

Type D+E same as above but with emergency pack.




AEB 695-07/200896


Type ML 2 x 36 watts TC-L lamp wall mounted mirror light with mouldedpolycarbonate body and transparent polycarbonate screen with reededinternal texture satin finished with chrome finished endcaps, IP 44protection as IGUZZINE SIMPLA.

Type R Aviation obstruction light, GRP base painted aviation yellow, glass bowl

with presuel prism, coloured red. Twin omni directional red low intensityas THORN AVIATION F-22. or equal and approved.

Type W 1 x 50 watts MBF lamp wall light with diecast aluminium housing andprotective cage, black powder coated finished with opal glass diffuser,IP54 as RZB 58310.713

Type W1 1 x 18watts TC-D lamp wall light with base, protection cage made of diecast aluminium with glass diffuser frosted inside, IP54 protection as RZB50730.963

Type W2 1 x 75watts HSG/QT lamp wall mounted outdoor light with fixture plateand the structure made in die-cast plated aluminium, prior to process ofphosphocromation, in polyester powder , thermically tempered glass,version with lens 8degree and 20degree IP 54 protection as Zelda712753.

W3 2X70 W Hit lamp up down wall light with extruded aluminum body, polysterpowder coated finish with tempered. Transparent glass diffuser, IP 54 as ARES VISCA 727200.

+E (Stair) Surfaced mounted 1 X 8 Watts, fitting shall have grey plastic, halogen

free enclosure with clear cover quick mounting set. Fitting shall allowsingle monitoring with address. Fitting shall have the automatic out forfaigres within the lamp circuit. Switching model can be freelyprogrammable with surface emergency lighting system. IP41 completewith electronic ballast, lamp, etc. as CEAG SL51011.1 or equal and asapproved.

+E (Basement) Surface mounted 1X 8 watts, light fitting, light grey enclosure andstructured cover shall be made of polycarbonate EVG and ENEC testmark certified by independent testing lab, with integrated monitoringfacility. Fitting shall single monitoring with address switched for 20address fitting shall have the automatic cutout for failure within the lamp

circuit. Switching models shall be freely programmable with suitable.Emergency lighting system. IP 65 AS CEAG SL 6011.1 CES or equal andas approved.

EXIT (Basement Car park) 1 X 8 Watts pendent double sided fluorescent light fitting.Fitting shall have grey enclosure made of 850ºC glow wireresistant, halogen free polycarbonate, clear cover withthree self adhesive legend foils, Pendent set with quickmounting set with terminals and distance plates. Fittingshall allow single monitoring with address-switches for 20




AEB 695-07/200897


addresses. Fitting shall have the automatic cutout forfailure within the lamp circuit. Switching modes shall befreely programmable with suitable emergency lightingsystem complete with electronic ballast lamp etc. EVG and

ENEC test mark, certified from independent testing lab. IN

IP54 Construction. Type of legend shall suit the

requirements as indicated in the drawing. As “ CEAG

STYLE RZ 22021.1 CG-S” or equal and as approved.

EXIT (Lobbies) 1 X 8 watts ceiling mounted EXIT luminaries with whiterectangular section enclosure, fitting shall have easy reclampingfacility. Fitting shall be with single sided silk screened legendpanels. Fitting shall allow single monitoring with address switchesfor 20 addresses. Switching modes shall be freely programmablewith suitable emergency lighting system complete with electronicballast, lamp etc. EVG and ENEC test mark, certified from

independent testing lab with integrated monitoring facility. IN IP20

Construction. Type of legend shall suit the requirements aslocated in the drawing. AS “ CEAG RZ 1708 CG-S “ or equal andas approved.

+E (Lobby / Corridors) Recessed ceiling luminaries 1 x 8 watts, enclosure madeof steel, bezel painted, structured plastic cover, EVG withENEC test mark, interacted monitoring facility. Allowssingle luminaries monitoring with 20 address. Automaticcutout for failure within lamp circuit. Switching mode freelyprogrammable. Complete with electronic ballast, lamp etc.

As CEAG SL8011 CGS.

Type Exit



SECTION 22

AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION



MIXED USE BUILDING -IBMS 695-07Technical Specifications Arab Engineering Bureau

AEB 695-071

Section 22.0- Air-conditioning InstallationRev 0


22.1.00 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

22.1.02 MAJOR EQUIPMENT AND LOCAL REPRESENTATION

22.1.03 STANDARD OF WORKS

22.1.04 DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER

22.1.05 DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS, INSTRUCTIONS, MANUAL ETC.

22.1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

22.1.07 TEST AT SITE

22.1.08 COMMISSIONING BY SPECIALISTS.

22.1.09 PRACTICAL COMPLETION




AEB 695-072


22.2.00 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN

22.2.02 DESCRIPTION OF AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION SYSTEM

22.2.03 EQUIPMENT OF AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM

22.2.03.01 AIR COOLED PACKAGED LIQUID CHILLERS

22.2.03.02 TREATED FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT

22.2.03.03 FAN COIL UNITS

22.2.03.04 MINI SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

22.2.04 CHILLED WATER PUMPS

22.2.05 PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE

22.2.06 VENTILATION EQUIPMENTS

22.2.06.01 ROOF MOUNTED TWIN EXHAUST FAN

22.2.06.02 ROOF MOUNTED SINGLE CABINET FAN

22.2.06.03 WALL MOUNTED FAN

22.2.06.04 PLATE MOUNTED AXIAL FAN

22.2.06.05 IMPULSE CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM

22.2.06.06 STAIRWELL / LIFTWELL /ESCAPE ROUTE PRESSURISATION FANS

22.2.06.07 SMOKE CLEARANCE VENTS

22.2.07 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

22.2.08 TEST HOLES

22.2.09 INSTRUMENTS & GAUGES

22.2.10 INTERFACING WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM /BMS SYSTEM

22.2.11 INTER – DISCIPLINE CO-ORDINATION

22.2.12 SHEET METAL WORK

22.2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

22.2.14 FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCT

22.2.15 AIR TERMINALS




AEB 695-073


22.2.16 FRESH AIR INTAKE

22.2.17 DAMPERS

22.2.18 SOUND ATTENUATORS

22.2.19 ACOUSTIC PROVISIONS

22.2.20 PIPEWORK & FITTINGS

22.2.21 INSULATION

22.2.22 BUILDERS WORK

22.2.23 CHILLED WATER TREATMENT

22.2.24 PAINTING & FINISHING

22.2.25 IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING

22.2.26 ELECTRICAL WORKS & CONTROL SYSTEM

22.2.27 WARRANTY

22.2.28 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER

22.2.29 COMMISSIONING SHEETS

22.2.30 SCHEDULE & EXPLANATORY NOTES






AEB 695-074


22.1.00 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The work under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery to site,installation, testing and commissioning, setting to work and Maintenance of the Air

Conditioning, Ventilation and Exhaust System of the proposed Mixed use building ( 3B + G

+ M + 9 ) @ B-ring road ,Doha,Qatar for Mr.Ali Mohammed Jaidah.

The contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances for thesupply, installation, testing and commissioning of the work and all other minor andincidental works necessary for the system.

Contractor shall guarantee for the efficient performance of various equipment which shallnot be less than the specified ratings when working under the operating conditions for therespective items as given in the specifications.

It is mandatory to have performance testing under simulated conditions at the factory ofprospective suppliers of chillers, pumps and Air handling units etc. prior to shipment. Anything, not specifically mentioned, but necessary for the fulfilment of the guarantee andrequirements called for in the contract or necessary for the proper operation of theinstallations is to be provided by the works contractor without any additional cost.

Any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among contract documents, orany doubts as to their meaning should be called to the attention of the Engineers by theworks contractor at the time of submitting his tender.

The works contractor shall guarantee holding a full set of spare-parts for all of theequipment he intends to supply and install, for a minimum period of two years. In addition,the contractor shall include for the supply of the said spares, which shall be deliveredbefore the issue of the practical completion certificate.

The contractor shall submit the lump sum price for the whole works with a breakdown forindividual headings as per the Bill of Quantities. No variation claims shall be entertained.

Entire A/C & Ventilation works shall be carried out as a single contract.

The contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer assign or sublet hiscontract or any substantial part thereof other than for raw materials or minor details.

Consent for subletting shall not relieve the contractor from any obligation, duty orresponsibility under the contract.

The contractor shall comply with all bye-laws and regulations of local and other statutoryauthorities having jurisdiction over the works and shall be responsible for the payment ofall fees and other charges and the giving and receiving of all necessary notices.

Works shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications and in coordination with thearchitectural / structural / other services requirements /constraints.

The contractor shall submit within seven days from the date of acceptance of the tender,detailed schedules showing the programme and order in which the contractor proposes tocarry out the works with dates and estimated completion time for various parts of the work




AEB 695-075


in the form of bar-chart based on “the critical path method”. Such schedules shall beapproved by the Engineer before starting of the work and shall be binding on thecontractor.

Routine tests for various items of equipment shall be performed at the con tractor‟s works,

prior to shipment and test certificate furnished. Contractor shall facilitate certified thirdparty to be present during these tests. Contractor shall bear all the expenses thereof.

The contractor shall operate, test and adjust all air conditioning, ventilation and exhaustsystem units, fans, motors, all air handling units provided in connection with this installationand shall make all necessary adjustments and corrections thereof including the adjustmentof all regulations, dampers for the purpose of equalizing the flow of air to and through allducts to each and every outlet and inlet.

If the completed plant or any portion thereof before it is taken over or during the guaranteeand defects liability period be found defective or fails to fulfil the intent of this specification,the contractor shall on receipt of notice from the Engineer forthwith make the defectiveplant good. Should he fail to do so within a time considered reasonable by the Engineer,the owner may reject and replace at the risk and expense of the contractor the whole orany portion of the plant, which is defective or fails to fulfil the requirements of the contract.

The contractor appointed for A/C works shall have „A‟ Grade Credentials to demonstratehis reputation and sufficient experience in similar nature of jobs to the satisfaction of theEngineer. The contractor shall also submit the qualifications and experience particulars ofthe A/C Engineer, A/C Foreman and A/C Technicians to be employed on the project alongwith their Credentials copies, and obtain approval from the Engineer.

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications shall mean:

Engineer : Consultant M/s Arab Engineering Bureau,Qatar.

Contractor: The tenderer whose tender has been accepted by the Owner and shallinclude the tenderers‟ heirs, successors and assigns approved by theowner

Subcontractor: The firm or persons named in the contract for any part of the work or anyperson to whom any part of the work has been sublet with the consent inwriting of the Owner / Engineers and shall include his heirs, successorsand assigns approved by the owner.

Specification: The specification annexed to or issued with these Conditions of Contract

Contract: The agreement between the Contractor and owner to be entered intounder these conditions and shall include these conditions of contract,specifications, schedules, correspondence, letter of intent of the ownerand any subsequent amendment mutually agreed upon.

Site: The place or places at which the plant is to be delivered or work to bedone by the Contractor and shall include where applicable the lands andbuildings upon or in which the works are to be executed and shall alsoinclude the place or places at which fabrication and other work will becarried out by the contractor.




AEB 695-076


Plant, Equipment, Stores: The plant and materials to be provided and Works and Workor Works to be done by the contractor under the contract

Test on Completion: Tests as are prescribed by the specification or as per Internationalstandards as applicable, to be carried out before the plant is taken

over by the owner. In case, tests are not possible due to climaticconditions at the time of completion, the contractor shall be boundto carry out tests at any time subsequent to the date of completion,but before the end of defects liability period.

Inclusions in the list of approved manufacturers do not absolve the supplier/contractor ofhis obligations to fulfil the detailed specifications in accordance with contract documents.

Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted bythe contractor who resorts to canvassing is liable to be rejected.

22.1.02 MAJOR EQUIPMENT AND LOCAL REPRESENTATION

The make, model and type of all equipment, materials and accessories proposed to beused in the Project are subject to prior approval of the Engineer.

All these equipment and other materials must have an established Local Qatari Agentwho shall have complete after-sales service & maintenance facility and also holdsadequate spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer.

22.1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS FOR WORKS

Unless otherwise specified, all equipment is to comply with the relevant British and American codes of practice as listed below. However, the QCS latest regulations shalltake prominence over all other regulations.

QCS : Qatar Construction Specification

ASHRAE: American society of heating, refrigerating and air conditioningEngineers, USA

NFPA : National Fire Protection Association, USA

IHVE: The institute of heating and ventilation engineers (UK

ASME: American society of Mechanical engineers, USA

AMCA: Air movement and control association, USA

ARI: Air conditioning and Refrigeration institute, USA

ASTM: American society of testing materials, USA

AWS: American welding society, USA

DW 142: Specification for sheet metal duct work, UK

HI: Hydraulic Institute, USA




AEB 695-077


ANSI: American National standards Institute, USA

CIBSE: Chartered Institute of Building services Engineers, UK

AABC: Associated Air balancing Council, USA

The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air-conditioninginstallation.

A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract. Thewhole of the installation shall be executed in conformity with the specification,internationally accepted codes of practice and the current QCS regulations.

22.1.04 DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER

Technical data of all equipments proposed, performance curves, selection data sheet etc.as applicable.Exclusions and deviations from specification.Guarantee particulars.List of spare parts required for 2 years maintenance.Engineering catalogues.

22.1.05 DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS, INSTRUCTIONS, MANUALS ETC.

General

All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be suppliedto the Engineer as laid in the specifications or as instructed by the Engineer.

Shop Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor

The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed coordinated shopdrawings for all equipment or distribution services described herein. Such drawings shallindicate :

All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc.

ii. The physical dimensions of the equipment.

iii. The sizes of foundation base wherever required.

iv. Location of centre bolts to base.

v. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc.

vi. Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems.

vii. Piping isometric diagram

Any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Engineer for co-ordination ofworks.




AEB 695-078


The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked by theContractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and proper co-ordination. Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings showing the exact method ofinstalling and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all connections.

All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three sets ofblue prints to the Engineer for approval, who in turn, after making his comments willreturn two sets of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any. Thereafterthe Contractor shall submit five sets of blue prints for the Engineer's final approval. Oncethe drawings are finally approved, the contractor shall submit in reproducible copynegative for Engineer's signature and the same shall be kept on site for execution.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all Mechanical works to match with theexisting structure of the building and the proposed arch and interior design of the buildingincluding but limited to grilles, equipment, pipes, light fittings, false ceiling layout andother services to allow a completely symmetrical and co-ordinated installation.

As Built Drawings

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a set of 'As-Built' drawings showing theworks 'As-Built' together with any other information necessary for operation andmaintenance. Four copies of each such drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two setsof copy negatives for each drawing shall be handed over to the client.

Material Submittals and Samples

Submittals

The Contractor shall furnish submittals in triplicate or as required for all the equipmentsand materials to the Engineer.

On award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide a list of the items for which theypropose to furnish submittals. All submissions shall be made within 15 days of the awardof the contract or earlier as directed by the Engineer.

The following information should at least be covered while furnishing the submittals:

i. Reference number of the specification clause and BOQ.

ii. A comparison of the salient points of the equipment/material offered vis-à-visspecified like capacity, size, model no. Etc.

iii. A confirmation that the item offered complies fully with the specifications,drawings and the application in question. Deviations, if any, shall be clearly speltout and reasons shall be given for the changes proposed.

iv. Complete technical literature for the particular item. In case only generalcatalogues are available, the particular item/features offered should be statedclearly on a separate sheet and also marked on the catalogues. Points notapplicable should be struck-off.




AEB 695-079


v. Confirmation that equipment/material proposed can be housed within the spaceavailable.

vi. General requirement drawings.

vii. Samples, wherever required by the Engineer.

The approval of a submittal shall not absolve the Contractor of their responsibility toprovide equipment's/materials/services conforming to the Specifications, Bill of Quantitiesand the application in question. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply,installation, testing, commissioning and proper performance of a complete functionalsystem even though some items may not have been specifically stated in the contractdocuments.

Waivers for deletion/deviation from the Specification, Tender drawings, Bill of Quantitiesetc., must be requested by the Contractor in writing, stating categorically the changecompared to the contract (specified vis-à-vis proposed). The same shall be considered'waived' only if written specific approval is obtained from the Engineer. The approval of asubmittal, any implicit reference or verbal instructions shall not be treated as a waiver.Waivers shall also be subject to reduction in cost and/or time, conditional or unconditionalas decided by the Engineer.

Material Status Report

A material status report shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted every twoweeks or earlier as directed by the Engineer. The report shall indicate the following:

i. Description of the material/equipment

ii. Name of the manufacturer/supplieriii. Submittals Numberiv. Date of submission of submittalv. Date of approval of submittalvi. Order number/date and L.C reference, if anyvii. Delivery period and expected arrival date on siteviii. Remarks, if any

Samples of materials

The Contractor shall submit at no extra cost or charge, samples of materials as requiredby the Engineer for his approval.

MANUALS

The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of three copies of the InstructionManuals before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include thefollowing items:

i. Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actuallysupplied, including serial nos. & all nameplate details.

ii. A set of 'As-Built' drawings showing equipment layout, foundation details, ductinglayout and details, electrical wiring & drain piping. The drawings shall show plansand sections necessary to show all required information correctly.




AEB 695-0710


iii. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawingsrelevant only to the particular item of air conditioning and ventilation equipmentconcerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable.

iv. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment.

v. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stoppingand seasonal shutdown.

vi. Preventive maintenance routine at monthly, quarterly, half yearly and yearlyintervals and maintenance procedures for all plant and equipment.

The O & M instructions shall be in English. Also a CD Rom containing all above information shall be submitted.

STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

All materials and equipment must be stored and protected properly so as to preventdamage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration.

All duct and pipe outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt penetrationduring the course of erection.

22.1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Quality of Equipment and Materials

All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality accepted by the Engineerand presenting no dent, damage or breakage during transportation or installation.

All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by properly storing,packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject to the Engineer's approval, shallbe cleaned of corrosion products and given two coats of anti-rust paint before installation.

Instructions for Operation and Routine Maintenance

The Contractor shall provide written instructions in English language as to the method ofoperation of equipment and the routine maintenance works. (Cleaning of air f ilters etc.)

Three copies of such instructions shall be handed over to the Engineer.

Paint, Tags, Nameplates

All steel works in connection with supports for ductwork etc., exposed to the elements areto be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc richprimer and two coats of enamel paint of grey or as approved by the Engineer.

All exposed metal surfaces of refrigeration and electrical apparatus, motors, guards, un-insulated ductwork, ductwork brackets, hangers etc., must be painted with one coat ofunder-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to approved colour




AEB 695-0711


22.1.07 TEST AT SITE

General

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of

commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete test procedures to be used.The Engineer shall approve the procedures, method of calculation etc., before any test iscarried out. Three (3) copies of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer for hisapproval.

The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carryout testsof any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a complete system ifthe Engineer requests such a test, for determining specified or guaranteed data as givenin the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled in by the Contractor. Any damage resulting from the test shall be repaired and/or damaged material replaced,all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event of any repair or adjustment required tobe made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall berecommended after the adjustments or repairs have been completed. The test shall notbe void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. All testing, balancing andfinal adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of the applicable 'ASHRAE'standards

Ductwork

All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air quantitiesshall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and splitter dampersshall be tested for proper operation.

Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC certified independent agency.

Equipment

All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted andbalanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet on thedrawings.

Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation, functioningand performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment orsystem during tests.

If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the sheaves orthe available horsepower, the Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with thebalancing of air distribution system.

Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed tothe satisfaction of the Engineer.

Electrical Equipment

All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of power asmentioned below:




AEB 695-0712


i. Wire and cable tests.

ii. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits andequipments using a 500-volt megger. The megger reading shall not be less thanone meg.ohm.

iii. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must notExceed half ohm.

iv. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.

v. Operating tests on all protective relays, starters, circuit breakers etc., to provetheir correct operation before energizing the main equipment.

vi. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc.

vii. Any other required as per KAHRAMAA regulations.

Test on Completion

After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible forrunning a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of theplant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are met orapproximated. The ventilation trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to theapproval of the Engineer. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31) consecutivedays during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously withoutreadjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the refrigeratingand air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more than threepercent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall be taken for theentering and leaving air of each air-handling unit. Should any part of the apparatus orsystem fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be adjusted, repaired orreplaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete performance test shall thenbe repeated. The date of commencement of the above said tests shall be subject toagreement with the Engineer.

As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the opinion ofthe Engineer, a formal letter of completion shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and

signed by the Enginee

During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment andapparatus fulfil the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all fans,refrigeration and air-conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all dampers,thermostats and controls and shall provide the Engineer with a complete log and reportindicating air quantities, fan speed etc.

Maintenance Test

During the last month of the 400 days Maintenance period, the Contractor shalldemonstrate to the Engineer that all equipment and systems are operating according tothe capacities and the manner set down in the specifications.




AEB 695-0713


The maintenance test shall include but not limited to.

1. Full maintenance and checking for chillers including refrigerant charge andcontrollers.

2. Chilled water distribution system including pumps, vibration isolators, balancing of thepiping network, chemical dosing charge, system cleaning air venting etc.

3. All airside equipments & distribution duct work including TFAHU/FCU filters, fans,coils, belts and system balancing.

4. Smoke clearance system /stairwell-liftwell pressurisation system /smoke detector inreturn duct of FCU /car park ventilation system - interfacing with fire alarm system.

5. BMS full checking including interfacing with other LV Systems.

The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor until all plant &equipment has been tested to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

22.1.08 COMMISSIONING BY SPECIALISTS

It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to arrange for the testing andcommissioning of complete HVAC works including the hydronic and air balancing by acertified third party as approved by the Engineer.

22.1.09 PRACTICAL COMPLETION

The Contractor shall deliver the Operation and Maintenance Manuals along with 'As built'drawings to the Client before practical completion. The completion certificate will beissued by the Engineer after obtaining the “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” and “AsBuilt” Drawings.

Recommendation for release or the release of practical completion certificate would notabsolve the contractor of his responsibility to provide an installation complete in allrespects and in satisfactory working order. If any item is discovered later, duringcommissioning, maintenance period or at F.C.C stage to be short supplied or not inworking order, the contractor shall be liable to make good the same to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.




AEB 695-0714


22.2.00 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN

Outdoor Design ConditionsSummer: 46° C DB / 30° C WBWinter: 10°

C DB / 90% RH

Typical conditions of coastal environment prevails with frequent sandstorms.The atmosphere can be salt & sand laden with dust particles down to 2 microns.

Indoor Design Conditions (summer)

Retail spacesOffice areas : 22.5 °C DB / 50% RHEntrance lobby

Toilets & Pantries: 24.5° C DB / 50% RH (Indirect cooling)

Indoor dry bulb throttling range shall be +/-10C. Space Humidity may vary between 40%

and 60%, but is expected to lie within the comfort zone as set by ASHRAE standard.

Lighting Load : 20 W / Sq.m

Small Power Load : 15 W/ sq.m

Occupancy Rate : As per usual norms

Fresh Air Rate : Min.1 air change / hour,as per QCS

Ventilation rate (Extract rate)

Toilets: 10 air changes /hr.Pantry area: 10 air changes /hr.

HVAC System Noise Level in unoccupied Spaces

Open Offices NC 35

Halls, corridors, lobbies NC 40Service / support areas NC 40

Note:

Sound level meter of ANSI type 1 or type 2 with octave band filters to beemployed for sound level measurements.

Sound level shall be measured within 1m from the source in the unoccupiedspace.

Measured sound levels shall be interpreted by plotting the values on the NCcurves




AEB 695-0715


The above sound levels shall be achieved by the following methods:

Design of air distribution system to minimize flow resistance and turbulence.

Selection of grilles and diffusers to limit the noise level.

Selecting a fan that generates the lowest possible noise, but still meets therequired design conditions for which it is selected.

Design duct connections at both the fan inlet and outlet for uniform andstraight air flow.

Selection of suitable sound attenuators for air handling unit supply air mainduct and return air main duct.

When possible, locate elbows and duct branch take offs at least four to five ductdiameters from each other to minimize flow-generated noise.

Use turning vanes in larger 90° rectangular elbows and branches take offs.

Turning vanes provide a smoother transition in which the air can change direction,thus reducing turbulence.

Place grilles, diffusers and registers in occupied spaces as far as possible fromelbows and branch take offs.

Minimize the use of volume control dampers near grilles, diffusers and registers inacoustically critical situations.

Roof mounted TFAHU-s/ roof mounted fans shall be mounted on suitable antivibration springs for isolating from the building structure. Ceiling mounted FCU-s

shall be hung from the ceiling using spring type anti vibration hangers having steelframe and helical compression type springs with min. 25 mm deflection.

FCU inlet and outlet and TFAHU outlet shall have flexible connectors. Exhaustfan inlet shall also have flexible connectors.

Acoustic liner with zero fibre migration shall be provided for ductwork of ceilingmounted FCU up to a length of 3.0 meter from the face of the unit.Sound attenuators shall be used for TFAHU supply ducts.

Chillers shall be mounted on cased spring type anti-vibration mounts with 50 mmdeflection. Chillers shall be mounted on floating floor foundation.

Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out ofreinforced concrete or concrete filled welded steel framework. The inertia blocksshall be mounted over cased spring mounts with min. 25 mm deflection.

Project Specific Fire and Safety Philosophy

Smoke detectors shall be positioned in the return air ductwork of AHU and FCUs.Anyfire situation sensed by the smoke detectors shall shut off the relevant unit through thefire annunciation panel.

Fire dampers having min. 2 hrs fire integrity shall be provided at the following locations:




AEB 695-0716


All ductwork crossing firewalls.

Supply and return air ductwork at each fire zone crossing.

Ducts entering and leaving shafts.

Ducts through floors and not encased in fire shafts.

Ducts leaving and entering plant rooms.

Suitable fire stop material shall be provided at all fire wall penetrations with firedamper through which duct passes through.

Rating for Continuous Service and Local Ambient Conditions

The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 50° C DB. All apparatus andequipments shall be rated for continuous service, twenty four hours a day, year roundthroughout its normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The contractorshall offer equipment, which is capable of operating at the ambient temperature of 50

0C

DB without any failure.

Building Pressurization

The building shall be maintained at positive pressure. Toilets and Pantries shall bemaintained at negative pressure.

Estimated Service Lives of Various HVAC System Components

Equipment / Item Median Years

Package Chillers 20

Base mounted pumps 20

Ductwork 30

Dampers 20

Roof mounted fans 20

Split A/C units 10

Air terminals (diffusers, grilles, register) 27

Moulded insulation 20

Fan-coil units / AHUs 20

Electric motors 18

Motor starters 17

Valve actuators 10

Electric controls 16

Shell-and-tube heat exchangers 24

Building Performance Mandates

HVAC design shall ensure the following building performance mandates:

Thermal performance

Indoor air quality

Acoustical performance (HVAC aspects only)

Fire safety related with HVAC system

Thermal performance shall include the air temperature, humidity, air speed, andcontrols.




AEB 695-0717


Indoor air quality shall be achieved in compliance with ASHRAE standard 62.1-2007Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality. Fresh air intake assembly where provided,shall be complete with sand trap louver; 50 mm thick washable filter and volume controldamper to ensure adequate quality and quantity of fresh air to the system. Test methodfor air filters shall be as per ASHRAE Standard 52.1.

Acoustical performance (HVAC aspects ) shall be ensured by proper engineering of thesystem as a whole.

Fire safety related with HVAC System shall be ensured as per the project specific fireand safety philosophy mentioned elsewhere.

Principal Design Codes / Standards

QCS: Qatar Construction Specifications – Section 22 ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers, USACIBSE: Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers, UKSMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air -Conditioning Contractors‟ National Association, USA. DW-142: Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork. ARI: Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, USA. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association, USA. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, USA. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, USA. AWS: American Welding Society, USA ADC: Air Diffusion Council, USA. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council, USANFPA: National Fire Protection Association, USA.

BSI: British Standards Institution, UK. ASA: Acoustical Society of America, USA.ISO: International Organization for Standardization, SwitzerlandUL: Underwriters Laboratories, USA.NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau, USA.ISA: International Society for Measurement and Control, USA.NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer‟s Association, USA.

Practices, methods or standards published by the above-indicated organizations shall beused as a guideline for this project. However the minimum requirements as specified inlocal regulations will be fulfilled

22.2.02 Description of Air -Conditioning and Ventilation System

The air conditioning scheme of the project is based on central chilled water systemcomprising air-cooled chillers, circulation pumps, Treated fresh air handling units, fan coilunits, network of ducting, piping, fittings, valves and controls.

3 nos. Air cooled screw chillers and 4 nos.chilled water pumps shall be located on theroof as shown on the plan.

Each office space shall have multiple ceiling mounted ducted type FCU Entrance lobby/lift lobby in ground floor and office floors will have individual ducted

type FCU. Retail shops in ground floor shall be served by ducted type FCU Mezzanine floor retail shops and lobby will have cassette type chilled water FCU




AEB 695-0718


First /second/ third Basement lift lobby shall be served by cassette type chilled waterFCU

Chilled water pump room shall be served by decorative type wall mounted chilled

water FCU.

2 nos.Central TFAHU located on the roof shall feed fresh air to all FCU s.

Decorative wall mounted split units (DX type)shall serve MV room, Q tel room, lift M/croom, fire command center,fire pump room and domestic pump room.

Toilets in each floor shall be connected to 4 nos. central roof mounted twin extractfan.

Pantry in each floor shall be connected to 3 nos. central roof mounted single cabinetfans.

storage room, pump room and transformer room shall have provision for forcedextract system.

Generator exhaust and ventilation system including allconnections,ducts,fittings,louvers,filters,etc.shall be as per the rating and make of theProposed generator.

Basement car park shall have impulse ventilation system for normal exhaust as wellas emergency smoke extract.Fresh air intake shall be via the ramp supplemented bya supply fan.The system shall be linked to the fire alarm panel.

Stairwell /liftwell pressurisation system which is linked to the fire alarm panel shall beprovided for life safety

Dedicated openable vertical glazed vents shall be provided for smoke clearance fromthe office space and retail area.Each vertical glazed vent shall be actuator operatedand linked to the fire alarm panel.

Escape route pressurization shall be achieved by dedicated fan on the roof.

22.2.03 EQUIPMENTS OF AIR -CONDITIONING SYSTEM

22.2.03.01 AIR COOLED PACKAGED LIQUID CHILLER

PART 1 — GENERAL

SCOPE

Supply, install,testing and commissioning of Microprocessor controlled, screw compressor, air-cooled, liquid chillers of the scheduled capacities as shown and indicated on the Drawings,

including but not limited to:1. Chiller package2. Charge of refrigerant and oil.3. Electrical power and control connections4. Chilled water connections5. Factory start-up

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products shall be Designed, Tested, Rated and Certified in accordance with, and installed in

compliance with applicable sections of the following Standards and Codes:1. ARI 550/590 - Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle2. ARI 370 – Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Equipment




AEB 695-0719


3. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration4. ASHRAE 34 – Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants5. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings6. ANSI/NFPA Standard 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).7. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

8. ASTM A48 – Gray iron Castings9. Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9002

10. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act.11. Conform to Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and provide U.L

listing label.

B. Factory Test: Chiller shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully charged with refrigerant andoil, and shall be factory operational run tested with water flowing through the vessel.

C. Chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained and supported service organization that iswithin a 50 mile radius of the site.

DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled and charged with refrigerant and oil by the

Manufacturer.

B. During shipment, provide protective covering over vulnerable components. Fit nozzles andopen ends with plastic enclosures.

C. Protect the chiller and its accessories from the weather and dirt exposure during shipment.

D. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturer‟s instructions.

PART 2 — PRODUCTS

GENERAL

A. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the General Contractor and allaffected Subcontractors to insure proper provisions for installation of the furnished unit. Thiscoordination shall include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Structural supports for the units.2. Piping size and connection/header locations.3. Electrical power requirements and wire/conduit and over current protection sizes.

B. Description: Supply,Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and plans, factoryassembled, charged, and operational tested air cooled screw compressor chiller(s) as specifiedherein. Chiller shall include, but is not limited to: a complete system with multiple independentrefrigerant circuits, semi-hermetic screw compressors, shell and tube type evaporator, air-cooled condenser, R134a refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety andoperating controls including capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, andspecial features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation.

C. Operating Characteristics:1. Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to ensure unit is capable

of operation from 0F to 125F ( -18C to 50C ) ambient.




AEB 695-0720


2. Provide capacity control system capable of reducing unit capacity to (10% for 2-compressor and below, 7.5% for 3 compressors and above) of full load. Compressorshall start in unloaded condition. Hot gas bypass, shall NOT be acceptable to meetspecified minimum load.

D. Cabinet: Unit panels, structural elements, control boxes and heavy gauge structural baseshall be constructed of galvanized steel. Unit panels, control boxes and structural base arefinished with a baked on powder paint. All painted surfaces shall be coated with baked onpowder paint which shall be further made weather proof.

COMPRESSORS AND MOTORS

A. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semihermetic, rotary screw type, including: muffler,temperature actuated „off -cycle‟ heater, rain-tight terminal box, discharge shut-off service valve,and precision machined cast iron housing. Design working pressure of entire compressor,suction to discharge, shall be 450 PSIG (31 bar).

B. Motors: Refrigerant suction gas cooled accessible hermetic compressor motor, full suction gasflow through 0.006” maximum mesh screen, with inherent internal thermal overload protectionand external current overload on all three phases.

C. Lubrication: External oil separators with no moving parts, 450 PSIG design working pressure.Refrigerant system differential pressure shall provide oil flow through service replaceable, 0.5micron, full flow cartridge type oil filter internal to compressor. Filter bypass, less restrictivemedia, or oil pump not acceptable.

D. Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Capacity control range from 100%to 10% of chiller full load. Provide Microprocessor control to command compressor capacity to

balance compressor capacity with cooling load.Capacity control system shall be both “valve-less” and “step-less” requiring no slide valve or capacity control valve(s) to operate at reducedcapacity

E. Compressor acoustic enclosure shall be employed.

REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Each independent refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve with charging port,

low side pressure relief device, removable core filter-drier, sight glass with moisture indicator,and electronic expansion valve.

B. Chiller manufacturer shall provide independent circuit for each compressor to providemaximum redundancy.

HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Evaporator:

1. Direct expansion type (refrigerant in the tubes, water on shell side) shell and tube evaporatorwith high efficiency copper tubes. Independence refrigerant circuits shall be provided percompressor.

2. Constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with applicable sections of ASME pressurevessel code for minimum 235 PSIG (16 bar) refrigerant side design working pressure and150psig (10 bar) water side design working pressure.

3. Shell covered with ¾” (19mm), flexible, closed-cell insulation, thermal conductivity of 0.26k

([BTU/HR-Ft2-F]/in.) maximum. Water nozzles with grooves for mechanical couplings, and




AEB 695-0721


insulated by Contractor after pipe installation.

4. Provide vent and drain fittings, and thermostatically controlled heaters to protect to -20F (-

29C) ambient in off-cycle.

B. Air Cooled Condenser:

1. Coils: Internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes, mechanically expanded into aluminumalloy fins with full height collars. Subcooling coil an integral part of condenser. Designworking pressure shall be 450 PSIG (31 bar).

2. Low Sound Fans: Shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive, corrosionresistant aluminium blades, providing vertical air discharge from extended orifices. Guardsof heavy gauge, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) coated or galvanized steel.

3. Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 3 phase, insulation class “F”, current protected,Totally Enclosed Air-Over (TEAO), with double sealed, permanently lubricated ball bearings.

POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power/Control Panel:

1. NEMA (IP65), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer

doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing. Provide main powerconnections(s), compressor starters and fan motor contactors, current overloads, andfactory wiring.

2. Panel shall include control display access door.

B. Multi Point Power (Standard for 4-compressor Units):

Provide multi point power connection to chiller, shall be 3 phase of scheduled voltage (for 4-compressor units).

C. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and wired controltransformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit power supply.

Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side and provide 240V/1 onsecondary.

D Motor Starters: Motor current at start shall not exceed the rated load amps (RLA), providing noelectrical inrush. Across the line, wye-delta, and solid state type starters will not be acceptable.

F. Power Factor:1. Provide equipment with power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a power

factor of 95% at all load conditions.2. The installing contractor is responsible for additional cost to furnish and install power factor

correction capacitors if they are not factory mounted and wired.

G. Exposed compressor and fan motor power wiring shall be routed through liquid tight conduit.

CONTROLS A. General:

1. Provide automatic control of chiller operation including compressor start/stop andload/unload, anti-recycle timers, condenser fans, evaporator pump, evaporator heater, unitalarm contacts and run signal contacts.

2. Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power failure.3. Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field programmed set

points shall be retained in lithium battery backed real time clock (RTC) memory forminimum 5 years.




AEB 695-0722


4. Alarm contacts shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system safety fault.

B. Display and Keypad.1. Provide minimum 80 character liquid crystal display that is both viewable in direct sunlight

and has LED backlighting for nighttime viewing. Provide one keypad and display panel per

chiller.2. Display and keypad shall be accessible through display access door without opening main

control/electrical cabinet doors.3. Display shall provide a minimum of unit setpoints, status, electrical data, temperature data,

pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the use of a coded display.4. Descriptions in English ,numeric data in English (or Metric) units.5. Sealed keypad shall include unit On/Off switch.

C. Programmable Setpoints (within Manufacturer limits): display language; leaving chilled liquidtemperature: setpoint, control range; local or remote control; units of measure; compressorlead/lag; and maximum chilled water setpoint reset temperature range.

D. Display Data: Chiller liquid return and leaving temperatures, ambient, lead compressoridentification, clock and schedule, (variable) out of range, remote input indication, chilled liquidreset setpoint, and history data for last ten shutdown faults. Compressor suction, discharge,and oil pressures and temperatures, suction and discharge superheats, percent of full-load,operating hours, starts, and anti-recycle timer status. Status Messages for manual override,unit switch off, compressor run, run permissive, remote controlled shut down, no cooling load,daily/holiday shut down, anti-recycle timer.

E. Predictive Control Points: Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when operating outsidedesign conditions by optimizing the chiller controls and cooling load output to stay online and

avoid safety limits being reached. The system shall monitor the following parameters and themaintain the maximum cooling output possible without shutdown of the equipment: motorcurrent, suction pressure and discharge pressure.

F. System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset shut down;manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Includes: high discharge pressure ortemperature, low suction pressure, high/low motor current, high motor temperature, highpressure switch, high/low differential oil pressure, high oil temperature, low suction superheat,critical sensor malfunction, low or high current, phase loss/single phase power, overload ofmotor windings, and low voltage.

G. Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if: high or low

ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, and flow switch operation.Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per chiller manufacturer requirements.

H. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic chilleroperation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring necessary to interfacesensors to the chiller control system.

Power/Supply Connections:

Terminal Block Power Connection: Power connections shall be made to a Terminal Blockwith factory provided interconnecting wiring to chiller components.




AEB 695-0723


Vibration Isolation

Vibration isolators will be supplied for field mounting. Isolators will be level adjustingspring type with 2” deflection

PART 3 — EXECUTION

INSTALLATION A. General: Rig and Install in full accordance with Manufacturer‟s requirements, Project drawings,

and Contract documents.

B. Location: Locate chiller as indicated on drawings, including cleaning and service maintenanceclearance per Manufacturer instructions. Adjust and level chiller on support structure.

C. Components: Installing Contractor shall provide and install all auxiliary devices andaccessories for fully operational chiller.

D. Electrical: Coordinate electrical requirements and connections for all power feeds withElectrical Contractor

E. Controls: Coordinate all control requirements and connections with Controls Contractor.

F. Finish: Installing Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paintmatching factory finish.

NOISE LEVEL

The contractor shall include in his pricing all necessary provisions to reduce the noise level from

the chillers in order to obtain a quiet environment, the requirement of which shall be as stipulatedby the Engineer.

22.2.03.02 TREATED FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT

General

The TFAHU shall be weather proof type and modular in construction and shall havesections and capacity as per the schedule. The Sizes and connections of the units shallbe selected to fit into the spaces available without affecting the architectural integrity ofthe building. Manufacturers of the TFAHU shall have ISO 9001 certification and

EUROVENT certification.

Casing

The unit casing shall be of double skinned panels. Casing shall be assembled with selfsupporting modular panels with an integrated base frame made of aluminium and sectionalong upper sides of units. Sheet metal thickness shall be 1.0 mm. for the inner skin and1.0 mm. for the outer skin and made from zinc coated steel sheets. Outside of the outerskin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm. for additional protection. Inside andoutside of the panel wall shall be completely smooth. Overall heat transmittance shall notexceed k = 0.59 w/m²k.

All casing panels shall be insulated by fibre glass layer of 50 mm. thickness,48 Kg/cu.m




AEB 695-0724


density or equivalent.

The sound absorption through the panel shall be Rw = 42 db (weighted sound reductionfactor). Panel shall be assembled with special rivets. The inspection side of the coilsection panels shall be assembled with bolts and nuts for easy removal of coils. Panel air

tightness shall be as per EUROVENT standards.

The base frame of the unit shall be made from hot dipped galvanized U-profile. Servicedoors shall be provided with special gaskets and locking device. Access doors 400 mm.and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening.Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide sealant material.

TFAHU manufacturer shall ensure that panel construction shall be without any thermalbridges and shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of thepanels.

Fan Section

Fan shall be double inlet double width aerofoil backward curved centrifugal type. Theblades shall be made of galvanized steel. Centrifugal fans shall be statically anddynamically balanced at the factory as complete fan assembly. (Fan wheel, shaft motor,drive and belts).

Fans and shaft shall operate well below their critical speeds. If any out of balance isapparent on the site, the Engineer reserves the right to request new factory suppliedunits to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated.

Fan bearing shall be lubricated type with extended Lube lines to terminate outside the fan

section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 100,000 hours of operation. FAHU fanand motor drive shall be oversized by at least 20% and shall be fitted with adjustable belttension arrangement.

The air-handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motorand drive assembly on rubber isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air-handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer.

Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base framewith an easily adjustable motor slide rail. Motors shall be totally enclosed, foot mounted,fan cooled IP54 with class F insulation.

Coil Section

Cooling coils shall be of cartridge type mounted on Aluminium slide rails for easyresolvability. The number of fins shall be fixed at 12FPI to optimize performancerequirements. Coil casing shall be 1.5 mm thick galvanized steel with drain holes on thebottom channels to ensure condensate drainage. Coil tubes shall be heavy guage coppermechanically expanded into aluminium plate fins. All joints shal be silver brazed. Coilsshall be designed to utilize the full available unit cross section area and mounted on sliderail to allow for easy removal when required. Coils shall be proof tested at 26 bar (375psig) and leak tested at 17 bar (250 psig). Coil performance shall be rated in accordancewith ARI Standard 410.

Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed under




AEB 695-0725


the coil within the coil section; drain pans shall be sloped and shall have drain connectionto the service side.

Filter Section

50 mm. thick aluminium frame permanent washable filter made of many layer ofcoffered metal mesh ( aluminium ) flat filter having average filtration efficiency 70%,recommended filter replacement Δp = 200 pa , filter class B acc. EN 1886. TFAHUs shall have an additional bag filter section. Bag filter media shall haveminimum dust spot efficiency of 55% as determined by opacimetric method.

Anti Vibration Mounting

TFAHU‟s shall be provided with steel spring type anti-vibration, mounting of minimum 1”deflection

22.2.03.03 FAN COIL UNITS

General

The fan coil units shall be of size suitable for installation in the space provided and havecapacity as indicated in the equipment schedule. The unit shall comply with the followingspecifications:

Description

The fan coil unit shall be completely factory built and ductable type/decorative wallmounted/cassette type, as applicable and shall be installed at high level as indicated on

drawings.

The ducted type unit shall be of double skin construction.

Low noise twin fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type,statically and dynamically balanced and mounted on a steel shaft. Fans shall havepermanently lubricated, self aligning ball bearings. Fan wheel and housing are to be ofgalvanized steel.

The motor shall be of the totally enclosed type for protection against dust and externalparticles suitable for operation on 240V, single phase, 50Hz, A.C. supply. The motor shallbe fitted with life lubricated bearings having three speed and complete with thermal

overload protection. All units shall be provided with OFF-HI-MED-LOW fan speed switch(remote) and air vent.

The cooling coils shall be staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper tubesexpanded into aluminum fins and shall be factory tested at 225psig air pressure. Thecoils shall be suitable for the duty requirements as specified in the schedule and shall beminimum 3 rows deep. The coil face velocity shall not exceed 500 fpm. The cooling coilsshall be completely drainable type.

The integral drain pan shall be fabricated of galvanized steel with closed cell insulationand sealed with mastic for maximum protection against corrosion and sweating.

The back side of the panel shall have a filter frame with bottom filter access. The filter




AEB 695-0726


shall be washable type having thickness as recommended by the manufacturer.

22.2.03.04 MINI SPLIT A/C UNIT

General

The plant required shall consist of air-cooled split type air-conditioning unit of mini-splitcategory - wall mounted type .

The unit shall be composed of an indoor unit and an air-cooled outdoor unit forapplication with R-22 refrigerant

The unit offered in the tender shall be by a reputed manufacturer who is representedlocally and can provide an efficient maintenance and spare part service

The casing shall consist of a heavy gauge steel chassis with sheet metal casing Theminimum thickness shall be 12 mm The whole unit shall be protected against corrosionand finished inside and outside with stoned primer and paint.

The casing for the inside unit shall be the same as mentioned above or of rigid plastic assupplied by the manufacturer.

The fan shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type and be made of aluminiumreinforced glass fibre or rigid plastic material.

The air filters shall be of nylon fibre glass, fibre material or as supplied by themanufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

The filter shall be easily removable for cleaning.

The inside unit fan and condenser fan motors shall factory lubricated bearings of thesealed for life type.

The motor winding and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoidproblems with condensation.

The compressor in the outside unit shall be the hermetically sealed pattern complete withresilient mountings.The condenser and evaporator coils shall be formed of copper primary tubes withaluminium fins or copper fins If copper fins are used they shall be electro-tinned after

manufacture The fins shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes Aluminium coils shall beguaranteed for five years.

The unit shall have control giving three running speeds and an off position.

The outlet grille shall be fully adjustable to enable the direction of airflow to be set to thedesired direction where the units are floor mounted the supply grilles shall be on the topof the unit.

The units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations tounit location, refrigerant piping, power and condensate piping.




AEB 695-0727


Where the units are of the concealed type the Contractor shall ensure adequate accessis provided for the removal of a complete unit.

The condensate pipe work shall be run to the nearest drain.

The units shall meet the specified duties for airflow and cooling capacities.

The controls shall include the following:(a) High-low pressure switches(b) Oil pressure protection switch(c) Thermal overload cut-out

The units shall incorporate the following accessories:

(a) Suction-liquid heat exchanger(b) Inlet strainer(c) Electric crank case heater(d) Refrigerant filter dryer(e) Sight glass(f) Suction and discharge shut off valves(g) Changing, relief and purging valves(h) Gauge connections(i) Spring mounts for compressor

The fin spacing for the evaporator and condenser coils shall be in line with the latestMEW regulations

The air conditioning unit shall be capable of handling the cooling loads when operating in

ambient conditions of 50°C at the medium speed

The outdoor unit shall be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperature of 50°C

The sound level shall not exceed 55 dBA at low speed and 60 dBA at high speed whenmeasured at 1 m distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing

The safety devices for the compressors shall be as per the manufacturer‟srecommendations

22.2.04 CHILLED WATER PUMPS

Pumps shall be centrifugal, end suction type.

Pumps shall be base mounted, directly connected to their motor through flexiblecouplings.

Pump casings shall be cast iron with bronze or stainless steel impeller, stainless steelshaft, mechanical seal, flexible coupling and cast iron base.

Pump impellers and rotating assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced atthe factory

Pumps shall be selected to operate at the point of maximum efficiency and shall not be




AEB 695-0728


selected under any circumstances at the end of its curve.

Each pump shall be fitted with the following components:

i. 100 mm. diameter suction and discharge pressure gauges, siphons and cocks.

ii. Flexible connections on inlet and outlet

iii. Check valve on outlet.

iv. Isolating gate valve on inlet and outlet.

v. Strainer on inlet.

vi. Vibration isolators below pump bases

The Contractor is expected to cross check the pressure head requirements in conjunctionwith the water side equipment selected by him and submit the necessary calculations tothe Engineer for approval. Pump shall be selected at its maximum efficiency point. Thepump will not be approved if selected to operate near the end of its curve. The motor kWshould not exceed that indicated in the pump schedule.

22.2.05 PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE

The chilled water system shall be a closed pressurized system incorporating a combinedpressurization and automatic water make-up unit as indicated on the drawings.

The pressurisation unit shall be an integrated unit, factory assembled and tested.

The pressurisation unit shall incorporate a break tank, two make-up pumps (one running,one standby), twin expansion vessels, associated pipe work and valves and controls.

The expansion vessels shall be of the pre-pressurized diaphragm type manufactured toBS 4814 and shall be subjected to a test pressure of 750 KPa.

The twin expansion vessels shall each have a capacity to suit the chilled water networksize with a maximum working pressure not exceeding 150 KPa.

The controls shall include the following:

i. Automatic pump changeover upon failure of duty pump indicated by pump failurelight.

ii. Manual pump selector switch.

iii. Duty pump run light

iv. Hours run indicators for pumps

v. Low pressure visible and audible alarm




AEB 695-0729


22.2.06 VENTILATION EQUIPMENTS

22.2.06.01 ROOF MOUNTED TWIN EXHAUST FAN

The fan unit shall comprise of a duplicate fan assembly complete with motors and drives

mounted on a heavy-duty unit base plate by anti-vibration mountings. The fans shall bedirect driven with double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers running on two life-longlubricated bearings. The fan unit shall be fitted with automatic shutters to prevent air recirculation through standby fan and blow back when not in use.

The fan unit electric motor shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5000 and be ofthe shaded pole or capacitor start and run type suitable for an electrical supply of 240volts, single phase, 50 Hz and capable of operating in ambient conditions as describedearlier.

The fan unit shall have air operated flow switches fitted, arranged to change over to thestandby fan in the event of the selected fan failing and also to provide a fault signal.

The fan unit shall be pre wired with switches and isolators to a single terminal box on thecasing. The unit casing shall be constructed from aluminium alloy with centrally positionedinlet spigot and access panel to allow ease of service.

Twin roof fans shall be acoustically lined and suitable for mounting on roof and autochange-over panels with duty sharing feature shall be provided at an accessible location.

22.2.06.02 ROOF MOUNTED SINGLE CABINET FAN

These fans shall be roof mounted single speed centrifugal cabinet extractors withhorizontal outlet suitable for ducted ventilation. They should be capable of exhaust cleanair with temperature upto 80

0 C. The fans shall be direct driven and the motor shall be

outside the airflow.

The fan construction shall have following features:

1. Base frame in galvanized steel sheet2. Protection guard in steel rod protected against atmospheric agents.3. Backward curved wheel in galvanized steel sheet with high efficiency and low noise level.

4. Upper cover in techno-polymer, with suitable slots for proper motor cooling.5. Asynchronous three-phase motor according to international standards IEC 34 – IEC 72

and 89/392 EEC – 89/336 EEC-73/23 EEC, CE marked, IP55, Class „F‟.

The fans shall be supplied with back draught gravity shutter, support (counter base tobe walled up) and grid (inlet side guard), Optional accessories like outer terminal box andsensor switch to be available.

22.2.06.03WALL MOUNTED FAN

Extract fan shall be suitable for wall mounting .




AEB 695-0730


The fan construction shall be of moulded plastic, unobtrusive with flush inner and outergrille .

Motors shall be of the shaded pole induction type enclosed in a aluminium alloy case andprotected by a thermal overload cutout.

The motor bearings shall be self alignment sealed for life type .

The fans shall be provided with a solenoid operated backdraught shutters . the solenoidshall open and close the backdraught damper silently as the fan is switched ON or OFF.

22.2.06.04 PLATE MOUNTED AXIAL FANS

General

The compact plate axial fan shall have metal fan casing and guard to providea long lasting robust construction. All parts shall be suitable treated to ensurefull corrosion protection. Fan plates and motors shall have a powder coated,highly durable, polyester epoxy paint finish in pastel beige . Guard shall bebright zinc plated.

Impeller Assemblies

Adjustable pitch aerodynamic impeller shall be provided, made from highquality GRP. These shall be factory set at an angle to provide maximumperformance. Hubs shall be made from die cast aluminium alloy (LM24). Assembled impellers are to be balanced to grade.

Motors

Highly efficient, lightweight induction motors shall be provided; these will havesealed for life, maintenance free ball bearings. Each motor shall be matchedto the aerodynamic performance of the impeller. Motors shall be Class Finsulated to EN 60034-5, weatherproofed to IP55 and suitable for speedcontrol. They shall have an integral thermal overload protection.

The fan shall be suitable for operating temperature of up to +70°C fixed speedand +50°C when used with speed controllers.

Electrical connection to the motor shall be provided by an IP55 terminal box

fitted to a 550mm long flying lead.

Quality Management

Units are to be designed and manufactured with procedures as defined in BSEN ISO 9001-2000. EEC Directives shall be met.

All units are to be tested to ISO 5801: 1997 (airside performance) and BS848 pt 2: 1985 (sound performance).




AEB 695-0731


22.2.06.05 IMPULSE CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM

The detailed design, supply,testing and commissioning of underground carpark

ventilation system shall be carried out by specialist.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, FUNCTION AND DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES.

The contractor shall provide a turnkey car park ventilation system that isconsistent with the scheme as indicated on the drawings. The proposed schemeutilizes jet fans with supply fan /main exhaust fans located along the perimeter of thecar park. The system shall serve both a CO evacuation and smoke extractfunction.

The contractor shall provide a full design proposal that includes the followinginformation for review by the Engineer:

The contractor shall carry out smoke tests, eye-witnessed by the consultant, the firebrigade and local government, to prove system function. These tests shall be made atminimum 10 spots throughout the car park, location advised by any of the abovementioned participants. Smoke tests shall be carried out using smoke generators todemonstrate the effectiveness of the system.

Full Bill of Materials to be utilized in the system implementation.

• Specifications, manufacturer‟s data and performance data for all devices andequipment to be utilized in the system

• Control schematics for operation of the system.

• All ancillary devices such as roll up doors, motorized dampers, silencers,smoke detectors, CO detectors, etc that are required to ensure proper systemoperation in both the CO and smoke modes.

• All necessary devices that are required to interface with the base buildingsystems such as fire alarm and detection, BMS, etc.

The system principles are as follows.

• Fully automatic smoke control

• Lower air temperatures during fires• No ductwork distribution

• Improved fire fighting access

• High air movement preventing fire spread

• Efficient cross-ventilation

• CO Pollution Control

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The main extract fans shall be axial fans mounted in parallel. All fans shall belocated within the shaft as indicated on the drawings. Impulse fans shall belocated throughout car park levels to assist the air movement.




AEB 695-0732


Under "normal" ventilation conditions, air shall be drawn through all parts of the carpark at a rate equivalent to three air changes per hour. When CO levels rise

beyond 25ppm – average value of 15 minutes, the impulse fans shall operate atlow speed on the effected floor to mix and dilute the CO gases for extract via themain fans. Should the CO level continue to rise, to 50ppm – average value of 15minutes, the air change rate shall increase to 6 per hour. Should the CO levelcontinue to rise, to 60ppm – average value of 15 minutes , or 250ppm current value,an acoustic and optical CO-alert shall warn people to leave the car park by escapemeans. The CO detection system including approved acoustic and optical alertdevices are part of the contractor‟s scope of supply.

On detection of smoke, the main fans shall operate at full speed, increasing theairflow to the fire floor. The system has to run in 3 different modes to handle all alertscenarios. The control system shall determine which of the 3 zones and which set of

main extract fans are activated dependant on the location of the fire. The basiccontrol principle is to use 2 shaft fans in extract mode and 1shaft fans in air supplymode. Each zone must provide in case of a fire minimum 12air changes per hour.

All the air extracted from the car park shall pass through the fire zone, controlled bythe impulse fans.

The distribution and pre-selected operation of the impulse fans on the fire floorshall contain and channel smoke through an air corridor. The air corridor shall becreated by the jet streams of the impulse fans, and guided towards the extractpoint.The averageair velocity within the corridor shall be equal to 12 air changesto overcome the buoyancy effect for a designed fire load of one car on fire,sprinklered.

In compliance with international design codes the main extract fans shall each berated in combination to extract 50% of the maximum airflow for any given fire zone. All Impulse,supply and Extract Fans shall be rated to withstand a temperaturerating of 300°C for a period of 2 hours.

The Car Park Ventilation system shall be a stand alone Life Safety System, combinedwith Sprinkler.

Automatic smoke curtain shall be used at each basement level ,exit vehicular ramp toprevent from fresh air short circuit.Automatic smoke curtain shall be linked to the firealarm panel

CO-DETECTION

The car park ventilation systems shall be controlled by a CO-monitoring systemto optimize efficiency. The Co-monitoring system shall comprise dedicated rackcards mounted with purpose made enclosures.

To decrease sound, generated by the Extract Fans, and to save energy the CO detectionsystem shall operate at least 3 independent CO zones.

CO monitoring devices shall be mounted remotely throughout the car parks.The devices shall be mounted in accordance with the manufacturers guidelinesbut no greater than 1.5m above FFL.




AEB 695-0733


Danger Signs suspended from the ceiling to stipulated car clearance height are withincontractor‟s scope of supply. The Danger Signs shall be illuminated in case of a COalert.

The contractor should refer to the specific requirements of the CO sensor supplier

for quantities of CO-detectors. The minimum design requirement shall ensure asingle CO-detector covers a maximum car park area of 400 m2.

CO detection system, LON-Bus

CO level drawing with all sensors + danger signs and acoustic alarm to be provided

CO Sensor, LON-Bus, addressable.

CO centre capable to control the above-mentioned CO zones independently.

All components have to comply with VDI 2053, rev. 2004 - CO detection and alert modes incar parks.

SMOKE DETECTION

The Car Park Ventilation system shall incorporate photoelectric smoke / heatdetectors.

The photoelectric smoke/ heat detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke/heatfrom fires. The detectors shall have 360 degree smoke entry.

The Photo-electric smoke/heat detectors shall be U.L listed/LPCB approved.

The design of the optical smoke/heat detectors sensing chamber shall be optimizedto minimize the effect of the dust deposits over a period of time

The optical smoke/heat detectors shall incorporate screens designed to prevent allbut the very small insects from entering the sensing chamber.

The optical smoke/heat detectors shall include RFI screening and feed-throughconnecting components to minimize the effect of radiated and conductedelectrical interference.

The optical smoke/heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible fromthe outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.

The optical smoke/heat detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.

The optical smoke/heat detectors shall incorporate an LED clearly visible fromthe outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.

The detectors shall be capable of being semi -recessed.

The detectors shall be mounted on the loop circuits to conform to NFPA Class AStyle 7 wiring.

The heat detectors shall have the option of being provided with integral looppowered sounders.

The fire detection system shall be fully addressable to operate three smoke zones @ first/second/third basement level independently.




AEB 695-0734


System Switchboard Supply

System switchboard designed by Car Park Ventilation system manufacturer.

System switchboard for Smoke Extract and CO management system performance

criteria shall be as per BS EN 60439-1: 1999

System switchboard fully programmed with all necessary algorithms to operate COredundancy and fire safety modes as per BS standards.

System switchboard designed to control all fans, dampers and other systemcomponents.

System switchboard drawings to be submitted for final approval.

Fully programmed for use Impulse Ventilation System

IMPULSE (jet) FANS and SUPPLY/EXTRACT FANS

The jet fans shall have heavy gauge 4.0 mm steel complete with a seawaterresistant aluminum impeller including a normal motor with IP 55 rating and class Hinsulation.

All Impulse ,supply and Extract Fans fire rated 300°C for 2 hours. All fans must betested and certified acc. to EN 12101-3, class F300. The formal CE sign with it‟sunique number of the notified and certifying body is, as a proof, inevitable.

Impulse Fans shall be uni directional as per attached fan schedule and must bedelivered with the following minimum options:

Aluminum guide vanes, stainless steel protection grilles, inlet cone at bothends, suction and discharge silencers, colour to be per architectural requirementsand a 6-pole lockable working switch including pad lock, rated for 300°C for 2 hours .The working switch casing must therefore be supplied, as a proof, with a certificateof a notified body in the contractor‟s country; the lockable switch might be replaced byisolators in the system switchboard .

Extract Fans shall be uni directional as per attached fan schedule and must bedelivered with the following minimum options:

Heavy gauge 8.0 mm steel casing, hot dip galvanized, inlet cone at both ends withprotection grilles, impeller seawater resistant aluminum and steel reinforced blades,inlet and outlet velocity in forward direction less than 21 m/s (no diffusers), fan

efficiency greater than 75%, vibration attenuators – steel spring type – attenuation90% minimum, mounting brackets, 6 pole lockable working switch including padlock, rated for 300°C for 2 hours .The working switch casing must therefore besupplied, as a proof, with a certificate of a notified body in the contractor‟s country;the lockable switch might be replaced by isolators in the system switchboard .

Motor acc, to IEC, EN, DIN and VDE, IP 55

Fans shall be noise rated for 60dB (A) on 1m 45deg in the free field.

Fans shall be capable of moving smoke to allow clearance in accordance withsmoke extract fans.




AEB 695-0735


Air Flow Rates

The air flow rate is in accordance with current building regulations in force, i.e. Buildingregulations approved document F and as specified in the schedule of drawings.

System Operation

Under “ Normal” ventilation conditions and to comply with regulations „F‟ air will bedrawn into the car park from the ramp complemented by a supply fan and pushedaround the area and towards the extract point where 2 No. main fans would belocated. Under “Normal “ Conditions, one main extract fan will operate at lowspeed, thus providing 3 air changes per hour; CO levels will be monitoredcontinually. On detection of CO levels rising beyond 25ppm, the impulse fans willoperate at low speed in the affected area to mix and dilute the CO gases forextract via the main fans. Should the CO level continue to rise to 50PPM, bothmain fans will operate at low speed to give 6 air changes per hour. The use of COmonitoring equipment will assist with achieving building regulation part 12 forenergy efficiency.

On detection of smoke, and to comply with document „B‟ two main extract fans willincrease to high speed and will provide an air change rate of 12 per hour due tothe distribution and selective operation of the impulse fans smoke will be guidedtowards the main extract point.

Fan Ratings

All fans are rated to withstand a temperature of 300º C for a period of at least 2hrs.

Equipment Overview

Scope shall include the supply fan, main extract fans, smoke curtains impulsefans,grills / dampers, suction / discharge ducting, supply of electrical panel, COdetection system, smoke detection system, engineering, commissioning, cablingetc.

Main Extract Fans

Supply fan

Impluse Fans

Sound attenuators

Extract Grillers & smoke tight motorized dampers Supply grilles with fresh air intake attached with sand trap and motorized dampers. Automatic smoke curtains

Electrical Panel Switch Board(Inclusive of all required Controlsin the system)

CO detection system detectors & panel




AEB 695-0736


Multi Criteria Smoke Detectors and fire panel

Detailed System Design

Commissioning Fan system, electrical panels, CO and Smoke detection system

Approval Test

Customized CFD analysis for the proposed system .Customised analysis will be atrue modelling to show and account for all internal obstructions and structures.

Shaft in which the main extract fans /supply fan are located shall be provided with steelgrating as an access platform, for periodic maintenance as applicable.

22.2.06.06 STAIRWELL / LIFTWELL/ESCAPE ROUTE PRESSURISATION FANS.

Vane axial fans shall be belt driven, Arrangement 9, with the motor attached to theexterior of the fan housing on an adjustable base. Fan housing shall be fabricated fromheavy gauge steel with prepunched flanges at both ends. A minimum of seven heavygauge straightening vanes shall be welded to the fan housing downstream from the rotor.

Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first criticalspeed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed. Close tolerances shall bemaintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearing.

Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life (L-10) of 40,000 hours at maximumoperating speed and horsepower for each construction level.

Rotor blades and hub shall be heat treated cast aluminum alloy A356-T6 with bladebases and hub sockets precision machined. Blades shall be attached to the hub withsteel studs and self-locking nuts. Hub shall be positively secured with a steel taper lockbushing keyed to the fan shaft.

Rotor blade pitch shall be manually adjustable within horsepower limitations. A blade tipangle scale shall be machined into the base of the master blade and indexed to the hub. All blades shall be adjustable to align with the master blade pitch setting.

Fans with a sound trap required shall meet the additional requirements: Constructionshall be double walled with two inches of sound absorbing material between the walls.The inner wall shall be constructed of perforated steel. Air performance ratings shall beequal to equivalent size fans with a single wall housing.

Each assembled fan shall be test run at the factory at the specified fan RPM and vibrationsignatures shall be taken on each bearing in the horizontal, vertical, and axial direction.The maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.079 in./sec peak velocity, filter-in readingas measured at the fan RPM.

Vane axial fans shall be roof mounted type Axial fans for liftwell /stairwell/Escape route pressurisation shall be of fire resistantconstruction rated at 300 0C for 2 hours




AEB 695-0737


The fans shall be complete with spring type anti vibration mounting,mountingbrackets,matching flange,high temp flexible connector etc.

22.2.06.07 SMOKE CLEARANCE VENTS

Dedicated openable vertical glazed vents shall be provided for smoke clearance from theoffice space and retail area.Each vertical glazed vent shall be actuator operated andlinked to the fire alarm panel.

22.2.07 VIBRATIONS ISOLATORS

All plant and supports shall be isolated from the building structure and the supportsisolated from other items of equipment in such a manner that noise and vibration are nottransmitted through the structure.

The chillers shall be mounted on floating floor foundations and provided with casedspring type anti-vibration mounts with minimum 50 mm. deflection. The spring mountsshall consist of cast metal telescopic housings with resilient inserts as guides betweenthe top and bottom housings. The mounts shall incorporate built-in levelling arrangement.The bottom plate of the mount shall be fitted with 6 mm. thick synthetic rubber pad toreduce transmission of high frequency noise and vibrations. The metal casing and thesprings shall be powder coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall becolour coded to facilitate identification.

Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out of reinforced

concrete or concrete-filled welded steel framework. The weight of the inertia block shallbe at least 1.5 times the total working weight of the pump sets. The inertia blocks shall bemounted over cased spring mounts, as described above, with minimum 25 mm.deflection. Protruding steel lugs/brackets or recesses shall be provided in the inertiabase to facilitate installation of spring mounts.

Fan-coil units shall be provided with spring type anti-vibration hangers having steel frameand helical compression type springs with minimum 25 mm deflection. The springs shallbe located within synthetic rubber cups to reduce transmission of high frequency noiseand vibrations. The rubber cup shall be complete with embedded load distribution steelplate and with projection bush to prevent metal-to-metal contact. The metal fame and thesprings shall be powder coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be

colour coded to facilitate identification.

Roof mounted TFAHU and roof mounted fans shall be installed on cased spring mountsas described above with minimum 25 mm. deflection.

All piping connected to isolated equipment and pipes within mechanical rooms shall besuspended from spring type anti-vibration hangers as described above for at least firstthree points of support on all sides of the equipment. Pipes running at low level shall bemounted on cased spring mounts. The spring hangers and mounts used for supportingpipes shall have minimum 25 mm deflection.

Structural columns or vertical steel pipes used as supports for water pipes shall haveextended base plates that rest on rubber pads of adequate load bearing capacity.




AEB 695-0738


Suitable rubber grommets shall be provided to avoid contact between the base platesand the fixing bolts.

The ratings of anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall suit the load distribution datafurnished by the equipment manufacturer with adequate margin of safety for weights of

water and accessories/fittings connected to the equipment. The vibration isolators shallbe installed in accordance with the maker‟s recommendations. The MechanicalContractor shall ensure that the performance of isolators is suitable for the machinery tobe installed. All anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall be subject to the Engineer‟sapproval.

22.2.08 TEST HOLES

Test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the ducts and shall be of 22 mm.dia. Each test hole shall be fitted with an Instrument Test Port having galvanized castmetal body, expandable rubber sealing element and metal wing nut for operation. Testport base shall be seated on soft rubber gasket and riveted to the duct wall. The wing nutshall extend outside the finished insulation so that the duct interior can be accessedwithout disturbing the insulation. Rubber plugs or stick-on seals shall not be used forclosing test holes. The number of test holes shall be as per recommendation of DW142.

Test holes shall be provided at the following locations:

At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet) At main supply and return ducts of air handling units/cooling coils At main branches after regulating dampers At any other position as per Engineer‟s requirements

22.2.09 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

Stem Type Thermometers

Range: 20 to 2200 F

Size: 9” longLocation: At inlet and outlet of chillers and air handling unitsType: Mercury in glass

Thermometer Well

Location At inlet and outlet of chillers, air handling units and fan coil units.Purpose To accommodate stem type thermometersConstruction Brass body with Plastic cap to prevent ingress of dirt

Water Pressure Gauges

Size 4” in diameterComponents Pig tail and vent cockLocation Inlet and outlet of all pumps and chillers, to be selected in a way to ensure

needle position at mid-range during operation of the equipment Range 0 to100 psi, unless otherwise advised by the Engineer




AEB 695-0739


22.2.10 INTERFACING WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM / BMS SYSTEM

All starting devices shall be interlocked and shall be shut off upon receiving signalfrom Fire Alarm Control Panel.

The smoke detector shall be photo electric obscuration type suitable for ductmounting. Adequate number of detectors shall be provided as per NFPA 72 to coverthe whole cross sectional area of the duct.

The detector shall be supplied and installed by the Air Conditioning Contractor butrelevant wiring shall be supplied and installed under the Electrical Contract.Ductmounted smoke detectors shall shut off the relevant AC unit through the Fire Alarm Panel. In the event of proven fire alarm situation, the whole plant shall beshutdown in proper sequence.

Smoke clearance vents of office /retail premises shall be interfaced with fire alarmpanel.

Stairwell/ Liftwell /Escape route pressurisation system shall be interfaced with firealarm panel.

All components of car park ventilation system shall be fully interfaced with fire alarmpanel.

All the HVAC SYSTEM equipments and LIFE SAFETY system equipments shall beinterfaced with the BMS.

22.2.11 INTER – DISCIPLINE CO-ORDINATION

Apart from full time co-ordination with the main contractor, following co-ordinations with

other disciplines shall also be the responsibility of the A/C Contractor

Co-ordination with Electrical for Power Supply / fire alarm interfacing Co-ordination with Hydraulics for drains locations and water supply. Coordination with Fire services for fire shutdown, sprinkler etc. Coordination with the IBMS supplier. Coordination with the client‟s representative Coordination with False ceiling contractor. Coordination with third party certified testing, adjusting and balancing

(TAB ) specialists-hydronic as well as air balancing . Coordination with chilled water treatment specialist Coordination with acoustical specialist appointed by the contractor for acoustical

verification of the project.

22.2.12 SHEET METAL WORK

Ductwork and fittings

i) General

Low velocity ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured and installed in accordance withspecification DW142 issued by the HVCA/ASHRAE Standards except where specifiedhereunder to the contrary.

The Works Contractor shall supply and install all the ductwork, sheet metal, supports,




AEB 695-0740


dampers, grilles, diffusers and auxiliaries, as required to complete the various ventilationand air conditioning system. The installation shall be as shown on the Drawings, but theWorks Contractor must include for checking site dimension.

All supply, return and exhaust air ducts, support members and fittings shall be

constructed from new high quality galvanized mild steel sheet and shall conform to therequirements of HVCA, including ASHRAE Standards.

All ductwork shall be manufactured and erected by ductwork specialists and shall beinstalled to run parallel with the building structure and provide a neat arrangement. Theductwork shall be true in section and continuous with air-tight joints, presenting a smoothsurface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside. Internal roughness orobstruction to air flow, and sharp edges or corners on the outside of ducts. Fittings orsupports will not be accepted.

Variations in direction and in the shape of ductwork shall be effected with easy changesto the airflow. The slope of a change in shape, a contraction or an expansion shall notexceed 22.5 degrees on any side.

All square bends shall be fitted with turnings vanes of proprietary manufacture.

Flanged duct joints shall be used for all circular ducts of diameters 600 mm or greaterand all rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 800 mm.

All duct joints shall be made air-tight incorporating pop-riveted seams, approved sealants,gaskets and finished tapes. All excess sealant must be removed before tape is applied.

Rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 400 mm shall be

externally stiffened all around the duct.

Ductwork test holes shall be provided at air handling units (positioned in a straight sectionof duct near to the fan discharge) and in all main branch ducts with two or more terminalsserved from the branch. Test holes shall be 25 mm diameter, suitably strengthened andfitted with an effective removable seal.

Open ends of ducts shall be covered during erection with plastic sheeting to preventingress of dust and rubbish.

Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized ductwork, the affected sectionshall be made good by preparing, cleaning and painting with two coats of zinc rich paint

and an approved finishing paint. Where damage, in the Engineer‟s opinion, cannot bemade good, than a new section of ductwork shall be provided at no cost to the contract.

All ductwork supports and hangers shall be painted with two coats of zinc rich paint. Thesteelwork supports at roof level shall be provided by the Works Contractor and shall bepainted with two coats of black bit mastic paint.

All ductwork supports and hangers shall be of the angle iron and drop rod type or otherapproved suspension systems:

Neoprene/compressible rubber strip or timber spacers shall be inserted between theducts and supports to reduce the transmission on noise and vibration and to provide athermal break.




AEB 695-0741


Vertical drop rods or angle support members shall be positioned as close to the edge ofthe duct as possible, but not touching it. The supports shall be outside any insulation,vapour sealing or other finish.

Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to dampers, grilles, diffusers, or othersimilar equipment so as to prevent duct distortion.

Maximum support centre shall be 2.4m for any horizontal or vertical ducts and 1.2m forlarge horizontal ducts whose cross section area exceeds 3 sq.m. On no accounts shallangles, used for ductwork stiffening or joints be used as part of the supports.

No ceilings, light fittings or any other equipment shall be supported from the ductwork orthe ductwork supports.

\

ii) Materials

This specification shall apply to ductwork and fittings made from hot dip galvanized sheetor coil to BS 2989 (1992) Grade Z2 Or Z3 with iron-zinc alloy coating type G275(STANDARD) or equal.

iii) Construction

a) General

The constructional requirements for rectangular ductwork have been establishedfollowing independent tests, the limits of use being related to the characteristics of rolled

steel angle longitudinal beams, cross joints and stiffeners described in this Specification

b) Sheet thickness

Minimum sheet thickness is 0.6 mm. (0.9 mm for ductwork in pyrotechnical area).

c) Longitudinal Seams

Sealant shall be used with all longitudinal seams irrespective of the pressure class. Thesealant must be included in the seam during manufacture or be applied as an edgesealant. All joints are to be neatly Pop-riveted or spot-welded. No folded seams will be

allowed.

Connections and fittings

Duct connections to grilles and diffusers shall be detailed to manufacturer‟srequirements, and where flexible connections are used, the cross sectional area of theduct is to be maintained throughout the length of the flexible connections.

All connections to air handling units and sound attenuators if any shall be made withmating flanges to suit the plant items as delivered to site, and shall be made air-tight withsuitable gaskets and washers such that they may readily be removed.

Flexible connections shall be fitted to the ducted inlet and outlet of all fans and air




AEB 695-0742


handling equipment

i) General constructional requirements.

The minimum metal thickness shall be 0.6 mm. In all cases the larger dimensions

and/or pressure classification shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening.

ii) Stiffeners

The flat side of fittings shall be stiffened in accordance with the construction. On theflat sides of bends, stiffeners shall be arranged in a radial pattern, with the spacingmeasured along the center line of the bend.

iii) Splitters

Splitters shall be attached to the duct by bolts or mechanically closed rivets at 100 mmmaximum spacing.

iv) Turning Vanes

Square bends shall be fitted with turning vanes, which shall be securely attached ateach end either to the duct or to internal runners, and the runners fastened to the ductby mechanically closed rivets or bolts at 150 mm maximum spacing.

For single skin vanes, the maximum length between supports shall be 615 mm and for

double skin vanes the maximum length between supports shall be 2250 mm.

v) Twin Bends

Turning vanes in twin bends in which the width of the straight section and branch differshall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the turning vanes are parallelto the duct vanes.

vi) Branches

A branch should be taken off a straight section of duct, not off a taper. Connection ofbranch to duct shall be cleats, rivets or bolts, and sealant shall be used between ducts

and branch.

vii) Expansion and Contraction

Where these are required, an expansion shall be made upstream of a branchconnection and a connection downstream of a branch connection. The slope of eitheran expansion or a contraction should not exceed 22.5% on any side. Where this angleis not practicable, the slope may be increased, providing that splitters are positioned tobisect the angle between any side and the center line of the duct.

viii) Access Panels and Doors

a) Access panels or doors shall be provided in supply, return and exhaust air




AEB 695-0743


ductwork, false ceiling and builders‟ work shafts, as required to facilitate the routineinspection, maintenance, cleaning and adjustment of air conditioning and ventilationequipment.

b) Access panels and doors shall be air-tight when closed, with compressible rubber

gaskets around the entire perimeter, and shall generally be of the hinged type.

c) Where space limitations preclude the use of hinges, access doors shall be fixedwith a minimum of four heavy window type latches.

d) For insulated ducts, all access doors shall be of double panel-insulatedconstruction, with the insulation thickness matching that of the surrounding ducts.For un-insulated ducts, access doors may be of single panel construction. All ductaccess doors shall be mounted in their own separate frames.

Hangers and Supports

i) General

a. Threaded rods hangers shall be electro-zinc coated.b. With a proprietary device, it shall be the responsibility of the Works Contractor to

ensure that the device meets the requirements, with sufficient margin of overloadand that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

ii) Horizontal Ductwork

a) The choice of the lower support shall be dictated by the actual duct section.b) Duct shall be supported by means of U channels and angle profiles. Ducts

supported on the roof shall be rigidly supported by means of concrete piers or plinthlaid on the waterproof complex.

c) All structural support profiles and plates shall be hot dip galvanized 50 micronsminimum to BS 729, plus an approved anti-rust grey paint suitable for exposedatmospheric conditions.

iii) Vertical Ducts

a) The design of support for vertical ducts is dictated by site conditions, and they areoften located to concise with the individual floor slabs.

b) Vertical ducts should be supported from the stiffening angle of the angle frame, orby separate supporting angles fixed on the duct.

c) Air duct passing through roof shall be suitably weatherproofed and aluminiumcladded in case of exposed ducts.

iv) Heavy Loadings

Where heavy equipment is to be applied to the ductwork, supports shall be designedto suit the conditions.

Protective finishes

i) Metal Spraying

Zinc or aluminium spraying shall be to BS 2569 Part 1 (1964) and used only for




AEB 695-0744


remedial works.

ii) Paints

a) Surface preparation and Paint application

Surface preparation of the metal and paint application shall be in accordance withthe paint manufacturer‟s recommendations.

b) Making Good Welding Damage

Galvanizing or other metallic zinc finish damaged by welding shall be suitablycleaned and painted with two coat of zinc-rich or aluminium paint.

c) Ducts made from Galvanized Sheet or CoilDucts made from conventional sheet or coil, do not require further protection whenlocated inside buildings. When located outside the building, one coat of each primeror one coat of calcium plum bate primer shall be applied together with a suitablefinishing coat.

d) Supporting MembersSupporting members made of hot dip galvanized steel 50 microns to BS729

e) External Equipments etc. All external equipment, ductwork, support frames and brackets are to be finishedwith one undercoat and one top coat.

Fire Resistance Ductwork

Provide fire resistance ductwork where shown on the drawings. Fire resistantducting shall be tested as per BS 476 part 24 for stability, integrity and insulation

by an independent laboratory and the certificates shall be submitted for approval.

Fire resistance rating of the ductwork, when tested from either side, shall not beless than 2 hours for stability, integrity and insulation.

The ductwork systems shall be manufactured and installed in accordance withBS5588 part 9 and shall be suitable to class C pressure/leakage classification ofDW144.

Manufacturer‟s proprietary insulating material tested and certified as per BS 476can be used for the fire rated ducting. Sprayed coatings, where used, shall becement spray system with smooth, hard set exterior finish.

All joints in the insulation shall be glued using suitable fire rated glues or securedwith nails. The jointing method shall be as per Manufacturer‟s standards.

Composite panels or ducting shall be fiber-cement reinforced by bonded zinc –coated steel sheet

Provide integral fire resisting supports for fire resisting ductwork

Provide fire resisting access panels in such ductwork. Fire resisting access panelsshall be openable without tools

Provide sub ducts where required in accordance with QCS




AEB 695-0745


Structural Penetration and waterproofing

All duct penetrations of walls; floor and roofs shall be provided with sleeves of lengthequal to the full thickness of the structure. In concrete walls or slabs, the sleeves shall be

galvanized steel of minimum thickness 1.0 mm. In block walls, the openings larger thana hollow block shall be supported by a lintelEach sleeve shall be sized to allow a 22 mm clearance around the duct and any requiredinsulation/finish. It shall be built into the structure using mortar. Subsequently the gapbetween the duct/insulation and sleeve shall be sealed with mastic.

All ducts passing through a roof construction shall be suitably weather proofed.

Connections to builder’s work

All joints between mating flanges, companion rings and wooden frames shall be fittedwith sealing gaskets.

Where ductwork is connected to outside louvers, the bottom inside portion of theductwork should be sloped to drain outside. The inside surfaces of the duct shall also betreated for external exposure for a distance equal to the height of the louver connection,or to the nearest plant item.

22.2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flame proof flexible shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fans and airconditioning units for preventing the transmission of vibration through the ducts tooccupied spaces.

Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across buildingexpansion joints.

Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated canvas.Connections shall fit closely and be secured in airtight fashion to connections toductwork, fans and apparatus.

The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested inaccordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion. Flexibleconnections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum in width.

22.2.14 FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCT

Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured with a two ply aluminium inner core, surroundedby 25 mm thickness of 24 kg/m3 density fibre glass, all wrapped in a reinforcedaluminium outer jacket. The overall K-factor shall be less than 0.23 Btu. /hr. deg. Ft.Ductwork shall meet the standards of NFPA 90A, and be UL listed or to meet BS 476 andBS 413.

Flexible ducts installed in an externally insulated duct system shall be factory insulatedwith glass fibre insulation not less than 25 mm thick and a density not less than 24kg/m3, and covered with an acceptable vapour seal.




AEB 695-0746


Flexible ducts installed in internally (acoustic) insulated duct system, shall be factoryinsulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 20 mm thick and a density not less than24 kg/m3, faced on air side with PVC coated glass cloth having an open area not morethan 25%, and on room side with material specified above.

Flexible duct installation shall be in accordance with manufacture‟s instruction. Jointsbetween factory insulated flexible ducts and field insulated ductwork shall be sealed andtaped under this section.

Flexible ducts shall be supported at their mid sections if length exceeds 500 mm

22.2.15 AIR TERMINALS

i) Ceiling Diffusers

Ceiling diffusers shall be of square neck pattern, with a removable core assembly,suitable for a quiet draftless air distribution. Diffusers shall be of extruded aluminiumconstruction and of arctic white baked epoxy powder coat finish as standard. However,the finish shall be subject to the final approval of architect / owner. All diffusers shall haveprecisely mitred corners mechanically fastened for tight, invisible joints.

All supply air directional diffusers shall have an integral opposed blade volume damper topermit equal distribution of air over the entire face of the diffuser. Opposed blade volumedampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Frames are 18 GA and the blades of24 GA materials. Return air diffuser OBD shall be painted black.

All supply air terminals shall be complete with compressible rubber gaskets at the flangesto prevent air leakage. Air terminals shall be ARI certified. (ARI 880-89)

ii) Linear Diffusers

„Straight line adjustable diffusers‟ slad type shall consist of extruded aluminium outerframes, removable snap-in inner assemblies and where ceiling mounting frames arecalled for, they shall be of extruded aluminium. Where sectional adjoining continuousunits are installed, outer frames and/or ceiling mounting frames shall be supplied withconcealed alignment strips between sections.

Outer frame styles, for either surface or flush to ceiling mounting, shall be furnished to

suit the type of ceiling construction. Concealed brackets, accessible by removal of innerassemblies and inner vanes, shall be provided for mounting the outer frames to ceilingmounting frames or the plenum ducts without any visible mounting screws. Each diffuserslot shall have a snap-in, pattern and flow control assembly consisting of a fixeddeflecting vane and two adjustable air-flow control vanes accessible from face ofdiffusers.

By adjustment of one or both flow control vanes, it shall be possible to obtain ahorizontal, or vertical, discharge air pattern, or to blank-off inactive sections. Horizontalpattern of air-flow may be changed 180 deg. regardless of diffuser mounting orientation,simply by adjusting the flow control vanes. The physical appearance of the face of thediffuser shall not be changed regardless of air pattern or flow control adjustment.Equalizing deflectors of snap-on type, may be supplied for field installation, for lateral




AEB 695-0747


control of air pattern at 90 deg. to the axis of continuous runs of units, or for spreadpattern control of single units, as required. They shall be adjustable from diffuser face byremoval of inner assembly. Volume control dampers for system balancing shall beinstalled, as required by the sheet metal contractor in the branch supply ducts to plenum.

iii) Grilles and Registers

Air grillers approved make, type and model shall be with sizes as indicated on thedrawings. They hall be of extruded aluminium construction with sponge rubber gasketbehind the frames and nylon bushings at the blades connection to the frame. TheEngineer prior to ordering must approve a sample of all air devices. In view of the interiorfinishes, the architect/engineer shall approve the colour of all the air devices.

Supply and return air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front blades,vertical rear blades and shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers Exhaust airregisters shall be single defection fixed horizontal blades and be equipped with opposedblade volume control damper.

Outside air louvers shall be equipped with insect screen.

iv) Door Grilles

Door grilles shall be of the inverted B-Blades type not permitting vision through the grilleblades not more than 12 mm apart. Minimum free area shall be at least 60%. Louvershall be of the adjustable width double frame type with a frame each side of the door.Door grilles shall be fitted where indicated on the Drawings.

Door grilles shall be with extruded Aluminium frame and Aluminium blades.

22.2.16 FRESH AIR INTAKE

The fresh air intake shall be fitted with external louvers, sand trap louvers, opposed bladevolume control damper, aluminium insect wire mesh and bird screen and filter asindicated on the drawings.

Filter media thickness shall not be less than 45 mm and shall be washable metallic filter.

Louvers shall be with extruded aluminium frame and with aluminium blades of not lessthan 2 mm thick. Louvers shall have powder coated finish as approved by Architect.

Sand louvers shall have double deflection sand passage with separation efficiency of notless than 80% on 20-200 micron test dust and 50% on 1-70 micron test dust.

Sand louvers shall be of aluminium sections with 2 mm thick casing and 1.6 mm thickblades. The base of the louver shall have self-emptying sand holes.Where exposed to view, Sand louver shall have powder coated finish as per Architectapproval.

22.2.17 DAMPERS

a) Volume Control Dampers




AEB 695-0748


Volumes control dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return airduct connection whether or not indicated on the drawings for the proper volumecontrol and balancing of the system.

The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shallhave multi-leaf double skin, aerofoil section, opposed action blades. Individual bladesshould not exceed 2200 mm. in length or 175 mm. in width. Double skin blades shallbe made out of 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet with seamed edges. Dampersframes shall be galvanized made out of steel sheet. The thickness shall be 18 G formax duct width of 900 mm. & 16 G for duct sizes of width exceeding 900 mm. Bladeends shall be gasketed to minimize air leakage.

Damper quadrants shall be of cast metal construction, marked OPEN and SHUT indamper sizes up to 300x150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18 gaugegalvanized steel sheet.

The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear airflow area equal to theduct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance betweenthe blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. Indication of damper bladeposition shall be provided.

b) Splitter Dampers

At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, anadjustment, splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted two gauge heavier than theduct, with operating rod and locking quadrant. These deflecting dampers shall bepermanently set and locked in position after completion of the installation and

adjustment with length extending through the duct to externally mounted bearingplates.

c) Non Return Dampers

Non return dampers shall be manufactured similar to duct dampers but shallincorporate additionally, felt rubber or neoprene strips on long edges of blades toensure positive shut-off and quiet closure.

Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similar edged to prevent ingress of dust and sandparticles.

d) Fire Dampers

Fire dampers with fusible links shall be fixed in ducts at all floor crossings, wallcrossings of kitchen and crossings of fire rated walls, irrespective of it being shown onthe drawings or not, without any additional cost.

Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type.

The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and bestacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be arrangedfor vertical or horizontal operation as detailed on the drawings.The damper fusible links shall be rated at 73.8c C. (165F)




AEB 695-0749


The dampers shall be leakage rated class 1 according to UL 555S or equivalentstandards and fire rated 2 hours resistance. Both the curtain and fusible link shall beaccessible for servicing through air tight inspection doors placed up or down streamwherever possible.Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 250x250 mm. or full duct width on ducts

of less than 450 mmDucting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict compliance with UL555and NFPA 90A.

Any necessary fixing frameworks shall be supplied and fitted as recommended by themanufacturer, by the Works Contractor.

e) Smoke dampers

Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installedwhere shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet therequirements of the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B.

Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of ULStandards 555S. Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in dynamic systems. The dampershall have a dynamic closure airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at thedamper's installed location and a dynamic closure pressure rating of 4 in. wg.

Dampers shall have a UL555S Leakage rating of Class I and a Temperature rating of350 °F. Dampers shall have a UL555S operational airflow rating equal to or greater thanthe airflow at its installed location and an operational pressure rating of 4 in. wg. Damperactuators shall be factory mounted and qualified for use with the damper in accordancewith UL555S. Damper actuators shall be electric type for 24 volt operation.

Manufacturer's submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around thedamper.

All UL555S Dynamic Closure Ratings, Operational Ratings and Leakage Ratings shall bequalified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the damper. UL ratings shallallow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally.

The Damper Manufacturer's submittal data shall certify all air performance pressure dropdata is licensed in accordance with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program for Test Figures5.2, 5.3 and 5.5. Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance withthe latest edition of AMCA Standard 500-D.

Damper blades shall be 16 ga. stainless steel 3 Vee type with three longitudinal groovesfor reinforcement. Blades shall be completely symmetrical relative to their axle pivotpoint, presenting identical resistance to airflow and operation in either direction throughthe damper (blades that are non-symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point or utilizeblade stops larger than 0.5 in. are unacceptable).

Damper frames shall be stainless steel formed into a structural hat channel shape withreinforced corners. Bearings shall be stainless steel type rotating in extruded holes in thedamper frame. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type.

f )Motorized dampersMotorized dampers shall be used as indicated in drawings. Motorized dampers shall beprovided with feed back signal which will be connected to the BMS.




AEB 695-0750


22.2.18 SOUND ATTENUATORS

The ductwork of TFAHU/CAR PARK supply/extract fans shall be attenuated to limit the

noise level to the values specified in the design criteria. The method of fabrication andsupporting ducts should be such as to avoid generation of noise because of airmovements or drumming of sheet metal.

The silencers shall be provided in the supply and return air ducts as shown on tenderdrawings. The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4718 fordynamic insertion loss, self generated noise and aerodynamic performance.

The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection.Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining airducting. The contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to thecharacteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers.

22.2.19 ACOUSTIC PROVISIONS

Acoustic liner for duct work of fan coil unit shall be made up of black, strong, durable,dimensionally stable woven glass fabric with zero fiber migration of 15 mm thicknessand 48 kg /m3 density up to a length of 3.0 meter from the face of the unit.

The contractor shall provide rubber loaded vinyl sheet-quadzero brand of weight 8Kg/m2 below the ceiling concealed FCU in the ceiling space to prevent any noisebreakout from the equipment irrespective of it being mentioned in the BOQ ornot,without any additional cost.

22.2.20 PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

General

Each part of the system of piping shall be complete in all details and provided with allcontrol valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation. The tenderdrawings indicate generally the sizes of all main piping but the right is reserved to modifythe runs of piping to accommodate conditions during construction.

All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat

appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and paralleled or at right angles tostructural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom. Pipingshall not pass in front of door ways or windows and shall be generally arranged so that itis least 2.5 cm. from the finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be allowed foraccessibility, servicing and proper insulation works.

Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls or slabs. Pipes shall be pitchedfor proper circulation and drainage.

Run outs shall be graded in such a manner as to prevent air traps being formed withinthem when the mains expand or contract. Automatic or open vents are to be provided athigh points, piped to suitable drains or terminating over expansion tanks whereverpossible.




AEB 695-0751


All drain piping shall pitch down in the direction of flow. All low points of the system mustbe fitted with drain valves to allow the complete draining of the system. Bottom of allrisers must have dirt pockets of the size of riser and at least 15 cms. Long with a drainvalve fitted. All water piping to equipment and valves shall be connected with eitherflanges or unions for dismantling and removal. All piping shall ream after cutting to

remove all burrs.

All reduction in sizes of piping in the direction of downward pitch shall be installed witheccentric fittings to maintain a level top.

Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending pipes will not normally be allowed,except that bending of back steel pipes 50 mm. nominal diameter and smaller shall bepermitted, where space conditions allow for a bending radius of at least 10 times thediameter of the pipe. A hydraulic pipe bender shall be used to bend all pipes. Bendsshowing kinks, wrinkles or other malformations will not be acceptable. Cutting andshutting of bends will not be permitted.

Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric lightoutlets or extend beyond footing lines, as determined by the drawings.

In placing pipes through sleeves, near walls, partitions or in chases, care must be takento provide sufficient space for pipe covering. Where pipes are held in vices, as and whenscrewing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe surface is not damaged. Any pipework so damaged shall not be fitted.

All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground and where possible stored undercover. Pipes corroded beyond normal „stock-rust‟ condition shall not be used. Specialcare should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign material entering open ends of pipes

during erection. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe will not beconsidered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter.

Screwed iron caps or plugs or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood, ragpaper or other make-shift plugs will not be permitted.

Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and flushedout. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned.

Liberal allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe by means ofchanges in the direction or by the inclusion of expansion joints in the piping system.

Chilled Water Pipes

Chilled water pipes shall be mild steel to ASTM or A53; SCH 40 /API 5LScrewed fittingsshall be used for 50 mm. pipes and smaller. Welding fittings shall be used for 65 mm.pipes and larger. Branch welds will not be permitted. Screwed fittings shall be 225 lbs,black malleable iron. Welding fittings shall be steel medium duty compatible with thepiping.

Sufficient number of unions shall be provided near the coils and valves for easydismantling.




AEB 695-0752


Welding

Where shown on the drawings or specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and flangesshall be used.

Care shall be taken to ensure that welding metal or flux does not project into the bore ofthe pipe. All welds shall be of good clean metal, free from slag and porosity, of eventhickness and contour, well fused with the parent metal, hammered on completion andfinished smooth.

The Engineer reserves the right to have cut for examination 2% of all welds made. TheContractor shall remake the joints at no extra charge.

All welded joints (except pipe welded end to end) shall be made by use of forged onepiece, welding flanges, caps, elbows, branch outlets and tees of approved make. Allsuch fittings etc., shall be of a type which maintains full wall thickness at all points, ampleradius, fillets and proper levels or shoulders at ends.

All joint welding may be by the electric arc or acetylene process.

Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves or other units needingmaintenance, servicing or requiring possible removal, the connecting joints shall be bymeans of unions or flanges. Pressure rating of the flanges shall match the pressurerating of the flanges on the equipment to which the pipe connects.Valves for Chilled Water System

In addition to valves, cocks and strainers etc., shown on all drawings, the contractor shall

include for the installation of sufficient valves, cocks and strainers to enable the system tooperate to the satisfaction of the engineer.

No asbestos containing materials shall be employed in any valve.

Valves shall bear the BSI Kite mark or equivalent denoting Quality System, accreditationand compliance with British Standards and where no Kite mark scheme exists, valvesshall be manufactured under an approved BS5750 Quality System.

All castings shall be clean close grained metal free from rough projections. Unlessotherwise specified valves of 50 mm nominal bore and under shall have female endsscrewed to BS 21 and valves 65 mm nominal bore and over shall have flanged ends.

Special care must be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid strainingtheir bodies, and preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The wrench shall alwaysbe applied to the side being attached to the pipe. When attaching pipe to a valve alreadyin place, a second wrench shall be used to hold the valve while the pipe is beingtightened. A pipe shall not be screwed so far into a valve as to damage the seat.

Flanged valves shall have matching flanges manufactured in accordance with BS4504.Composite flanges to BS4504 should be used when butterfly or other 'inside bolt circle'valves are installed in copper pipe work systems. All flanged valves (all services ) shall be epoxy coated both internally and externally inorder to prevent corrosion and pitting, valves shall be suitable for the fluid carried and thetemperatures, test and working pressures of the system in which they are installed.




AEB 695-0753


All valves which contain copper alloy shall be of gunmetal or capable of withstandingdezincification.

All valves on potable water services shall be approved by the Local Water Authority and

WRc. As indicated in the drawings minimum the following valves shall be installed.

Isolating Valves

For sizes up to and including 50 mm shall be bronze (to BS1400 LG2) gate valve toBS5154 PN20 Series B. Valves shall be complete with position indicator and lockingdevice, asbestos free gland packing, with non-rising stem, threaded bonnet, WRcapproved, one piece wedge and BS21 taper thread (ISO R7). Valves shall be Kitemarked.

For sizes 65 mm and above shall be cast iron (to BS1452 Gr 220) gate valve to BS5150PN16. Valves shall be complete with locking device and open shut indicator, rising stem,outside screw, zinc free bronze trim, wedge facing ring and body seat ring shall be ofgunmetal, flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kite marked.

Regulating Valves

Sizes up to and including 50mm valves shall be of the bronze double regulating, toBS7350 PN20, Series B. WRc approved, lock shield type, DZR rising stem, screwedbonnet, hand wheel operated, micrometer style indicator, Parabolic slotted DZRregulating disk, with double regulating device. The end connections shall be threaded toBS21 Tr (ISO 7) except for the ½" size, which shall be parallel. Valves shall be Kitemarked.

Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron double regulating valve, to BS7350 PN16, andshall be with non-rising stem and locking device, inside screw, ductile iron bonnet andfitted with EPDM coated regulating disk, double regulating device and indicator, backseating feature, flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kite marked.

Manual Commissioning Sets-Balancing Valves

For the purpose of balancing water distribution systems accurately (5%), the followingcommissioning valves must be installed as indicated in the drawings , and where elserequired for balancing the system. Commissioning sets (balancing valves) shall compriseof a metering station and a close coupled double regulating valve and shall be installed

with a minimum of 5 diameters uninterrupted upstream length of straight pipe. Valvesshall be as following :-

Sizes up to and including 50 mm shall be bronze commissioning set, comprising of

(i) Bronze metering station, to BS7350 PN20 Series B and must be fitted with doublesealing feature test points

(ii) Bronze double regulating valve, to BS7350PN20 series B. Lock shield type, WRcapproved, Micrometer style indicator, rising DZR stem, screwed bonnet, Parabolicand slotted DZR regulating disk with ends connections to BS21 Tr (ISO 7) except ½"size which shall be parallel. Valves shall be Kite marked.Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron commissioning set, comprising of




AEB 695-0754


(i) Stainless steel metering station to BS7350 with extension pieces to mount test points(ii) Cast iron double regulating valve to BS7350 PN16, inside screw, non-rising stem and

locking device, ductile iron bonnet, and fitted with EPDM coated regulating disk,double regulating device and indicator, back seating feature. Valve shall also beflanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kite marked.

Strainers

Strainers, in addition to where shown on drawings shall be fitted prior to all major items ofplant including all pumps, air handling units, control valves, etc.Sizes upto and including 50 mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) "Y" type strainer PN32Series B. WRC approved, with perforated stainless steel screen 0.75mm diameter holesfor 'fine' straining and 22.6% free flow area per the square cm. of element area. Strainershall be with screwed cap and shall be fitted with gland cock (hose union type) for blowdown connection and shall also have drilled and tapped bosses on each side of the bodyfitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points. Ends shall be threaded to BS21 (ISO R7).

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) "Y" type strainer to PN16Series B with perforated stainless steel screen 1.6 mm diameter holes for 'fine' strainingand 34% free flow area per square cm. of element area. Strainers shall be with boltedcover and fitted with gland cock (hose union type) for blow down connection and shallhave drilled and tapped bosses on each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2plugged points, flanged to BS4504 PN16.

Non Return Valves

Non-return valves shall be fitted where plant must operated on an automatic changeover

basis or where flow reversal can occur.

Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) check valve to BS5154PN25. Kite marked and WRc approved, horizontal swing pattern with threaded cover,nitrile disk, and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipe (with verticalflow upwards).end threaded internal BS21 (ISO 7).

Bronze double check valves shall be installed to prevent contamination of water causedby back siphonage, back flow and cross connection in supplies such as those to hosetaps, cisterns, stand pipes, showers and basins.

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) check valves with lever and

air cushion to BS5153 PN16, of the horizontal swing pattern with bolted cover, outsidelever and air cushion, zinc-free bronze trim and rubber faced disk and flanged to BS4504PN16 and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipelines.

Drain/Gland Cocks

Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants. Drain cocks shall be of thehose union pattern gland cock in bronze (BS1400 LG2).WRc approved, asbestos freegland packing and shall be threaded to BS21 complete with captive cap. The plugs shallhave square head with a slot to indicated plug position.




AEB 695-0755


Flow Measurement

For the purpose of the flow and temperature measurement and the proportionalbalancing of water distribution system, the contractor shall provide a digital(microprocessor) flow measurement test set and shall be suitable for portable or bench

mounted use.

Screwed Joints on Steel Piping

Screwed joints shall be clean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with approved joiningcompound and long strand hemp. After joints have been formed, all surplus hemp shallbe cut away and the joints wiped clean. Where pipes are galvanized, care shall be takento ensure that threads are carefully cut so that the number of exposed threads areminimised.

Flanged Joints

All flanged joints shall be flush and truly aligned and made with approved brasscorrugated rings or compressed asbestos in compositions. Flanges for connection towelded pipe shall be „slip-on‟ or „welding-neck‟ standard steel type, made as called for inthe schedules. Flanges or unions shall be provided on straight runs at not greater than22 m. intervals.

Unions

Unions are required on pipe sizes 50 mm. and under. Unions shall be ground taper jointtype, good for 150 psi working pressure.

Direct connection between pipes of dissimilar materials must be avoided to minimizechances of galvanic corrosion. Dielectric unions should be used for connection betweensteel and copper pipes.

Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be fitted in straight lengths of pipe at distances not exceeding 18metres unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

All flexible couplings and expansion joints must be selected so that the working pressure,temperature and movement encountered will not be more than 75% of that allowable forthe joint selected. One side of the joints must have all piping and/or adjacent equipment

adequately anchored. The other side must be supported, aligned and guided so as toallow free movement without imposing unnecessary stresses on the joints.

Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have individual solid steelring reinforced with a carcass of highest grade woven cotton or acceptable syntheticfibre. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line size and to meet working pressureconditions, face measurements etc., as designated. They shall be of an arch typeconstruction with the number of arches (corrugations) dependant on projectedmovement. All joints must be finish-coated with eypalon paint to prevent ozone attach.Split back or retaining rings shall be furnished.

Joints size 2” and below shall have threaded malleable iron unions on both sides. All




AEB 695-0756


joints shall be suitable for minimum test pressure of none and a half times the workingpressure or 225 ft. of water, whichever is higher.

Flexible connections shall be provided to Fans, AHU‟S, FCU‟S, pumps, chillers etc. inorder to prevent transmission of vibration to pipe work.

Automatic Air Vents

At all high points in the system, an automatic air vent shall be fitted. Air vents shall be ofthe float type. The size and working pressure shall be as per the schedule. Automatic airvents shall be connected to the nearest drain.

Air Cocks and Bottles

Air bottles shall be formed from 1.5 m. length of pipe one size larger than the pipe beingvented. A 15 mm. pipe fitted with 15 mm. needle valve shall be welded into top and takento low level. These items shall be fitted so that they are not concealed and are readilyaccessible. Where equipment is cased, vents shall be extended so that they can beoperated from the outside of the casing

Pipe Supports, Hangers and Anchors

All supports and hangers for steel piping shall be ferrous. Supports for copper pipes shallbe non-ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports shall beset out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other fittings requiringmaintenance.

All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centres asdetailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the spacing

shall be of a shorter interval. All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unlessotherwise indicated, pipe changers shall be spaced as follows:

20 to 32 mm. - Not over 2.4 m. apart - 10 mm. rods40 to 100 mm. - Not over 3.0 m. apart - 15 mm. rodsOver 100 mm. - Not over 3.6 m. apart - 22 mm. rods

Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains ordistortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall besupported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum ofdismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are removed.

All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers shall befurnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to besupported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted. Details of hangers and supportsto be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval beforefitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock-nuts and have provision for verticaladjustment of pipes.

Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel construction.Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by hangers consisting of malleable splitrings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller hangers wherespecified.




AEB 695-0757


Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipessupported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel clampssecurely bolted on the piping with the end extension bearings on the buildingconstruction.

Piping shall be anchored where required to localise expansion or to prevent undue strainon piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and shall beheavy forged or welded construction of approved design.

Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have treated hardwood or plastic inserts ofapproved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding the compression andallowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to metal contact.

All pipe supports hangers and anchors etc., are to be painted with two coats of anapproved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paintof grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.

Pipe Sleeves

All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an internaldiameter at least 25 mm. larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of the insulationfor insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also be provided with pipesleeves.

The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipesleeves around them shall be projected minimum 50 mm. on either sides of the wall, floorand roof slab.

Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of 22 gaugegalvanized sheet steel set flush with finished wall surfaces.

Flashing Sleeves

Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through water proof membranes.Flashing sleeves details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but generally,they shall be provided with an integral flange set into the membrane. The associatedpipes shall have flange and shield which shall extend beyond the insert and be sealedwith approved mastic.

Testing of Chilled Water Pipe work

The Works Contractor shall carry out hydraulic and performance tests, under actualconditions, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer before any thermal insulation isapplied.

The whole chilled water pipe work system shall be hydraulically tested to a pressureequivalent to one and a half times the maximum working pressure or ten atmospheres,whichever is higher. All flexible/ expansion joints shall be restrained to prevent axialstretch and all control subject to damage shall be isolated at the time of the pressure test.The indicated pressure shall be maintained for 4 hours without further application ofpressure and without visible leakage or a drop in the indicated pressure.




AEB 695-0758


When a section of pipe work is complete and ready for testing, it shall be plugged andthen slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to escape and avoiding allshock or water hammer. The Works Contractor shall make arrangements for all waterused in the test to be properly drained away.

Pipe work which fails under test, due to pressure loss or visible leakage, shall be relievedof pressure and all faulty joints or other defects made good.

Remedial work and test shall be repeated until the systems are tested successfully. If inthe opinion of the Engineer, damage has been caused during the remedial work, or faultymaterials have been used, the section under test will be condemned. The installationshall then be removed, cleared from site, replaced with new materials and re-tested asspecified.

The General Works Contractor shall provide the water and electricity supplies necessaryfor testing purposes.

Refrigerant Pipe work & Fittings

Refrigerant pipe work shall be refrigerant quality copper tube to BS 2871 Table 2(Material C106), fully annealed and internally degreased and cleaned, with capillaryfittings.

Piping shall be supported to prevent strains or distortion in the connected equipment,valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment,valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additionalsupports after these items are removed.

All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have UPVC sleeves of aninternal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of theinsulation for insulated services. All building expansion joints shall also be provided withpipe sleeves.

The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipesleeves through them shall be projected minimum 50 mm on either side of the walls, floorand roof slab.

Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of UPVC set flushwith finished wall surfaces.

Joints in copper pipe shall be flanged, flared (up to 19.05 mm O. D. only) or brazed (withor without capillary fittings). Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the HVCACode of Practice – Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.

Screwed joints shall not be accepted in refrigerant pipes except on the equipmentaccessories. In such cases the threads shall either be of taper form and used inconjunction with PTFE tape or an anaerobic sealant, or of parallel form associated withmachined joint faces and a suitable joint.

Copper pipe work shall be used as feed piping for all pressure gauge or similar fittings.

Compression fittings shall not be accepted on refrigerant pipe worke.




AEB 695-0759


Refrigerant pipe work shall not be arranged for running compressors in parallel (i.e. withcommon suction and/or discharge in pipes). The use of a number of compressors eachhaving an independent refrigerant circuit in a common evaporator shall be permittedprovided pressure tests between adjacent refrigerant circuits in the evaporator arecarried out during manufacture.

The pipe work shall be designed so that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor (andpassing any oil separator fitted) shall be carried through the system and back to thecompressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.

Pipe work shall be firmly supported and secured to minimise vibration. Vibrationeliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimisetransmission of vibration or noise.

All refrigerant equipment shall have a strength and leakage pressure test aftermanufacture in accordance with the Table below:

Refrigerant High Side Test Pressure Low Side Test PressureKPa KPa

R-22 3000 1700

A pressure test equal to the low test pressure quoted in the table of equipment testpressures shall be applied to the refrigerant system after all piping has been fitted. Thistest shall be in addition to the pressure test on each unit at completion of themanufacture.

Provision shall be made for the supply of up to 3 sets of pressure test sheets for eachmachine and system. It shall be the Works Contractor‟s responsibility to ensure the sheetcontent and presentation is acceptable to the Engineer.

Refrigerant pipe work shall be insulated in accordance with QCS requirements.Manufacturer‟s recommendations shall likewise be considered. The insulated pipe workshall be additionally wrapped with 200 gm/sqm. quality glass cloth and painted with twocoats of approved weather proofing compound and finally provided with 0.63 mmaluminium cladding for outdoor piping.

PIPE SUPPORTS

i. All refrigerant piping shall be supported to prevent deflection, buckling and vibration.

ii. Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not more than1.2 metres on straight runs. Pipe supports & clamps shall be subject to approval ofthe Engineer.

iii. Pipe work on roofs and floors shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or rikkerstands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab or steelmembers.




AEB 695-0760


iv. Vertical pipework shall be supported on wall brackets with 'U' bolts or clamps.

v. Suspended pipework shall be supported with trapeze hangers with rods suspendedfrom inserts.

Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment afterinstallation of piping.

vii. All pipework passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be provided withpipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of insulation. The gap shall besealed with intumescent sealants.

Condensate Drain Piping

Condensate drains shall be provided in copper pipes to BS 2871 Part 1 Table „X‟ aboveground, UPVC class E to BS 3505 for vertical drops in the walls or below ground shall beadequately supported along their length. All condensate drains shall be fitted with 75 mmdeep trap with dirt pocket and removable plug provided and extended to the nearestdrains as shown in the drawings. Removable plugs shall be provided at every change indirection to allow rodding access.

All drain pipes shall be pressure tested at 6.0 meter of water before applying insulation orcovering the pipes. Drain test plugs with expandable rubber seal shall be used for thepurpose of testing.

Condensate drains within the building and on the roof shall be insulated with 10 mm thickrubber foam and weather proofed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All exposed pipesexternal to the building shall be painted with two coats of paint matching with the building

colour.

22.2.21 INSULATION

Scope

The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labour, materials,accessories and equipment necessary for the insulation of all air conditioning systemsand mechanical equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with theinsulation section of the specification.

General

All insulation shall be applied in a workman like manner by skilled workmen regularlyengaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be applied to clean and dry surfaces aftertests and approvals required by this specification have been completed.

On cold surfaces where a vapour barrier must be maintained, insulation shall be appliedwith a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapour seal. All hangers, supports, anchors,or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapoursealed to prevent condensation. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manneras to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation.

All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings orsleeves, except where fire stop materials are required.




AEB 695-0761


Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation.Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulationshields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapoursealed as required.

Surface Burning Characteristics

All insulation shall have surface burning characteristic ratings as tested by ASTM E-84,UL 723 or NFPA 255 not exceeding;

Flame Spread 25Smoke Developed 50

Composite shall include insulation, jacketing and adhesive used to secure jacketing orfacing. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement,tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above.

Cold Piping Insulation

Cold piping shall include chilled water piping, refrigerant suction and condensate drainpiping.

a) General

i) Thermal insulation to pipe work shall be carried out by specialists and strictly inaccordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework prior to the witnessing of the pipe work pressure test by the Engineer and

authorized in writing by the Engineer giving clear instructions for further insulationto be applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of insulationapplied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the Works Contractor shall allowfor the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and equipmentfor inspection by the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of the thicknessspecified then the cut section shall be made good and the whole installationcompleted. Should any cut section show a deficiency in thickness, further sectionshall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspection. If a deficiency inthickness, further sections shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer forinspection.

If a deficiency in thickness or any other defects are found, the Works Contractor

shall remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the Engineer directs andthen shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with Specificationand restore it to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This work shall be carried out bythe Works Contractor at his own expense.

ii) Thermal insulation shall be applied to all pumps, valves, strainers, non-returnvalves, drain cocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points.Insulation of these components in the pipe work system up to and including 50mm. diameter pipe work shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suitand of the same size as the line pipe work. Components within the pipe worksystem 80 mm. diameter and above, as well as all flanged components up to 50diameter, shall have purpose made boxes applied. Each valve, strainer and NRVboxes shall be made using 0.67 mm. aluminium sheet with 50 mm. fibreglass




AEB 695-0762


insulation fastened tot he inside of the valve box with approved adhesive. Eachvalve box shall be hinged along one side with a minimum of three fastening clipson the other side. Samples of boxes shall be submitted to the Engineer forapproval and approved received in writing prior to installation.

iii) No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings, vertical or horizontalbuilder‟s work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

iv) All fibre glass section insulation shall have a density of not less than 96kilogrammes/m3 and a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.037 w/m20 C. Allpipe work insulation shall be applied to the pipe work using proprietary brandadhesive approved by the Engineer.

b) Pipe Work Exposed and within the plant room.

Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm. thick aluminium foiled faced preformed sectionalglass fibre and shall be applied to all pipe work, valves, flanges and fittings in accordancewith this Specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each joint shall be sealed using75 mm. wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the whole covered in 60z heavy duty glasscloth and all joints lapped and sealed with approved vapour seal. Vapour seal, first coat,shall be applied by dipping the cloth into the vapour seal prior to applying to the pipe workinsulation. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied with brush. Finally, theinstallation shall be finished with a system of 0.67 mm. thickness aluminium smoothpolished sheet cladding, cut and formed into sections to suit the extreme outsidedimensions of the insulated work for straight runs. Each length of aluminium claddingshall have a “snap-lock” fixing.

Cladding sections shall be finally arranged with the longitudinal seams turned away from

the normal working area. Bends, tapers, tees, other fittings, valves and pump bodiesshall be encased in specially pressed or otherwise formed aluminium single sections.Circular bends over 200 mm. outside diameter may be encased in a maximum of 3 No.equal segmental pressed or formed sections.

c) Pipe work within the Building

i) Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm thick aluminium foil faced preformed sectionalglass fibre and shall be applied to all pipe work, flanges and fittings in accordance withthis specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each section shall be secured tothe pipe work by applying an approved adhesive of high quality to the surfaces of bothpipe work and insulation section. The sections shall be fixed in place immediately.

Note that the adhesive shall also applied to the edges of the fibreglass section.

ii) All joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide aluminium adhesive tape. The insulationshall then be covered with high quality fiber glass cloth of 200 gm/sq.m. quality,sealed with an approved vapour seal.

iii) When the pipe work insulation is exposed to view within the building, the insulationshall be finished with one coat of rubberised paint of a colour approved by theEngineer.

iv) All pipe work within the plant room shall be finished with a system of 0.67mmthickness aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding.




AEB 695-0763


d) Vapour Seal and Adhesives

i) The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and haveanti-rodent and anti-fungal properties. Bitumen based products shall not be used.

ii) The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use.

Duct Work Insulation

Conditioned air, for the purpose of this specification, shall consist of air that is cooled.Both supply and return duct work as well as outside air intake ductwork shall beinsulated.

a) General

i) Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high grade qualityby killed workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance with followingspecification.

ii) No thermal insulation shall be applied on any ductwork prior to inspection by theEngineer and a site inspection report signed by the Engineer authorizing theapplication of thermal insulation. As and when necessary, joints must be leftuncovered until tests are carried out successfully.

iii) No insulation shall be enclosed in false ceilings, vertical or horizontal builder‟s workshafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

iv) Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any building

shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified non-combustible.Thermal insulating materials used within any building shall be free from substanceswhich in the event of a fire would generate appreciable quantities of smoke, noxious ortoxic fumes.

v) All openings in roof slabs and walls for passing ducts shall be sealed and/orweatherproofed suitably. Sleeves shall be provided where ducts pass throughmasonry walls or partitions.

vi) All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, then treated with an approvedcorrosion inhibitor before insulation is applied. Note that the inhibitor coating wouldnot be required for galvanized surfaces.

vii) Insulation shall be applied to all ductwork, volume control dampers, silencers, mixingboxes, fans, cooler casings and other items of equipment contained within theSpecification detailed below.

viii) The Works Contractor shall allow for the cost of sampling in-place insulation fromductwork or plants, for inspection by the Engineer. Any sample found not inaccordance with the approved material should be replaced at the Works Contractor‟sexpenses.

ix) All fibreglass rigid slabs shall have a density of not less than 48 kg/m3 and a thermalconductivity not greater than 0.037 W/M2.




AEB 695-0764


x) Where specifically stated, insulation shall be additionally secured using screwedthread type plastic hangers glued to the ductwork at 500 mm. centres. The insulationshall be restrained by push-on circular plastic discs terminated below the externalsurface of the insulation after which any projecting threads shall be cut level with theinsulation. Ends and edges of sheets shall be lapped sufficiently and sealed where

insulated duct enters or leaves the building.

xi) Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proofed against rotting, mouldand fungal growth and attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects besuitable for continuous use through the range of operating temperatures and within theenvironment indicated.

b) Supply and Return Ductwork within the Building

i) Rectangular supply air ductwork within air conditioned zones shall be insulated using25 mm. rigid fibreglass slabs covered with reinforced aluminium foil. Panels shall besecured to the ductwork by applying an approved high quality adhesive to the surfacesof both the ductwork and insulation panel. Fibreglass matts shall be used for circularducts instead of fibreglass slabs. Insulation shall also have 25 mm. wide galvanizedbands secured at 600 mm. center to center for circular ducts.

ii) All insulation joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium tape. Theinsulation shall then be covered with high quality fiber glass cloth of 200 gm/sq. m.quality and sealed with an approved vapour seal .

iii) All supply and return ductwork running in unconditioned space shall be insulated using50 mm. foil backed rigid fibreglass panels.

iv) Exhaust duct traversing conditioned space shall be insulated using 50 mm. foil backedrigid fibre glass panels.

c) Vapour Seal and Adhesive

i) The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant, and haveanti-rodent and anti-fungal properties.

ii) Bitumen based products shall not be used.

iii) The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use.

d) Aluminum Cladding

All exposed duct work and pipework on the roof and inside the plant room shall bealuminium cladded with 0.9 mm thick aluminium sheet.

22.2.22 BUILDER’S WORK

The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where pipes,conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof slabs asmeasured in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as deemed necessary by the Engineer.Bridges details shall be agreed with the Architect and Engineer.




AEB 695-0765


Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

22.2.23 CHILLED WATER TREATMENT

Water treatment shall be provided to prevent corrosion, fungal growth, scaling anddiscoloration. Chilled water treatment shall be carried out by a specialist under thesupervision of engineer.

A dosing pot complete with all accessories shall be fitted on the chilled water circuit toadd corrosion inhibitor chemicals to the system at the time of commissioning andperiodically during operation. The pot shall be fabricated out of M.S. sheet suitable for225 psig working pressure.

The pot shall be complete with chemical feed valve, non-return valve, drain valve, water-in and out valves and air cock.The Contractor shall add the first charge of chemical to the system and supply additionalchemical adequate, for the operation during Warranty period. Testingchemicals/instruments shall be included in the scope of supply.

The dosing pot and all connected pipes and fittings shall be insulated in the samemanner as the chilled water pipes.

Details of treatment system offered and technical literature shall be included with thetender offer.

22.2.24 PAINTING AND FINISHING

All steel work in connection with pipe supports exposed to the elements are to be paintedwith two coats of a rust preventive paint approved by the Engineer, preferably zinc richprimer, followed by one undercoat and one topcoat.

All exposed metal surfaces of air conditioning and electrical apparatus, motors, guards,pipe work, hangers etc. must be galvanized and painted with one coat of under-coat andtwo coats of enamel paint finish to a colour approved by the Engineer.

After completion of the installation, the entire work shall be checked for finish andappearance. Any portion of work found damaged, unpainted or not finished to thesatisfaction of the Engineer shall be rectified.

22.2.25 IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING

All insulated and non-insulated pipe work and ductwork shall be identified by colourcodes indicated and basic colour identification bands to BS 1710 (1984).

The safety colour and code indication bands shall be 100 mm. wide between two basiccolour identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be at centresof not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant, changes in directionand both sides where the pipework passes through walls, floors, etc. and all serviceaccess points.

Pipe and ductwork sizes, content flow and return (F & R) indication and direction of flow




AEB 695-0766


arrows in black shall be applied on the basic colour identification band as detailed inTables 1, 2 and Appendix „D‟ of BS 1710 (1984).

The safety colour, contents, code and colour identification bands shall be applied bymeans of self adhesive coloured or printed tape.

Flow and return (F& R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letter 25 mm.high on 50 mm. wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band around thepipe insulation.

Pipe contents shall be in black lettering 25 mm. on 50 mm. wide clear self adhesivelabels.

The materials employed shall be as for pipe work identification, i.e. self adhesive plastic. All the lettering and wording shall be in English.

Where the pipe work/ductwork contents constitute a hazard, a symbol as given in BS1710 (1984) should be added to the type colour.The hazard information shall be given as briefly as possible, using commonly acceptedforms such as a number indicating which floor of the building.

Where the identification of the space is by room number this must be agreed with theuser who otherwise may have numbered the rooms differently

22.2.26 ELECTRICAL WORKS & CONTROL SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL WORKS

General

All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical specificationsand shall conform to the regulations of Ministry of Electricity and Water.

All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to functionwithout damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary within thefollowing tolerances:

i. Voltage - + 6%ii. Frequency - + 0.3%

All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolongedoperation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere wherethey are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient temperature shall bemade by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above ambient or by derating thecapacity and ratings

Electrical Motors

All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over themotors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The type ofwinding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class „B‟. The motors for exhaust fansshall have the insulation suitable to operate on 500 C ambient temperature.




AEB 695-0767


All motors shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, A.C.system. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage andinsulation requirements shall not be accepted.

Electrical Wiring

All power cabling up to and including isolators to the control panels in plant rooms. Pumproom, Chiller yard on roof and fan controlled isolator as indicated on the drawing shall becarried out by the Electrical Contractor. The electrical supply shall be terminated into themain incomer of the control panel/isolator. It is the A.C. Contractor‟s responsibility tocontinue the connections from the isolator up to all the air conditioning and ventilationunits.

The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controlsassociated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works. A.C. Contractor‟s scope ofworks shall include but not be limited to the following:

All control wiring necessary conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air conditioningequipment, controls and remote emergency push buttons (if required), etc. All HVACcontrol components such as flow switches, temperature/humidity sensors, thermostatsetc., are to be wired to control panel and other associated components using armouredcable on galvanized cable rack/tray. Power cabling from TFAHU/FCU control panel toTFAHU/FCU , control panel to pumps, isolator to chillers, pressurization unit and powercabling from isolators to fans, etc. shall be carried out by the A.C. Contractor. (Forcontinuity, refer electrical drawings and specifications).

Specification for conduits, cables, cable trays to conform to electrical

specifications.

Starters

All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L./Star Delta startershaving the following facilities:

To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage dropTo protect the motor from overload in each phase.Start/stop push button.ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp.Single phase preventer

All three phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well asunder voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.

Isolators

All electrical drives shall have local isolators, weather proof. Isolators shall be of reputedmanufacturers, up to Engineer‟s approval.

Earthing

All motors starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metalparts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth.




AEB 695-0768


Testing

All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for looseconnections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition,functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and

sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification.The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may attend ifhe so desires.

With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted,the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 Kv for one minute, across thefollowing points:

1. Phase to phase2. Phase to neutral3. Phase to earth4. Neutral to earth

Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the Engineerwithin fourteen days of the test.

Approval of Workmanship Standards

The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer whoshall carry out periodic inspection of completed work and work in progress.

Any work not to the Engineer‟s satisfaction during such inspection shall be replaced to astandard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the contract for the subsequent

inspection.

Tags, Colour Coding

All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All componentsshall be labelled in the control panel as per the approved drawings. All wires shall becolour coded in accordance with the Electrical regulations of the Ministry of Electricity &Water. Labelling system shall be agreed with the Engineer.

Wiring Regulations

All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of KAHRAAMA.

22.2.27 WARRANTY

The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion ofthe installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due todefective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during thisperiod shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor.

All the compressors shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of practicalcompletion. The Contractor shall also guarantee the performance and efficiency of theplant and equipment as per the specifications for a similar period of 400 days after thepractical completion and if the services of Contractor‟s personnel are requisitioned duringthis period, such shall be made available free of cost to the Client.




AEB 695-0769


If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do soby another agency at the Contractor‟s entire risk and expense without prejudice to anyrights of the Client.

22.2.28 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

The technical schedules listed hereunder must be filled in and signed by the Tenderer and theymust be attached with the offer with complete engineering catalogues for every piece ofequipment to enable the Engineer to evaluate each offer. Offers submitted without suchinformation will not be acceptable.

Air cooled Chillers

Reference :………………………………………………………………..

Quantity :………………………………………………………………..

Manufacturer/Model :……………………………………………………………..

Refrigerant :……………………………………………………………..

Type :……………………………………………………………..

Capacity in TR (Each) :…………………………………………………………..

Cooler Flow US GPM : …………………………………………………………..

Chilled Water0F(In/Out) :…………………………………………………………..

Scale Factor :…………………………………………………………..

Permissible pressure drop :………………………………………………………….. Across cooler (in ft.)

Air on Condenser (0 F) :…………………………………………………………..

Electrical Characteristics :…………………………………………………………..

Type of Compressors :…………………………………………………………..

Number of Compressors :…………………………………………………………..

Type of Drive :…………………………………………………………..

Type of Motor :…………………………………………………………..

Class of Insulation :…………………………………………………………..

Method of Start :…………………………………………………………..




AEB 695-0770


F.L.A. of each :………………………………………………………….. Compressors

Inrush Amperes of each :…………………………………………………………..

Compressor room

Full load Amperes of :………………………………………………………….. each Chiller

Operating weight/chiller :…………………………………………………………..

Physical dim. of chiller :…………………………………………………………..

Overall length, (Ft) :…………………………………………………………..

Overall width, (Ft) :…………………………………………………………..

Overall height, (Ft) :…………………………………………………………..

Total power input (KW) :…………………………………………………………..

APLV (KW) :…………………………………………………………..

*1/3 Octave bandsound data :………………………………………………………….

*Note : ARI 370 shall be applicable. This data must include all of the measurement points

and should not be restricted to the average of the data points.

Maximum sound pressureLevel at 3m from chiller (dba)…………………………………………………………….

Chilled Water Pumps

Reference :…………………………………………………………..

Serving :…………………………………………………………..

Type :…………………………………………………………..

Quantity :…………………………………………………………..

Manufacturer :…………………………………………………………..

Model Number :…………………………………………………………..

Capacity of each, USGPM :…………………………………………………………..

Head, feet :…………………………………………………………..

Speed, rpm :…………………………………………………………..




AEB 695-0771


Power supply :…………………………………………………………..

B.H.P. :…………………………………………………………..

Motor Type/H.P./Make :………………………………………………………….. Class of Insulation :…………………………………………………………..

Net Weight-each pump set :…………………………………………………………..

Overall dimension of :………………………………………………………….. foundations

Components

Flexible coupling :…………………………………………………………..

C.I. base plate :…………………………………………………………..

Rubber isolators :…………………………………………………………..

Pressure gauges :…………………………………………………………..

Flexible connections :…………………………………………………………..

Mechanical seal :…………………………………………………………..

Controls

a. Motorised valve

Make/Model :…………………………………………………………..

Type/Size :…………………………………………………………..

Power Supply :…………………………………………………………..

Power Consumption :…………………………………………………………..

b. Temperature Controls

Make/Model :…………………………………………………………..

Type :…………………………………………………………..

Temperature range :…………………………………………………………..

Power supply :…………………………………………………………..

Water Pressurization Unit

Flexible coupling :…………………………………………………………..




AEB 695-0772


C.I. base plate :…………………………………………………………..

Rubber isolators :…………………………………………………………..

Pressure gauges :…………………………………………………………..

Air handling Units

Reference :…………………………………………………………..

Location :…………………………………………………………..

Make/Model :…………………………………………………………..

Type :…………………………………………………………..

Total cfm :…………………………………………………………..

Fresh Air cfm :…………………………………………………………..

Casing Construction :…………………………………………………………..

Overall Dimension :…………………………………………………………..

Cooling Coil :…………………………………………………………..

Total Cooling Capacity :…………………………………………………………..

Sensible Cooling :………………………………………………………….. Capacity

Coil Face Velocity :…………………………………………………………..

Coil rows/deep/fins per inch :…………………………………………………………..

Water temperature In/Out :…………………………………………………………..

Water Flow, USGPM :…………………………………………………………..

Air on Coil, DB/WB0 F : …………………………………………………………..

Air off Coil, DB/WB0 F : …………………………………………………………..

Pressure drop through :………………………………………………………….. Coil in W.G.

1/3 Octave bandSound data through :…………………………………………………………. Casing panel

Fans




AEB 695-0773


Type / Make :…………………………………………………………..

Total Static Pressure :…………………………………………………………..

B.H.P. :…………………………………………………………..

Motor H.P./ Make :…………………………………………………………..

Class of Insulation :…………………………………………………………..

Miscellaneous Information

Type of filters and thickness :…………………………………………………………..

Type of Insulation and :………………………………………………………….. density

Controls provided :…………………………………………………………..

Reheaters Capacity :…………………………………………………………

Fan Coil Unit

Reference :…………………………………………………………..

Make :…………………………………………………………..

Type/Model :…………………………………………………………..

Location :…………………………………………………………..

Sensible Cooling :………………………………………………………….. Capacity (Each)

Total Cooling Cap. (Each) :…………………………………………………………..

Entering Air Temp. DB,F :…………………………………………………………..

Entering Air Temp. WB,F :…………………………………………………………..

Air Quantity,CFM :…………………………………………………………..

Water Temp. Entering Coil ,F :…………………………………………………………..

Water Temp. Leaving Coil ,F:…………………………………………………………..

No. of rows deep :…………………………………………………………..

No. of fins per inch :…………………………………………………………..

Water Flow rate , gpm :…………………………………………………………..




AEB 695-0774


Water Pressure drop , :………………………………………………………….. Through coil ,Pa

Power supply :…………………………………………………………..

Motor kW / Make :…………………………………………………………..

Overall dimensions :…………………………………………………………..

Electric Heaters Cap. :…………………………………………………………..

Insulation

Manufacturer :…………………………………………………………..

Type :…………………………………………………………..

Density :…………………………………………………………..

Finish :…………………………………………………………..

Ventilation/Exhaust Fans

Reference :…………………………………………………………..

Location :…………………………………………………………..

Service :…………………………………………………………..

Type :…………………………………………………………..

Make :…………………………………………………………..

Model :…………………………………………………………..

Size :…………………………………………………………..

CFM :…………………………………………………………..

Static Pressure ,Pa :…………………………………………………………..

Motor Rating / Make :…………………………………………………………..

22.2.29 COMMISSIONING SHEETS

COMMISSIONING SHEET OF PACKAGED AIR-COOLED CHILLER

Project:

Chiller Operating Results: Date : Sheet No. of:




AEB 695-0775


Plant Ref:

Unit Voltage per phase : L1 L2 L3

Current Voltage per phase : L1 L2 L3

Control Voltage :

Suction Pressure : Circuit – 1Circuit - 2

Discharge : Circuit – 1Circuit - 2

Oil Pressure : Compressor – 1 Compressor - 2Compressor – 3 Compressor - 4

Oil Level in Compressor at least 1/ 2?: Yes No

Is a liquefied line solenoid valve :

Operational in each circuit Yes No

Do step controls operate satisfactorily : Yes No

Do oil safety controls operate satisfactorily: Yes No

Is there a remote shut down switch?

Does it shut down Chiller or pump : Yes No

Super Heat Setting at XV : Circuit – 1Circuit – 2

System thermostat set point : 0C

Ambient temperature : 0C

Unit current amps at : A. 100% B. 75% C.50% D.25%

Part winding T-D operate properly (If any) Yes No

Do lock-out T-D operate properly : Yes No.

Crankcase Heater Operation : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory

Antifreeze Thermostat : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory

Sequence Selector Operation : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory

Condenser Fan Motor : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory

Cycling Operation : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory




AEB 695-0776


Pump Down Cycle : Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory

Chilled Water Inlet Temperature :0F

Chilled Water Outlet Temperature :0F

Chiller Inlet Pressure : bars

Chiller Outlet Pressure : bars

Certified by ……………….

COMMISSIONING SHEET OF CHILLED WATER PUMP SET

Project:

Pump Operating Results: Date : Sheet No. of

Pump Reference and Make :

Pump Model No. :

Designed Measured

Flow rate :

Pump Inlet Pressure :

Pump Outlet Pressure :

Pump Working Head ,FT :

Pump RPM :

Motor Horse Power :

Motor Running Current, AMPS :

Starter Overload Setting :

Voltage :

Water Temperature :

Certified by ………………………..




AEB 695-0777


COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

Project:

AHU Precommissioning Checks: Date : Sheet No. of

System Reference :

Installation Complete :

System Clean and Unobstructed :

Inspection Covers Fitted :

Balancing Dampers Open :

Grilles/Diffusers Open :

Fire Damper/Automatic Damper Operational :

Chilled Water Lines Insulated :

Condensate Drain Line CompletedWith „U‟ trap with Proper level :

Air Components Aligned :

Pulley Alignment/Belt Tension :

Motor/Fan Bearing Lubricated :

Filter in Position and Cleaned :

Flexible Connections :

Starter Overload Adequate for Load :

Control Circuit Operational :

Permanent Electrical Supply Available:




AEB 695-0778


Certified by …………………….

COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS (FAN AND COIL)

Project:

Results Date : Sheet No. of

Location :

System/Equip. Ref. :

Item Identification Design Measurement

Fan Make and Model No. :

Fan Type :

Motor Pulley Size :

Fan RPM :

Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz. :

Fan Belt Nos., Size :

Motor Power :

Motor Full Load Current :

Motor Running Current :

Starter Type :

Starter O.L. Sliting :

Air Volume Flow Rate :

Fan Static Pressure :

Air Temperature :

Filter Nos., Size :

Motorised Valve Operation : OK/Not OK




AEB 695-0779


Thermostat Operation : OK/Not OK

Condensate Drainage : OK/Not OK

Smoke Detector Operation : OK/Not OK

Filter Operation : OK/Not OKChilled Water In : Temperature 0F

Pressure Psi

Chilled Water Out : Temperature 0FPressure Psi

Air in Temperature : 0F.DB 0F.WB

Air Out Temperature : 0F.DB 0F.WB

Noise level at 1.0m :

Certified by ……………………

COMMISSIONING SHEET OF FAN AND COIL

Project:

Results Date : Sheet No. of

Location :

System/Equip. Ref. :

Item Identification Design Measurement

Fan Make and Model No. :

Fan Type :

Fan RPM :

Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz. :

Fan Belt Nos., Size :

Motor Power :

Motor Full Load Current :

Motor Running Current :




AEB 695-0780


Starter Type :

Starter O.L. Setting :

Air Volume Flow Rate :

Fan Static Pressure :

Air Temperature :

Filter Nos., Size :

Motorised Valve Operation : OK/Not OK

Thermostat Operation : OK/Not OK

Condensate Drainage : OK/Not OK

Smoke Detector Operation : OK/Not OK

Filter Operation : OK/Not OK

Chilled Water In : Temperature 0FPressure Psi

Chilled Water Out : Temperature 0F

Pressure Psi

Air In Temperature : 0F.DB 0F.WB

Air Out Temperature : 0F.DB 0F.WB

Noise level at 1.0m :

Certified by ………………...




AEB 695-0781


DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET

Project

System Date Sheet No. of

Reference Design Vol. Duct Size Duct Area Velocitym3/s mm m2 m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow) Units ………………………

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A ______________________________________________________________B ______________________________________________________________C______________________________________________________________D ______________________________________________________________E ______________________________________________________________

F ______________________________________________________________G ______________________________________________________________H ______________________________________________________________I ______________________________________________________________J ______________________________________________________________K ______________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter

Total of Velocities

Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure

Remarks

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________




AEB 695-0782



DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET (FRESH AIR)

Project

System Date Sheet No. of

Reference Design Vol. Duct Size Duct Area Velocitym3/s mm m2 m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow) Units ………………………

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A ______________________________________________________________B ______________________________________________________________C______________________________________________________________D ______________________________________________________________E ______________________________________________________________F ______________________________________________________________

G ______________________________________________________________H ______________________________________________________________I ______________________________________________________________J ______________________________________________________________K ______________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter

Total of Velocities

Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure

Remarks

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________




AEB 695-0783



GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

Project

System Reference Date Sheet No.of

Terminal Location Design Measured CommentsNo.

Free Area Volume Velocity Volume % ofm2 m3/s m/sec m3/s Design

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter __________________________________________________________________

Remarks __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________





AEB 695-0784


22.2.30 SCHEDULES, EXPLANATORY NOTES

i. The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of equipmentand evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in the schedules referto the appropriate reference in the drawings.

ii. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished, asasked for in the technical schedules enclosed.

iii. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the Contractor willbe required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his installation withoutextra cost to the contract.

iv. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should be setout on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with explanatorymanufacturer‟s catalogues, curves and selection char ts.

v. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or additionto the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements separately.


Dwg. No. Drawing Title

AC-01 3rd Basement Floor HVAC Layout

AC-02 2nd Basement Floor HVAC Layout

AC-03 1st Basement Floor HVAC Layout

AC-04 Ground Floor HVAC Layout

AC-05 Mezzanine Floor HVAC Layout

AC-06 First Floor HVAC Layout

AC-07 Typical 2nd to 5th Floor HVAC Layout

AC-08 Typical 6th to 7th Floor HVAC Layout

AC-09 8th Floor HVAC Layout

AC-10 9th Floor HVAC Layout

AC-11 Main Roof HVAC Layout

AC-12 Ground Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout




AEB 695-0785


AC-13 Mezzanine Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-14 First Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-15 Typical 2nd to 5th Floor Chilled Water piping Layout

AC-16 Typical 6th to 7th Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-17 8th Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-18 9th Floor Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-19 Main Roof Chilled Water Piping Layout

AC-20 Chilled Water Riser Diagram

AC-21 Treated Fresh Air Riser Diagram

AC-22 Toilet / Pantry Exhaust Air Riser Diagram

AC-23 Stairwell Pressurization Riser Diagram

AC-24 Schedule of Equipments

AC-25 Standard Details

AC-26 General Notes

AC-27 HVAC Life Safety strategy Notes


All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listedbelow.Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer and his decision shall be binding formake of each item before ordering the same.

1.0 Chillers

CARRIER FRANCE

TRANE FRANCEYORK MEXICO

2.0 Chilled Water Pumps

ITT BELL & GOSSETT USA AURORA USAHOLDEN & BROOK UKCRANE UK

3.0 Pressurisation Package

ITT BELL & GOSSETT USA




AEB 695-0786


PATTERSON USAHOLDEN & BROOK UKFLAMCO HOLLAND

4.0 Chemical Dosage Pot & Chemicals

HOUSEMAN UKCULLIGAN UKDEARBORN UK

5.0 Air Handling Units

VTSCLIMA EUROPEEUROCLIMA ITALYCARRIER EUROPETRANE EUROPE

YORK EUROPE

6.0 Fan Coil Units

VTSCLIMA EUROPEEUROCLIMA ITALYCARRIER ITALYTRANE ITALYYORK ITALY

7.0 Split A/C unit

CARRIER THAILANDTRANE THAILANDYORK BAHRAIN

8.0 Exhaust Fans

GREENHECK USAFLAKTWOODS UKELTA UKXPELAIR UKNUAIRE UK

9.0 G.I. Sheets

JAPANSOUTH AFRICAEUROPE

10.0 Silencers

KMC DOHA ATAI KSASAFID KSA




AEB 695-0787


11.0 Fire Dampers/Smoke dampers

RUSKIN USA ATAI KSA

SAFID KSA ACTION AIR UK

12.0 Volume Control Dampers

KMC DOHA ATAI KSASAFID KSA

13.0 Duct & Pipe Supports

GRINELL USA

SIKLA GERMANYHILTI GERMANYMUPRO GERMANYWEICCO INDIA

14.0 Valves

NEWMAN HATTERSELY UKHOLMES UKCRANE UK

ECONOSTO HOLLAND

15.0 Strainers

MUELLER STEAM EUROPENEWMAN HATTERSELY UKCRANE UKECONOSTO HOLLAND

16.0 Chilled Water pipes & Fittings

NIPPON STEEL JAPAN

TOBUS SPAINSUMITOMO JAPAN

17.0 Automatic Air Vent

FLAMCO,HOLLANDSPIRAXSARCO,USAECONOSTO ,HOLLAND

18.0 Insulation (Duct & Pipe)

AFICO KSAKIMMCO KUWAIT




AEB 695-0788


IZOCAM TURKEY

19.0 Air Terminals

KMC QATARCIACO KUWAITEUROREGISTER,,UK

20.0 Instruments & Gauges

TAYLORJOHNSONWEISS

21.0 Vibration Isolators

WEICCO INDIAMASON USA AMBERBOOTH USAKINETICS USA

22.0 Flexible Joints

MASON USAMINIKIN UKKINFLEX USA

23.0 Rubber Foam Insulation

RUBATEX USA ARMAFLEX UKGULF-O-FLEX UAESUPERLON USA

24.0 Duct Flexible Connections

DURODYNE USACONTRACT COMPONENTS LTD. UK

AERODUCT,UAE

25.0 Copper Pipes & Fittings

YORKSHIRE UKWEDNESBURY UKMUELLERBRASS USA

26.0 Flexible Duct

ATAITHERMAFLEX




AEB 695-0789


SUPAFLEX

27.0 Adhesive

FOSTER, USAMIRACLE, USAIDENDEN UK

28.0 Vapour barrier

FOSTER USAMIRACLE, USAIDENDEN UK

29 Impulse car park ventilation system

COLT , EUROPENOVENCO , EUROPEWOLTER ,EUROPEPSB , EUROPENUAIRE,EUROPE

30.0 Automatic Air VentSPIRAX SARCO USA

OVENTROP, GERMANYECONOSTO, HOLLAND




AEB 695-0790




SECTION – 23

FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION




AEB 695-07/20081

Section 23.0-Fire Fighting InstallationRev 0


23.1.00 FIRE FIGHTING GENERAL


23.1.02 Design Requirements

23.1.03 Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems

23.1.04 Regulatory Agencies

23.1.05 Submittals

23.1.06 Coordination




AEB 695-07/20082


23.2.00 PRODUCTS

23.2.01 General

23.2.02 Piping Products

23.2.03 Pipe Supports and Sleeves

23.2.04 General Purpose Valves

23.2.05 Standpipe and Fire Hose Valves

23.2.06 Alarms

23.2.07 Supervisory Devices

23.2.08 System Accessories

23.2.09 Fire Department Connections

23.2.10 Sprinklers and Accessories

23.2.11 Stock of Spare Sprinklers

23.2.12 Cabinets

23.2.13 Fire Hydrant- External

23.2.14 Control Valves

23.2.15 Locks

23.2.16 Monitored Isolation Valve

23.2.17 Portable Fire Extinguishers

23.2.18 Fire Pumps




AEB 695-07/20083


23.3.00 EXECUTION

23.3.01 Preparation

23.3.02 Installation

23.3.03 Field Quality Control

23.3.04 Cleaning and Flushing

23.3.05 Pre-Commissioning Works

23.3.06 Testing

23.3.07 Painting

23.3.08 Labels and identification

23.3.09 Schedule of Approved Manufactures





AEB 695-07/20084


FIRE FIGHTING GENERAL

23.01.00 GENERAL

Work covered under this section includes furnishing of material, labor, and equipment

to install fire protection system as indicated on drawings and specified herein.

Include incidental work necessary to make fire protection system complete,satisfactory, and ready for operation.

A specialist Contractor shall execute the complete scope of work under this contract.

The Scheme and Selection of equipment and components as shown on the drawingsare indicative, all the design parameters are to be cross verified and sized accordinglyon a need and requirement basis, by the Specialist Contractor assigned andnominated by the Main Contractor to carryout the job.

The Profile of the Specialist Contractor need to be submitted to the Consultant – incharge for the project, prior to the nomination by the Main Contractor, and theConsultant‟s Decision will be final and binding on the Main Contractor.

23.01.01 SCOPE OF WORK

The Fire Fighting Services include, but not limited to the following:

a) Fire Fighting Pumpsb) Hose reel cabinetsc) Sprinkler System

d) Fire department connections.e) Piping products.f) Pipe supports.g) Pipe sleeves.h) General purpose valves.i) Standpipe and fire hose valves. j) Fire extinguishersk) Alarms.l) Supervisory devices.m) System accessories.

and shall be executed as shown on the drawings, and all the equipment and

components shall be approved by the Fire Department of State of Qatar and any otherstatutory bodies as required and confirm to the NFPA Standards.




AEB 695-07/20085


23.01.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

System requirements and pipe sizes shall be determined using hydraulic calculationsprepared in accordance with NFPA Standards.

System requirements to comply with applicable NFPA Standards (as referenced bythe authority having jurisdiction).

23.01.03 HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED SPRINKLER SYSTEMS:

Contractor to prepare/submit for approval and be responsible for final hydrauliccalculations including accuracy of water supply information.

Total demand including hose streams to be calculated with 90% of the available watersupply pressure (i.e.; 10% of the pressure reserved as a safety factor).

Methods used and information given on hydraulic calculations to meet requirements ofNFPA 13 with following exceptions:

a. Where pipe sizes are indicated on plans, these sizes may exceed minimum coderequirements and shall be sized as indicated. Where pipe routes and/or locationsare indicated on plans, locations are suggested for coordination purposes. Otherlocations/routes are acceptable, coordinate with other trades.

b. Calculations of the most hydraulically remote area shall be based on actual floorarea covered and the design density (gpm/sq. ft.) shown on the plans. The remotearea shall be equal to or larger than the area stated in the design density andshall include all sprinkler heads within that area.

c. Floor area covered by sprinkler shall be determined by using distance betweensprinkler and wall, or half distance between sprinklers, whichever is greater.Distance to be determined in two directions, parallel with branch line andperpendicular to branch line. Multiply longest parallel distance by longestperpendicular distance. Multiply resultant by four to determine area covered bysprinkler.

23.01.04 REGULATORY AGENCIES

Installation shall comply with following:

1. Building and fire safety codes of the authority having jurisdiction.2. Owner's insurance carrier or Insurance Services Office.3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards (as referenced by the

authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance carrier).4. Underwriters‟ Laboratories (UL) & FM (Ffactory Mutual) 5. Design documents.




AEB 695-07/20086


23.01.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

Comply with Tender Invitation documents.

Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sectionslisted below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood andcan be reviewed together.

B. Product Data:

Manufacturer‟s specifications and technical data including performance, construction,and fabrication.

Submit product data for each manufactured component.

C. Shop Drawings:

Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, andinstallation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.

1. Submit shop drawings for each complete system or assembly of shop-fabricated,field-fabricated, and manufactured components.

2. Special requirements:a. Unless otherwise noted, prepare shop drawings in accordance with

requirements for "Working Plans" as described in NFPA Standard 13.

b. Certify Shop Drawings by a Professional Engineer registered and currentlylicensed to practice in Qatar.

c. Draw floor plans at 1:100 scale or greater. Submit reproducible copies of alldrawings.

d. Cloud and key with date to indicate areas that have been changed on all re-submittals.

e. Calculations for Hydraulically Designed Systems:1) Calculations are required for hydraulically designed fire protection

systems.2) Unless otherwise noted, prepare calculations in accordance with

requirements of"Hydraulic Calculations Procedures" as described in NFPA Standard 13.

3) Include calculations with submission of Shop Drawings.

D. Quality Control:

Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section.a. Document results of test required by authority having jurisdiction, the Owner's

insurance carrier, and listed NFPA Standards.b. Document test results on standard NFPA forms or a form acceptable to the

Architect / Engineer.




AEB 695-07/20087


E. Submittal Sequence:

1. First, submit reproducible copies of each shop drawing to Architect/Engineeralong with product data and hydraulic calculations.

a. All submittals are to be complete.b. All shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product data shall be included in

one submittal.c. Identify all material.

2. Second, submit two sets of the revised shop drawings to the Owner who willforward one copy to their insurance carrier for review.

a. Send a copy of transmittal to Architect/Engineer.b. Make changes to shop drawings after these reviews.c. Circle changes to indicate areas that have been changed.

3. Submit the final shop drawings with approvals from the approved agencies to the

Architect/Engineer.

F - Alternative Materials

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Scheduleof Manufacturer‟s. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to validreasons , with official written apologies from manufacturers for not being able tosupply the requested materials. Only in such cases, the Consultant will consider thealternatives, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s decision will be finalregarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance ofthe same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor isfore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must bereplaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then suchreplacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but at the Contractor‟s expensesetc.

23.01.06 COORDINATION

Coordination with Construction Documents:

1. Refer to drawings for smoke and fire ratings of walls and floors.2. Refer to drawings for exact location and mounting height of cabinets housing fire

department valves and hoses.3. If shown, sprinklers to be located as noted on architectural and mechanical plans.4. Architect/Engineer, after reviewing installation, reserves the right to direct the

contractor to make minor adjustments in head locations at no additional cost tothe Owner.




AEB 695-07/20088


23.02.00 PRODUCTS

23.02.01 GENERAL

List products by name and manufacturer as listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment

Directory and FM Approval Guide and conform to requirements contained in ContractDocuments.

Material and equipment to be new and currently listed or approved.

Where more than one of any specific item is required, items to be of same type andmanufacturer.

Products to be UL listed, and preferred FM approved as well.

23.02.02 PIPING PRODUCTS

A. General:

Only pipe and fitting materials listed in this specification shall be acceptable for use.Extra lightweight steel, schedule 5 steel, non-metallic products, and associated fittingsare not acceptable.

B. Related Standards:

1. All pipe works shall be Galvanized Sseamless to schedule 40: ASTM A532. Fitting manufacturing standards:

a. Galvanized threaded fittings, Class 125 pound, and 250 pound: comply with

ASTM A53b. Malleable iron threaded fittings, Class 150 pound, and 300 pound: comply

with ANSI B16.3.c. Cast iron flanged fittings, Class 125 pound, and 250 pound: comply with ANSI

B16.1.d. Butt welded fittings: comply with ANSI B16.9.e. Flange gaskets: comply with ANSI B16.24.f. Fastener bolts: comply with ANSI B18.2.1.g. Fastener nuts: comply with ANSI B18.2.2.

C. Threaded Fittings:

1. Galvanized, 125 pounds:Pipe Size Maximum Working Pressure

1" through 2" 300 psi2-1/2" through 12" 175 psi

2. Cast iron, 250 pounds: 400 psi maximum working pressure.3. Malleable iron, 150 pounds: 300 psi maximum working pressure.4. Malleable iron, 300 pounds:




AEB 695-07/20089


Pipe Size Maximum Working Pressure1" through 2" 1500 psi2-1/2" through 4" 1000 psi5" and 6" 800 psi

D. Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

1. Galvanized, 125 pounds: 175 psi maximum working pressure.2. Galvanized, 250 pounds: 400 psi maximum working pressure.3. Flange gaskets: 1/16 inch thick.4. Bolts and nuts: Bolt length to allow not less than 1/8 inch exposed thread beyond

nut.

E. Grooved Fittings:1. For connection to cut or rolled grooved pipe.2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed maximum system working pressure.3. Fittings to be of same manufacturer as couplings.

F. Welded Fittings:

1. Butt welded or socket welded branch lets, 3 inches through 12 inches.2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed maximum system working pressure.

23.02.03 PIPE SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES

Design: Provide in this section in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (asreferenced by the authority having jurisdiction).

23.02.04 GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES

All valves shall be marked with the manufacturer‟s name and the appropriate British or American standard or shall fully comply with NFPA standards.Valves to be FM approved and/or UL listed.

A. Indicating Control Valve (O S & Y Gate Valve):

1. Rising indicating stem.2. 1 inch through 2 inches: screwed ends.3. 2-1/2 inch through 12 inches: flanged ends.

O.S & Y gate valves shall be provided to each branch pipe and, at the locations wherethe flow is required, either fully open or fully closed, as indicated on the tenderdrawings or as directed by the Engineer in order to isolate that part of the system inthe event of leaks and maintenance, which may arise at the time of commissioningand pressure testing. All main sprinkler system isolating valves shall be listed indicating valves and shall beconnected with the tamper switches. All valves controlling water supplies to thesprinkler system including floor control valves shall be accessible to the authorizedpersons during emergency.




AEB 695-07/200810


Gate valves shall be made of cast iron and tested to 300-psi hydraulic pressure.Valves of 50 mm dia shall be screwed ends and provided with unions on both sides.Valves more than 50 mm dia shall be with flanged ends. Valves shall bemanufactured in accordance with NFPA standards.

Valves used as drain valve and valves near jockey pump shall be standard gatevalves. All other valves shall be UL listed, FM approved O.S & Y gate valves.

C. Globe and Ball Valve: Bronze body with screwed ends.

D. Check Valve:

Bronze body with screwed ends. 1 inch through 2 inches.

Listed check valves shall be provided in discharge line of each pump, fire departmentconnection and at other locations in accordance with their listing or as directed by the

engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of cast iron andconform to B.S. 5154. Valves shall be swing pattern, metal-to-metal seat and tested to300-psi hydraulic pressure.

E. Alarm check valves:

This shall be NFPA approved to be constructed and equipped to give clear positiveaudible alarm at any water flow through the sprinkler system equal to or greater thanthat from a single automatic sprinkler. It shall be suitable for vertical/ horizontalinstallations as per as the system requirement or as directed by the engineer and forthe variable pressure of water supply.

Alarm check valves shall be of flanged, designed to withstand up to working pressureof 300 psi. It shall have cast iron body and a clapper hinge, bronze clapper assembly,pilot valve assembly and other moving parts.

Alarm check valves shall be complete with retarding chamber 2” main drain valve, upstream and downstream pressure gauge cocks, alarm control and test valves,pressure operated alarm switch to actuate a bell, horn, or siren. Water motor andalarm gong shall be located preferably outside the building at a location to engineer‟sapproval.

F. Rubber Face Check Valve: Swing type with flanged ends. 2-1/2 inches through 12inches.

G. Wafer or Grooved End Swing Type Check Valve & shall be UL listed FM

approval.

H. Reduced Principal Zone Backflow Preventer




AEB 695-07/200811


23.02.05 STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE VALVES

A. Fire Department Valves:

1. Finish: Chrome plated cast brass.

2. Inlet connection: 2-1/2" female NPT.3. Outlet connection: 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" chrome plated male IPT outlet adapter, cap, and

chain.

B. Hose Valves:

1. Finish: Chrome plated cast brass.2. Inlet connection: 1-1/2" female NPT.3. Outlet connection: 1-1/2" male IPT thread.

23.02.06 ALARMS (FOR EXTERIOR USE)

Electric Alarm Bell:

1. 8 inch diameter gong.2. Rated for 12 VDC, 24 VDC or 120 VAC.3. Suitable for exterior use.4. Minimum sound rating: 80 db at 10'-0".5. UL Listed.6. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.

23.02.07 SUPERVISORY DEVICES

A. Supervisory (Tamper) Switches:

Design Requirements:a. Switches to indicate position of control valve.b. Rated for 120 VAC - 24 VDC.c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.d. To be connected to the fire alarm system.

B. Water Flow Switches:

1. Paddle type for pipe sizes 1-1/4 inches through 2 inches:a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure.b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts.c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.d. To be connected to the fire alarm system.

2. Paddle Type: For pipe sizes 2 inches through 8 inches, with 0 - 70 secondadjustable pneumatic retard.a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure.b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts.c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.




AEB 695-07/200812


23.02.08 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Test and Drain Connection:

1. Manufactured combination test, drain, and sight glass fitting.

2. 175 psi working pressure.3. 1/4 inch NPT gauge fitting.

B. Pressure Gauges:

3-1/2 inch dial marked in 5 pound increments.

1. 1/4 inch NPT.2. 175 psi working pressure.

Pressure gauges shall be provided on the discharge of the pumps and on wet pipe

sprinkler system riser as shown on the drawing. Each gauge shall not be less than100 mm dia in dial size and shall comprise of a corrosion resistant housing with glasswindow and brass trim. It shall have accuracy within +/-5% of the full-scale deflectionwhen working at 50 degree C. each gauge shall be provided with a gauge cock. Thepressure gauges shall be calibrated in psi or bars, or both. Each gauge shall have arange of 0 to 11/2 times the normal working pressure.

C. Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.

D. Insert Sight Glasses: 175 psi working pressure.

E. Downspout Nozzle (express drain outlet):

1. Wall mounted downspout nozzle.2. Rough bronze finish.3. Full line size. Terminate at and provide concrete splash block.

23.02.09 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Design Requirements:

1. UL Listed.2. Threads to conform to local fire department standards.

3. Plugs and chains.4. Pin lug hose thread swivels.5. Polished brass finish.

B. Type 1: Wall Mounted Flush Type Siamese

1. Escutcheon lettered "AUTO SPRINKLER" or as indicated on drawings for eachrespective system.

2. Double clapper.3. Size to be 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 4 inches, unless noted otherwise.




AEB 695-07/200813


C. Type 2: Exposed Type:

1. Lettered “STANDPIPE” or as indicated. 2. Double clapper.3. Size: 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 4 inches unless noted otherwise.

Siamese connection assembly shall be installed for the use of Fire brigade, as shownon the drawings.The Siamese connection assembly shall be gun metal with two inlets. Each inlet shallconsist of a 65-mm. dia. instantaneous male coupling and a non-return valve andprotected with a cap secured by a suitable length of chain. The coupling shall confirmto BS 336.

The Siamese connection assembly shall have 100-mm. dia.-flanged outlet forattachment to the wet riser, and equipped with 25-mm.-drain valve to drain the riser.

The Siamese connection assembly shall be finished with red color paint.

The Siamese connection assembly shall be enclosed inside stainless steel flushmounted box with a labeled wired glass door, located at 1200 mm. above the groundfinish level.

23.02.10 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General:

1. Minimum sprinkler orifice size shall be 1/2 inch.2. Sprinklers in non-public spaces such as mechanical/electrical equipment, and

storage rooms and sprinklers on exposed piping shall have brass finish unlessnoted otherwise.

3. Sprinklers and escutcheons in finished areas to have polished brass or whitefinish or finish as noted on plans.

4. Style, size, and temperature rating to be type specifically approved for such use.5. Thermosensitive glass bulbs to be of all one color for a given temperature

classification.6. For each sprinkler style, all sprinklers to be of same type (fusible link or glass

bulb).

B. Upright Sprinklers:

1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response.2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response.3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response.4. Installation style:a. Exposed: No escutcheon

C. Pendent Sprinklers:1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response.2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response.3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response.4. Installation style:




AEB 695-07/200814


a. Exposed: No escutcheon.

D. Vertical Sidewall Sprinklers:

1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response.

2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response.3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response.4. Normal or extended coverage type is acceptable.5. Installation style:

a. Exposed: No escutcheon.

E. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers:

1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response.2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response.3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response.4. Normal or extended coverage type is acceptable.5. Fixed or field adjustable type is acceptable.6. Installation style:a. Exposed: No escutcheon

F. Sprinkler Guards: Metal with red finish.

G. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet: Wall mounted. Storage capacity of not less thanminimum designated by NFPA 13.

H. Sprinkler Wrench: To match style and brand of sprinklers used

Sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13. These shall be local Fireofficer‟s approved, pendant glass bulb sprinklers rated for 79 degree C. for sprinklersmounted in non air conditioned areas and 68 degree C. for sprinklers mounted in airconditioned areas, and suitable for maximum ambient temperature of 50 degree C.sprinklers shall have k factor of 80 with 15 mm (1/2”) MSPT male inlets.

Recessed type of sprinklers shall be installed in the false ceilings in order to make thesurroundings decorative. There shall be a 2-piece design of the recessed enclosureand mounting plate allows installation of the sprinklers prior to the installation of thefalse ceiling. Both sprinklers and escutcheon plates shall have chrome finish.

Toilet and pantry areas (AHU Plant room) shall be provided with side wall type

sprinklers and shall have chrome finish.

Samples to be submitted to the consultant for approval.

Side sprinkler head to be installed at plant room of swimming pool.

23.02.11 STOCK OF SPARE SPRINKLERS

A stock of spare sprinklers shall be provided and stored in a cabinet installed at asuitable location in the basement. The number of spare sprinklers is to be inaccordance with NFPA 13, 1994, clause no. 2-2.7 or 20 no. special sprinkler wrench




AEB 695-07/200815


shall be provided in the cabinet to be used for the removal and installation ofsprinklers.

23.02.12 CABINETS

Combination Fire Department Valve & Extinguisher Cabinets:

1. Type: Surface mounted.2. Cabinet: heavy gauge steel.3. Door and Trim: Weather resistant, one piece, heavy gauge stainless steel.a. Solid door labeled "FIRE DEPT. VALVE" and "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" with

vertical black lettering 1-1/2" high.4. Contains:

a. Cast brass 2-1/2 inch fire department valve as specified above with roughbrass finish.

b. Cast brass 1-1/2 inch angle hose valve with 1-1/2" IPT thread connection.

c. Steel hose rack - chrome plated or painted red.d. 200 feet of 1-1/2", single jacket, 100% synthetic lined fire hose. UL labeled300 lb test. Elk-Lite II hose.

e. Brass hose couplings.f. 1-1/2 inch, adjustable fog type nozzle. Brass construction with rubber bumper.g. Space for fire extinguisher (by Owner).

a. FIRE HOSE REEL

Fire Hose Reel shall be installed where shown on the drawings.

The Fire Hose shall be automatic swinging recessed type.

Hose reels shall be in accordance with EN694 & EN671-1. The hose reel shall have a30 meters long of 25 mm. internal diameter reinforced non-kickable rubber hosecapable of withstanding a working pressure of 16 bar. The hose shall be wound on afabricated steel drum with circular side plates.

The hose reel shall turn on automatically when 1.5 to 1.8 meters of hose is withdrawnfrom the real/ drum.

The hose reel shall be equipped with shut-off valve for connecting with pipework.

The hose nozzle shall be chrome plated brass, JET/SPRAY/SHUT/ OFF nozzle, and

shall have a 6 mm orifice.

b. FIRE HOSE CABINET

The fire hose cabinet shall consist of-

a) Cabinet: Cabinet and door leaf shall be made of 1.5 mm stainless steel with allaround folded edges, door leafs hinged flush mounted on door frame.

Cabinet shall be equipped with vertical wired glass window on front door. Thecabinet shall be stainless steel Matt finished.




AEB 695-07/200816


The door shall be recessed type base with aluminum turn handle chrome platedand labeled „Fire Hose Reel‟.

b) Fire hose synthetic of 65-mm diameter and 40 m long equipped with brass malecoupling for the connection with the landing valve, and with aluminum alloy nozzle

and to the fire departments approval

The fire hose unit shall include the landing valve specified above.

The fire hose unit shall be located at 1400 mm above the finished floor level andshall include both CO2 type and dry chemical fire extinguisher of the ABC type asspecified.

23.02.13 CONTROL VALVES

Each control valve set shall comprise the following equipment, plus any other ancillaryequipment necessary.

1) Main stop valve

2) Alarm valve

3) Waste & test valve

4) Installation & pressure gauge.

5) All the equipment necessary for the correct functioning of the control valves.

6) Water motor alarm gong.

7) Towns main pressure gauge.

8) Drain manifold from control valves.

9) Pump initiating pressure switches (including wiring) to main booster pumpcontroller.

10) Alarm pressure switches wired to Fire Indicator Panel.

11) Spares Cabinet, complete with sufficient spare sprinklers and spare sprinkler

spanner.

12) Brigade booster inlet.

13) Street key to main sluice valve.

14) Block plan of the area of the building serviced by the valve set, showing thecomplete site and the building outline.

23.02.14 LOCKS




AEB 695-07/200817


Locks shall be of type suitable for the Qatar Fire Department type key. If a non -brigade key is used on doorways to control valves, pump rooms, etc. a key shall beplaced in a box with a brigade lock, adjacent to the door.

23.02.15 MONITORED ISOLATION VALVE

Supply and install monitoring switches on all sprinkler and hydrant system isolationvalves, to register an alarm if the valves are moved from the fully open position.

The switch, means of actuation and power supply shall be of approved manufactureand function.

23.02.16 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

The contractor shall supply and install portable fire extinguishers in the positionsshown on the drawings.

The fire extinguishers shall be of dry chemical ABC type of 6 Kg. capacity, with arugged brass operating valve, large size operating lever, full vision pressure gauge,discharge hose and heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard, scratch resistant finish.

Where fire extinguishers are located in electrical rooms, plant rooms they shall becomplete with wall mounting brackets.

The cabinet shall be equipped with wired glass window on front door. Cabinet shall beof matt finish.

Instructions shall be screen printed on the front door

Fire extinguishing 2.5 kg and fire blankets to be added at all kitchens.

23.02.17 FIRE PUMPS

The Contractor shall supply and install fire-fighting pumps as shown and detailed onthe drawings.

Fire pumps and control panel shall be UL listed & FM approval.

The fire sprinkler pump/ duty/standby and the Jockey pump, shall be completely fully

automatic, factory assembled, skid mounted units includes the following features: -

a) One duty pump for Sprinkler system, electrically drivenb) One Jockey pump, common for the system, electrically drivenc) One Stand-by pump, common for both, diesel engine drivend) Galvanized Steel framee) Galvanized suction and delivery manifolds with flanged connectionsf) Isolating valves and flexible connection on suction and delivery for each pumpg) Check valves on delivery for each pumph) Strainer on suction for each pumpi) Pressure gauges, pressure switches and pressure relief valves




AEB 695-07/200818


j) One Pressure vessel diaphragm type of 200 liters capacityk) Automatic control panell) Fire pump set (Duty / standby) to be electrical driven for hose reel and fire hydrant

Pump construction shall be in cast iron casing, bronze impeller, steel shaft complete

with steel base frame / plate.

The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and rated for continuous operation atambient temperature not less than 50 Deg. C, totally enclosed fan cooled withinsulation class F and IP 54-protection level and rated for 415 volt, 3 phase and 50Hz.

The Engine shall be of 4-stroke mechanical injection air-cooled type with automaticspeed regulator and flywheel housing.

The Engine shall be provided with double battery kit (12 VDC) and charger, completewith exhaust pipe (insulated) and arranged to discharge outside.

The Engine shall be manually switched off.

The Control Panel shall consist of the following: -1 Starter with Overload protection for each motor.1 Residual current circuit breaker (for each pump)1 Set timing relays1 Hand / off / Auto switch for each pump1 System Mode selector switch1 Run and Trip Indication Lamps for each motor3 Indicating Lamps, “Power On”, “Low Water” and “Phase Failure”.

1 Main Neutral Link1 Cyclic Controller1 Pressure switch and adjustable setting for each pump1 Dry run prevention relay and floats switch in feed tank1 Set of Volt free contacts for BMS interface1 Multi attempt relay to allow at least 3 attempts for Engine Starting1 Earth leakage sensor with hooter, mute push button and Indication lamp.

The construction of the Panel to be to IP 65 level.

The “hand” button shall be spring-loaded and shall override all control circuitsexception the overload, so that the selected pump can be checked for performance

and operation.

The pump sets shall operate under the control of pressure switches

The control panel design shall ensure -

a) Automatic operation of all pumps under the control of pressure switches andcyclic relay. The duty pump selection switch shall be in “Auto” position.

b) Automatic switch over to stand-by pump in case of failure of the duty pump.




AEB 695-07/200819


c) The hand position of H-O-A switches is only foe testing of pump and shall bespring-loaded. Alternatively non-latching push button shall be used for startingpump in HAND mode.

d) Dry run protection based on level switch in the feed tank with indication.e) Volt free terminals for remote indications of common fault including low water level

in feed tank, and pump on demand.

The fire pump set shall be constructed to local Fire department‟s requirements and acertificate stating this shall be provided with the pumps and shall confirm to B.S. andshall be a single stage horizontal split casing centrifugal type.

.

23.03.00 EXECUTION

23.03.01 PREPARATION

Ensure concrete bases are provided for floor mounted equipment.

23.03.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Fire Protection System in compliance with applicable NFPA standards (asreferenced by the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Acceptable pipe connection methods:Schedule 40: Cut grooves or threaded.

2. Acceptable pipe size reducers:a. Reducing fittings.b. Tapered reducers.

3. Companion flanges or reducing grooved couplings are unacceptable.

4. Install piping as follows, unless noted otherwise:a. Parallel to walls.b. Above suspended ceilings.c. Behind walls.

5. Galvanized pipe and fittings:

a. Use where exposed to corrosive atmospheres in the following locations:Exterior piping.

b. Field paint damaged galvanizing on pipe and fittings.

6. Label piping appropriately.

C. Pipe Supports:

Install hangers in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as referenced by theauthority having jurisdiction). All pipe hangers bolts, nuts, washers and other hardwareto be hot dipped galvanized construction for use at the cooling towers. All outdoor




AEB 695-07/200820


piping to be hot dipped galvanized construction with all threads coated to preventcorrosion from outdoor elements.

D. Pipe Sleeves and Seals:

Install sleeves and seals in compliance with Section 15140.

E. Drains:

Provide drainage facilities as follows:a. In accordance with NFPA standards, and as indicated.b. Drain entire system by gravity.c. Drain size not less than 3/4 inch.d. Provide nipple and cap or brass plug for systems or partial systems of 5

gallons or less.e. Provide valve and plug for systems or partial systems of more than 5 gallons.

F. Control Valves:

1. Bolt position on lugged butterfly valves to allow removal of downstream piping.2. Globe or ball valves to be used as shutoff valves for:

a. Water piping systems.b. Drain valves.c. Test valves.

G. Reduced Pressure (Zone Principal) Backflow Preventer:

1. Size as indicated on plans.

2. Install where shown and in accordance with manufacturer‟srecommendations.

H. Standpipe and Fire hose Valves:

Mount valves minimum 1070 mm and maximum 1525 mm above finished floorelevation.

I. Alarms:

Install electric alarms as follows:a. Above fire department Siamese connection or as indicated on plans.

b. No less than 2.5 meters above finished grade.c. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.

J. Supervisory Devices:

1. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.2. Provide supervisor (tamper) switch for each control valve.3. Provide water flow switch for each wet pipe system and where otherwise

indicated.a. Locate minimum distance recommended from change in flow direction.b. Field adjust for proper flow retard.




AEB 695-07/200821


K. Combination Test and Drain Connection:

1. Locate in accessible location.2. Pipe express drain discharge as directed on the drawings.

3. Provide pressure gauge at test connection with brass 3-way valve and test plug.

L. Down Spout Nozzle:

1. Verify location with architectural elevations.2. Provide pipe increaser for connection to nozzle when drain line size is less

than available minimum size nozzle outlet.

M. Fire Department Connections:

1. Install fire department connections where indicated on plans.2. Install not less than 1 meter and not more 1.2 meters above adjacent grade.

Verify with architectural elevations.

N. Sprinklers:

1. Unless noted otherwise, provide sprinkler types as indicated on drawings.2. Install sprinklers in fittings after piping is in place.3. Install exposed sprinklers with frame parallel to branch line.4. Install sprinkler guards where sprinklers are within 2.2 meters of floor, or when

subject to injury.5. Line sprinklers up with themselves.6. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, deliver spare heads and wrench and

place in spare head cabinet(s).

O. Cabinets:

Mount cabinets at elevation indicated on architectural drawings.

P. Signs:

Provide permanent signs to identify:a. Drains.b. Test connections.c. Shut-off valves.

d. Risers supplying hydraulically designed systems.e. Each alarm.

Q. Power Wiring: Furnished and installed under Division 16.

23.03.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Arrange, conduct, and document all performance and acceptance tests requiredby the applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction.

1. Give sufficient advance notice of time of test (2 week minimum).




AEB 695-07/200822


2. Test must be witnessed by:a. Owner's fire department and maintenance representative.b. Architect/Engineer representative.c. Authorized inspector.d. Owner's insurance representative.

3. Deficiencies to be corrected at no additional cost to owner.4. Use new pipe and fittings as necessary to correct leaks.5. Temporary repairs of leaks not acceptable.6. Repair water damage caused by leaks or test procedures.

B. Conduct tests prior to:

1. Painting.2. Covering.3. Concealing in any way.

C. Pressure test control valves as follows:

1. While under full system pressure.2. Open and close each valve.3. Demonstrate proper operation to owner.

D. Test drain valves and test valves as follows:

1. Open to full flow for two minutes.2. Close to test for tightness.

23.03.04 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

Procedure:

1. Clean and flush piping systems and connections in accordance with the applicableNFPAStandards and the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Connect hoses to outlets and discharge to sewer.3. Discharge water must be free of rust, stain and discoloration.4. Remove stains caused by discharge.5. Replace equipment and materials that cannot be cleaned.6. Provide hoses and hose connections for this work.

23.03.05 PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS

Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in storagewith their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves andsundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable racks. Allsuch stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be supplied bythe contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shallbe taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry.

Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the entireinstallation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.




AEB 695-07/200823


All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During theflushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could bedamaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to thesatisfaction of the consultant.

23.03.06 TESTING

All paperwork and the whole installation shall be hydraulic pressure tested to twice thenormal working pressure or 16.0 bars whichever is greater. The Pressure shall bemaintained for a period of not less than 24 hours, and the drop in pressure recorded,and the drop in pressure shall be within the specified limits and as per the relevanceBritish standards.

Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure test shall be adequately protectedfrom the system during the tests.

All leaks are to be immediately repaired and the installations re-tested until the aboverequirements are obtained.

All the required tests are to be performed before application of the paint and valveadjustments made with the pumps in operation.

The Consultant‟s decision will be final and binding the contractor.

23.03.07 PAINTING

All pipe works for the fire fighting services shall be given one coat of rich primer and

two coats of “Post office Red” paint after installation and pressure testing.

23.03.08 LABELS & IDENTIFICATION

All items of Fire Protection Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and asper the requirements of the Fire Department.

23.3.09 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES- FIRE FIGHTING

Hose Reel Cabinets THORN NORSEN UKNOHA NORWAYMOYNE IRELANDNAFFCO UAE

Fire Fighting Pumps ARRORA USAITT USAPATTERSON USAREADY BAFFALO USAPEARLESS USA

Sprinkler Heads CENTRAL USATYCO USA




AEB 695-07/200824


GRINNEL USAVICTAULIC USA

Control Valves KIDDE UKMACRON UK

GRINNEL USA

Landing Valve ANGUS UKEL KHART BRASS USATYCO USA

Fire Extinguisher CHUBB UKNAFFCO UK ANSUL UK ANGUS UK

Fire Fighting Pipes SILKTUB ROMANIABITTERTUB ROMANIAECONOSTO EUROPE

Fire Fighting Fittings CRANE UK(Threaded) FULK UK

NIPPON JAPAN

Fire Fighting Fittings VICTAULIC USA(Groove Mechanical) GRINNEL USA

CENTRAL USA

Support System HELTI GERMANY / USASIKLA GERMANY/ USAFISHER GERMANY/ USA


FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

FF-01 3RD

BASEMENT FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-02 2ND BASEMENT FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-03 1ST

BASEMENT FLOOR FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-04 GROUND FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-05 MEZANNINE FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-06 1ST FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

FF-07 2ND

-5TH FLOOR FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT

Volume 3 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications

Documents

Transcript of Volume 3 Electrical and Mechanical Specifications